SlideShare a Scribd company logo
Oracle® iSupplier Portal
User's Guide
Release 12.2
Part No. E48972-10
November 2022
Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide , Release 12.2
Part No. E48972-10
Copyright © 2009, 2022, Oracle and/or its affiliates.
Primary Author: Chetna Arora
Contributing Author: Gowri Arur, Pragya Nair, Smile Nagpal
This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on
use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your
license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license,
transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse
engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is
prohibited.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If
you find any errors, please report them to us in writing.
If this is software or related documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on
behalf of the U.S. Government, then the following notice is applicable:
U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS: Oracle programs, including any operating system, integrated software,
any programs installed on the hardware, and/or documentation, delivered to U.S. Government end users are
"commercial computer software" pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-
specific supplemental regulations. As such, use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation of the
programs, including any operating system, integrated software, any programs installed on the hardware,
and/or documentation, shall be subject to license terms and license restrictions applicable to the programs. No
other rights are granted to the U.S. Government.
This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications.
It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications that
may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you
shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its
safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this
software or hardware in dangerous applications.
Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of
their respective owners.
Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are
used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. AMD, Opteron,
the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro
Devices. UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group.
This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information about content, products,
and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly
disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services unless
otherwise set forth in an applicable agreement between you and Oracle. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates
will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party
content, products, or services, except as set forth in an applicable agreement between you and Oracle.
For information about Oracle's commitment to accessibility, visit the Oracle Accessibility Program website at
http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=docacc.
Oracle customers that have purchased support have access to electronic support through My Oracle Support.
For information, visit http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=info or visit http://www.oracle.
com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=trs if you are hearing impaired.
iii
Contents
Send Us Your Comments
Preface
1 Introduction to Oracle iSupplier Portal
Overview................................................................................................................................... 1-1
About Oracle iSupplier Portal.................................................................................................. 1-1
How to Use This Guide............................................................................................................. 1-2
Getting Started Information..................................................................................................... 1-2
Transaction and View-Only Document Information............................................................... 1-2
Profile Information....................................................................................................................1-3
Buying Company View Information........................................................................................ 1-3
Where to Start ........................................................................................................................... 1-3
2 Registration
Overview................................................................................................................................... 2-1
Registering Suppliers................................................................................................................ 2-2
Tracking the Registration Status of Prospective Suppliers......................................................2-4
Reopening Rejected Registration Requests from Prospective Suppliers................................ 2-4
Registering Users.......................................................................................................................2-6
3 Navigating and Searching
Overview................................................................................................................................... 3-1
Using the Oracle iSupplier Portal Home Page......................................................................... 3-1
Setting Up User Preferences......................................................................................................3-4
Searching................................................................................................................................... 3-5
iv
4 Order Information
Order Information..................................................................................................................... 4-1
Purchase Orders ........................................................................................................................4-2
Viewing Purchase Orders......................................................................................................... 4-3
Printing Purchase Orders.......................................................................................................... 4-7
Acknowledging Purchase Orders ............................................................................................ 4-7
Submitting Change Requests................................................................................................. 4-12
Splitting Shipments and Pay Items........................................................................................ 4-21
Using Work Confirmations (Complex-Work Purchase Orders Only)................................... 4-23
Canceling Orders or Shipments..............................................................................................4-30
Managing Deliverables........................................................................................................... 4-31
Work Orders............................................................................................................................ 4-32
Agreements.............................................................................................................................. 4-32
Purchase Order Revision History........................................................................................... 4-35
Requests For Quotes (RFQ)..................................................................................................... 4-36
Viewing Time Cards............................................................................................................... 4-37
5 Shipping Information
Shipping Overview................................................................................................................... 5-1
Shipping Information............................................................................................................... 5-2
Using Advance Shipment Notices and Advance Shipment Billing Notices........................... 5-2
Creating Advance Shipment Notices and Advance Shipment Billing Notices.......................5-5
Uploading Advance Shipment Notices and Advance Shipment Billing Notices................... 5-8
Canceling Advance Shipment Notices and Advance Shipment Billing Notices.................... 5-9
Uploading Routing Requests.................................................................................................. 5-10
Viewing Routing Responses................................................................................................... 5-11
Viewing Delivery Schedules.................................................................................................. 5-11
Viewing Overdue Receipts..................................................................................................... 5-12
Receiving Information............................................................................................................ 5-13
Viewing Receipts.....................................................................................................................5-13
Viewing Returns......................................................................................................................5-15
Viewing On-Time Delivery Performance...............................................................................5-15
Quality Information................................................................................................................ 5-16
6 Planning and Inventory Information
Overview................................................................................................................................... 6-1
Forecast Information................................................................................................................. 6-2
Product Information.................................................................................................................. 6-2
Viewing Supplier Item Summary.............................................................................................6-2
v
Viewing Item Inventory Information....................................................................................... 6-4
Maintaining Capacity Information........................................................................................... 6-5
Maintaining Order Modifiers................................................................................................... 6-7
Vendor Managed Inventory...................................................................................................... 6-8
Consigned Inventory................................................................................................................. 6-9
Viewing Schedules from Supplier Scheduling...................................................................... 6-10
7 Invoice and Payment Information
Overview................................................................................................................................... 7-1
Submitting Invoices.................................................................................................................. 7-1
Viewing Invoice Information................................................................................................... 7-6
Viewing AP AR Netting Report................................................................................................7-9
Viewing Payment Information............................................................................................... 7-11
8 Supplier Profile Management
Overview................................................................................................................................... 8-1
Supplier Profile Management Flow..........................................................................................8-2
General Company Information ................................................................................................8-3
Company Profile........................................................................................................................8-4
Tax Details................................................................................................................................. 8-5
Address Book.............................................................................................................................8-7
Contact Directory.......................................................................................................................8-9
Business Classifications.......................................................................................................... 8-12
Products and Services..............................................................................................................8-13
Banking Details....................................................................................................................... 8-16
Creating Banking Details........................................................................................................ 8-16
Responding to Buyer Surveys................................................................................................. 8-19
Manage Supplier Broker......................................................................................................... 8-19
9 Buying Company View
Buying Company View............................................................................................................. 9-1
Using the Oracle iSupplier Portal Home Page with the Buying Company View................... 9-2
Order Information..................................................................................................................... 9-3
Purchase Orders.........................................................................................................................9-3
Agreements................................................................................................................................ 9-6
Purchase History........................................................................................................................9-7
Acknowledging Changes.......................................................................................................... 9-8
Shipment Information.............................................................................................................9-10
Shipment Notices.................................................................................................................... 9-10
Receipts.................................................................................................................................... 9-11
vi
Account Information .............................................................................................................. 9-12
Invoices.................................................................................................................................... 9-12
Payments..................................................................................................................................9-13
Tolerance Based Auto-Approval............................................................................................. 9-14
10 Electronic Kanban
iSupplier Portal and Electronic Kanban Integration..............................................................10-1
GLOSSARY
Index
vii
Send Us Your Comments
Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide , Release 12.2
Part No. E48972-10
Oracle welcomes customers' comments and suggestions on the quality and usefulness of this document.
Your feedback is important, and helps us to best meet your needs as a user of our products. For example:
• Are the implementation steps correct and complete?
• Did you understand the context of the procedures?
• Did you find any errors in the information?
• Does the structure of the information help you with your tasks?
• Do you need different information or graphics? If so, where, and in what format?
• Are the examples correct? Do you need more examples?
If you find any errors or have any other suggestions for improvement, then please tell us your name, the
name of the company who has licensed our products, the title and part number of the documentation and
the chapter, section, and page number (if available).
Note: Before sending us your comments, you might like to check that you have the latest version of the
document and if any concerns are already addressed. To do this, access the new Oracle E-Business Suite
Release Online Documentation CD available on My Oracle Support and www.oracle.com. It contains the
most current Documentation Library plus all documents revised or released recently.
Send your comments to us using the electronic mail address: appsdoc_us@oracle.com
Please give your name, address, electronic mail address, and telephone number (optional).
If you need assistance with Oracle software, then please contact your support representative or Oracle
Support Services.
If you require training or instruction in using Oracle software, then please contact your Oracle local office
and inquire about our Oracle University offerings. A list of Oracle offices is available on our Web site at
www.oracle.com.
iSupplier Implementation.pdf
ix
Preface
Intended Audience
Welcome to Release 12.2 of the Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide .
See Related Information Sources on page x for more Oracle E-Business Suite product
information.
Documentation Accessibility
For information about Oracle's commitment to accessibility, visit the Oracle
Accessibility Program website at http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?
ctx=acc&id=docacc.
Access to Oracle Support
Oracle customers that have purchased support have access to electronic support
through My Oracle Support. For information, visit http://www.oracle.
com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=info or visit http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?
ctx=acc&id=trs if you are hearing impaired.
Structure
1 Introduction to Oracle iSupplier Portal
2 Registration
3 Navigating and Searching
4 Order Information
5 Shipping Information
6 Planning and Inventory Information
7 Invoice and Payment Information
8 Supplier Profile Management
9 Buying Company View
10 Electronic Kanban
x
GLOSSARY
Related Information Sources
Integration Repository
The Oracle Integration Repository is a compilation of information about the service
endpoints exposed by the Oracle E-Business Suite of applications. It provides a
complete catalog of Oracle E-Business Suite's business service interfaces. The tool lets
users easily discover and deploy the appropriate business service interface for
integration with any system, application, or business partner.
The Oracle Integration Repository is shipped as part of the Oracle E-Business Suite. As
your instance is patched, the repository is automatically updated with content
appropriate for the precise revisions of interfaces in your environment.
Do Not Use Database Tools to Modify Oracle E-Business Suite Data
Oracle STRONGLY RECOMMENDS that you never use SQL*Plus, Oracle Data
Browser, database triggers, or any other tool to modify Oracle E-Business Suite data
unless otherwise instructed.
Oracle provides powerful tools you can use to create, store, change, retrieve, and
maintain information in an Oracle database. But if you use Oracle tools such as
SQL*Plus to modify Oracle E-Business Suite data, you risk destroying the integrity of
your data and you lose the ability to audit changes to your data.
Because Oracle E-Business Suite tables are interrelated, any change you make using an
Oracle E-Business Suite form can update many tables at once. But when you modify
Oracle E-Business Suite data using anything other than Oracle E-Business Suite, you
may change a row in one table without making corresponding changes in related tables.
If your tables get out of synchronization with each other, you risk retrieving erroneous
information and you risk unpredictable results throughout Oracle E-Business Suite.
When you use Oracle E-Business Suite to modify your data, Oracle E-Business Suite
automatically checks that your changes are valid. Oracle E-Business Suite also keeps
track of who changes information. If you enter information into database tables using
database tools, you may store invalid information. You also lose the ability to track who
has changed your information because SQL*Plus and other database tools do not keep a
record of changes.
Introduction to Oracle iSupplier Portal 1-1
1
Introduction to Oracle iSupplier Portal
Overview
Oracle iSupplier Portal enables a buying company to communicate key procure-to-pay
information with suppliers. As a supplier using Oracle iSupplier Portal, you can view
and acknowledge purchase orders, submit change requests, create advance shipment
notices, view receipts, view inventory levels, view invoices and payments, create work
confirmation for complex work projects, and acknowledge purchase order change
requests. As a buyer using Oracle iSupplier Portal, you can view order, shipment,
receipt, invoice, and payment information.
This section is an introduction to Oracle iSupplier Portal, and includes the following
topics:
• About Oracle iSupplier Portal., page 1-1
• How to Use This Guide, page 1-2
About Oracle iSupplier Portal
Oracle iSupplier Portal is a collaborative application that enables buying companies and
their suppliers to communicate with each other. It enables suppliers to have real-time
access to information (such as purchase orders and delivery schedules) and respond to
the buying company with order acknowledgments, change requests, shipment notices,
and planning details. It also allows buying organizations to search for order, shipment,
receipt, invoice, and payment information across all suppliers and all business units, as
well as respond to supplier change requests.
Note: Oracle iSupplier Portal supports both transaction documents and
view-only documents. Using transaction documents, you can submit
acknowledgments or change requests on a Purchase Order, or initiate
transactions such as advance shipment notices, advanced shipment
1-2 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
billing notices, and invoices. Using view-only documents, you may
view forecast schedules and payments.
How to Use This Guide
This guide is organized to help you learn, use, and understand Oracle iSupplier Portal.
Getting Started Information
Introduction to Oracle iSupplier Portal
Explains how you get started using Oracle iSupplier Portal. This chapter includes
details of where you start using the system depending on your current relationship
with the buying company.
Registration
Explains how to register your company with the buying company and how to get
Oracle iSupplier Portal user accounts for your employees. If you already have access to
Oracle iSupplier Portal, then you do not need to read this chapter.
Navigating and Searching
Explains how to navigate through the system. The chapter also includes searching tips
and techniques.
Transaction and View-Only Document Information
Order Information
Explains how to view and respond to order-related documents such as purchase orders,
work orders, and supplier agreements.
Shipping Information
Explains how to access shipping information and create advance shipment notices
(ASNs or ASBNs). The chapter also includes information on viewing receiving and
quality transactions.
Planning and Inventory Information
Explains how to access planning and inventory information, as well as how to maintain
item and capacity information.
Invoice and Payment Information
Explains how to access invoice and payment information. The chapter also includes
information on how to submit invoices if the buying company has Oracle Payables
installed.
Introduction to Oracle iSupplier Portal 1-3
Profile Information
Supplier Profile Management
Explains how to maintain information about your company using the Supplier Profile
Management feature. You must have the proper authorizations to access the profile
management pages.
Buying Company View Information
Buying Company View
Explains the buying company view of iSupplier Portal.
Where to Start
Before you can access Oracle iSupplier Portal:
1. Your company must be registered as a supplier to the buying company that has
licensed Oracle iSupplier Portal.
2. You must be registered as an Oracle iSupplier Portal user.
Note: If you are already a supplier to the buying company and you
can log into Oracle iSupplier Portal, then you and your company
have already completed both of the registration tasks. You can skip
chapter 2. If you do not have access to Oracle iSupplier Portal, see
chapter 2 for registration instructions.
After you are registered, you can access Oracle iSupplier Portal. The tasks you perform
on Oracle iSupplier Portal are determined by your current supply chain business
relationship with the buying company. The tables below list the tasks you will likely
perform; where you start depends on what you want to accomplish:
If the buying company has ordered goods or services from you, you can
Tasks Where Documented
View existing orders from your buying
company, including any attachments.
See Order Information
Acknowledge and submit change requests to
purchase orders.
See Order Information
1-4 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
Tasks Where Documented
Submit your electronic signature while
acknowledging a purchase order.
See Order Information
View and print Portable Document Format
(PDF) versions of purchasing documents,
including blanket agreements, clauses and
other contract terms.
See Order Information
View your current purchase agreements (if
any) with the buying company.
See Order Information
View an audit trail of any revisions for a
purchase order.
See Order Information
Manage deliverables assigned to you
(available only if the buying company has
implemented Oracle Procurement Contracts).
See Order Information
Create work confirmations to notify the
buying company of expected payment related
to a completed unit of work for a complex
work project.
See Order Information
View timecard information (available only if
the buying company has implemented Oracle
Services Procurement and Oracle Time and
Labor).
See Order Information
Let your buying company know that goods
are ready for shipment by uploading a routing
request.
See Shipping Information
View buying company's response to your
routing request.
See Shipping Information
Alert the buying company of any upcoming
deliveries by sending advance shipment
notices (ASN) or advance shipment billing
notices (ASBN).
See Shipping Information
Upload advance shipment notices (ASN) or
advance shipment billing notices (ASBN) to
the system using spreadsheet functionality.
See Shipping Information
Introduction to Oracle iSupplier Portal 1-5
Tasks Where Documented
View and enter item quality results and check
for correspondence from the buying company
(available only if the buying company uses
Oracle Quality).
See Shipping Information
View receipts, returns, and delivery
performance.
See Shipping Information
If you have already made a shipment to the buying company, you can:
Tasks Where Documented
View invoices and received payments. See Invoice and Payment Information
Submit invoices by selecting a purchase order
and direct-billing the buying company
(available only if the buying company uses
Oracle Payables).
See Invoice and Payment Information
If you require a third-party shipment before you can complete the buying company's
order, you can:
Task Where Documented
View work orders to check the status of third-
party (outside processing) orders or shipment
plans.
See Order Information and Shipping
Information
If you want to view and update your inventory information, you can:
Tasks Where Documented
View item inventory levels. See Planning and Inventory Information
Maintain item attributes, such as delivery
capacity and lead times.
See Planning and Inventory Information
1-6 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
Tasks Where Documented
Enter capacity information and view on-hand
delivery items.
See Planning and Inventory Information
Define inventory lead times and order
modifiers.
See Planning and Inventory Information
View vendor managed inventory items (if
items are set up as a vendor managed items)
and generate supply requests to manage
reorder points and replenishments
See Planning and Inventory Information
View consigned inventory stock and view
transactions associated with that stock.
See Planning and Inventory Information
If you want to view forecast demand so you can evaluate your supply plans, you can:
Task Where Documented
View forecast schedules. See Planning and Inventory Information
View a summary of forecast schedules. See Planning and Inventory Information
If you want to update your company's profile information, you can:
Task Where Documented
Enter address book information, contact
directory information, business classifications,
and products and services you provide. You
can also enter and maintain bank account and
address information, as well as payment and
invoicing methods.
You can enter and maintain information on
user accounts.
See Supplier Profile Management
If you want to negotiate to supply goods to the buying company, you can:
Introduction to Oracle iSupplier Portal 1-7
Task Where Documented
View buyer requests for quotes (RFQs). See RFQs
If you are a buyer, you can:
Task Where Documented
View order, shipment, receipt, invoice, and
payment information.
See Buyer information
Search for order, shipment, receipt, invoice,
and payment information across all suppliers
and all business units.
See Buyer information
Respond to supplier change requests. See Buyer information
iSupplier Implementation.pdf
Registration 2-1
2
Registration
This chapter covers the following topics:
• Overview
• Registering Suppliers
• Tracking the Registration Status of Prospective Suppliers
• Reopening Rejected Registration Requests from Prospective Suppliers
• Registering Users
Overview
You register your company as a prospective supplier in Oracle iSupplier Portal to let the
buying company know that you are interested in establishing a business relationship.
After you are registered, additional supplier users within your company can be
registered to access and use Oracle iSupplier Portal. This enables you to communicate
to a buying company real-time information about your procure-to-pay transactions.
Note: If you are already a supplier to the buying company and you can
log into Oracle iSupplier Portal, then you and your company have
already completed both of the registration tasks. You can skip chapter
2.
Note: If no one in your company can access Oracle iSupplier Portal,
your company is not registered with the buying company, and you
need to register your company before you register your supplier users.
Note: If other supplier users in your company can access Oracle
iSupplier Portal (and you cannot), your company is registered,
however, you need to register as a user for access to Oracle iSupplier
2-2 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
Portal.
If you are a prospective supplier, you need to read the entire section and complete all of
the registration steps. If your company is already registered with the buying company
and you only need to add yourself as a user, you only need to read and complete the
Registering Users task.
This section includes the following topics:
• Registering Suppliers, page 2-2
• Registering Users, page 2-6
Registering Suppliers
Self-service prospective vendor registration enables you to register your interest in
establishing a business relationship with the buying company. Once registered, you can
provide details about your company, its addresses, contacts, products and services, and
banking and payment information.
You must provide contact information so the system can send updates on the
registration request. After completing the registration, you receive a confirmation that
the request has been submitted for review. The information is reviewed by a buyer
administrator, and if approved, you are notified of the decision by e-mail.
Using the Guided Navigation Flow for Self-Service Prospective Supplier
Registration:
Oracle iSupplier Portal provides a navigation model for the self-service prospective
supplier registration that streamlines user experience and makes it more intuitive.
Using the train navigation prospective suppliers can complete all the steps to
successfully register.
The train navigation for the prospective supplier registration presents the following
steps:
• Basic Information
• Company Details (which includes the following)
• Address Book
• Contact Directory
• Business Classification
• Products and Services
Registration 2-3
• Banking Details
• Attachments
The Create Address and Update Address pages in the Address Book display the
Address Purpose region, using which you can assign a purpose (reason) for the
address. Select address purposes appropriately to ensure that you receive
communication from the buying organization that is relevant to you.
The Create Contact and Update Contact pages in the Contact Directory display the
Contact Purpose region, using which you can assign a purpose (reason) for the contact.
Select contact purposes appropriately to ensure that you receive communication from
the buying organization that is relevant to you.
For more information about address and contact purposes, refer to the Supplier Profile
Management chapter.
Prospective suppliers can provide contact information so the system can send updates
on the registration request. As a prospective supplier, when you provide company
details, you can create a new address and associate with the primary contact. Supplier
users can associate address to contacts during prospective supplier registration. To
enable suppliers to associate address to a contact during registration, the buyer
administrator must enable the Contact Address Association check box in the Oracle
Supplier Management, Supplier Onboarding Configuration page. When this check box
is enabled, Addresses for the Contact region is available to suppliers to associate
address with a contact.
As a prospective supplier, after you submit the registration, you can track the status of
your registration. Prospective suppliers during registration can add their comments in
the Note to Buyer field in the Prospective Supplier Registration Update page.
Approving or Rejecting Prospective Supplier Registration Requests:
Oracle iSupplier Portal provides actionable notification for prospective supplier
registration approval.
Using the actionable registration request notification from a prospective supplier,
buyers can:
• Approve, Forward, Reject, Supplier to Provide Details, Reassign, or Request
Information.
• View a graphical AME approval flow.
• View status history and notification history
The supplier administrator can use add comments for the prospective supplier using
the Note to Supplier field on the Registration Request Review page.
2-4 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
Tracking the Registration Status of Prospective Suppliers
Prospective suppliers can track their registration status using the Prospective Supplier
Registration: Current Status page. This page displays summary information of the
registration request and the historical activity on the request. The 'Registration Details
and Status' and 'Status History' regions displayed in this page are same as the regions
displayed in the workflow notification.
Note: After receiving a registration request from a prospective supplier,
a status link is sent to the prospective supplier to track the status of the
registration. The 'Current Status' page is accessible only through this
link that is sent to the prospective supplier.
Depending on the current status of the registration request, the supplier can perform
certain actions:
If the registration status is:
• Draft, then the supplier can update the request using the new train navigation
based registration page. The Update button is enabled on the page.
• Pending Approval, Approved, or Rejected, then no action is required from the
supplier.
• Supplier to Provide Details, then the supplier can click the Respond button on the
status page to provide the necessary details.
Reopening Rejected Registration Requests from Prospective Suppliers
Oracle iSupplier Portal enables buyers the ability to reinstate a rejected supplier by
reopening the rejected request. Suppliers can benefit from this feature as there is no
need to re-initiate the entire registration process after getting rejected.
Example of a business flow of reopening a rejected registration request from a
prospective supplier:
In this example, a prospective supplier registers, however the registration request is
rejected. As there is a business requirement, the supplier administrator must now
reopen the rejected registration request.
To reopen the rejected request, as a supplier administrator:
1. Log in to the Supplier Profile Administrator responsibility and navigate to the
Suppliers Search page.
2. Click the Prospective Supplier Registrations link. The Prospective Supplier
Registrations page appears.
Registration 2-5
3. Search for registrations with the Rejected status.
4. Click the Review link for the rejected supplier. The New Supplier Request page
opens.
5. Select the Reopen action from the Actions drop-down. A Warning page will open to
ascertain if you want to continue. Two buttons are available on this page with
following meanings:
• No: This button will take you back to the Rejected Supplier Profile Page.
• Yes: This button will take you to the next page: Reopened Supplier Request.
6. Click Yes in the Warning page. The Reopened Supplier Request page appears.
7. Review the details in the Reopened Supplier Request page. This page has the
rejected supplier's profile in edit mode. Whenever a reconsidered request is opened,
the page title is displayed as 'Reopened Supplier Request'. Otherwise it is shown as
'New Supplier Request'.
Following actions are available from this page:
• Supplier to Provide Details: This action is enabled on the registration request as
per the business rules. On selecting this action, a notification will be sent to the
supplier, for the following purposes:
To inform the supplier about the buying organization's decision to reconsider
their request.
To provide the URL of the 'Registration Request Status' page to the supplier.
• Send Status Link: When an action is selected, a notification containing the URL
of the 'Registration Request Status' page is sent to the supplier. This action will
always be enabled irrespective of the status of the registration request.
• Submit: This action will submit the request for approval.
• Save: You can save the registration request to work on it later.
8. Update details of the supplier, if required, including details of the primary contact
before sending the notification for re-registering. The administrator can perform
this action in case the supplier's primary contact has changed.
Status of a Reopened Rejected Request
In case of a rejected supplier being reconsidered, the application uses the following
statuses:
• Draft: This will be the status of a previously rejected supplier in the following two
scenarios:
2-6 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
• The buyer administrator has decided to reconsider the request and selected the
'Reopen' action for the rejected supplier's registration request. As soon as the
'Reopen' action is select, the status will be change to 'Draft'.
• When the 'Save' action is selected, the status will remain as 'Draft'.
• Once a rejected supplier's request is 'reopened' the buyer administrator cannot
'Reject' it again. After being reopened the request will follow the approval process
and only an approver can reject this request again. To ensure that the administrator
does not reopen a rejected request by mistake, the application displays a warning
message as soon as the administrator chooses the functionality to reopen the
request.
Registering Users
The buying company initiates the process of adding new suppliers by inviting supplier
users to register, or by registering supplier users directly. If you receive an invitation to
access Oracle iSupplier Portal, you can respond to the invitation (and provide user
profile information, such as name and contact details), or forward the invitation to
another user in your company. For example, the buying company may send an
invitation to the Vice President of Sales within your organization; he can forward it to
the appropriate person in his company. The user who responds can change any of the
details except the name of the supplier company for whom he or she is registering.
If the buying company has multiple site definitions for your company, or if you have
multiple subsidiaries, your buying company may give you access to view information
for multiple site definitions.
People who wish to register with the system must complete the Supplier User
Registration Page and submit it for approval
Registration 2-7
Supplier User Registration Page
A buyer administrator will approve or reject the your registration request. You receive a
notification of the buyer administrator's actions. The notification also includes a URL to
reset your password. Use the URL to reset the password; this new password can be
used to login to iSupplier Portal.
Buyers can designate a supplier user with user account from the Contact Directory to
receive the business classification reminder notifications. To designate the supplier
users expand the user account information node and select Certification Reminders
check box in the User Notification region.
Directly Registered Supplier Users
If the buying company has enough information about a user at your company, the
buyer can chose to register the user directly, in which case the users receives a
notification with the URL to reset the password. Use the link provided in the
notification to change your password.
Supplier Registered Supplier Users
If additional people in your company need access to Oracle iSupplier Portal, they
should contact the Supplier Profile and User Administrator at your company. This
administrator can create new user accounts for your users. Once the account is created,
the user will be sent a notification containing system access information, and a URL to
change your password. Use the URL to change the password, that you can use for
subsequent logins.
iSupplier Implementation.pdf
Navigating and Searching 3-1
3
Navigating and Searching
This chapter covers the following topics:
• Overview
• Using the Oracle iSupplier Portal Home Page
• Setting Up User Preferences
• Searching
Overview
This section includes information to help you learn how to navigate and search in
Oracle iSupplier Portal. After you learn the basic techniques, you will be able to search
for transaction information, and respond accordingly.
This section includes the following topics:
• Using the Oracle iSupplier Portal Home Page, page 3-1
• Setting Up User Preferences, page 3-4
• Searching, page 3-5
Using the Oracle iSupplier Portal Home Page
When you access the Oracle iSupplier Portal application using the username and
password provided to you, the Oracle iSupplier Portal Home page displays.
Depending on your authorizations, the Admin tab may not be displayed.
3-2 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
Oracle iSupplier Portal Home Page
Quick Links
This section is displayed on the right and provides a high-level diagram of the procure-
to-pay flow through the Oracle iSupplier Portal application. Click any link to go directly
to the corresponding page.
Notifications
Notifications are messages waiting for your review. Some notifications are view-only,
while other notifications require action. To view your notifications, click the linked
subject to open the Notification Details page. This page provides complete notification
details, as well as the appropriate action button.
Navigating and Searching 3-3
Notification Details Page
On the Notification Details page you can request further information or assign the
notification to another user.
If you select an action on the Notification Details page and click, you are returned to
the Notifications Summary page.
On this page you can view all your notifications.
You can use the View menu to see
• All your notifications
• Information only (FYI) notifications
• Notifications you have sent
• Open notifications
• Notifications requiring action by you (To Do Notifications)
To process a notification, select the notification and assign it to another user, or open
and view/process it. Once you have processed the necessary notification you can:
• Continue to respond to any additional notifications you have.
• Continue working by clicking any of the tabs.
Orders at a Glance
This section displays the five most recent purchase orders. Click a purchase order
number to view purchase order details.
Shipments at a Glance
This section displays recent shipments. Click a shipment number to view a list of your
recent shipments.
To view a complete list of your Notifications, Orders at a Glance, or Shipments at a
Glance, click Full List.
3-4 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
Home Page Links
The links at the top of the Home page provides the following information:
Home Page Links
Global Buttons
The following buttons display on the home page and all Oracle iSupplier Portal pages:
• Home - Returns you to the main portal where you can select another responsibility
or application.
• Logout - logs you out of the application.
• Preferences - Displays the Preferences page. See Setting Up User Preferences , page
3-4 for information on setting your user preferences.
• Help - Accesses the help index page.
Home Page Tabs
In addition to using the Quick Links, you can use the tabs on the home page to quickly
access related task areas.
Home Page Tabs
Setting Up User Preferences
You can change your user settings or preferences at any time using the Preferences icon.
You can change the following preferences:
• General - You can select your language, territory, time zone, client character
encoding (the character set that's used in your page display), and accessibility
features (such as screen reader use).
Note: Date and time values are always displayed to you in the time
zone you set in your user preferences, even if your buying
company is in a different time zone.
Navigating and Searching 3-5
• Notification - You can select how you want to receive your notifications (for
example, in HTML or plain text e-mail).
• Formatting - You can define your date format and number format.
• Password - You can reset or change your password. A valid password must be at
least five, but no more than 30, characters. Passwords can be numeric,
alphanumeric, or special characters.
To change your preferences
• Click the Preferences icon.
• On the Preferences page, enter your name in the Known As field.
Preferences Page
• Complete or update the required fields.
• Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to return to the system without
making any changes.
Searching
Oracle iSupplier Portal provides extensive search criteria on all pages to help you
retrieve information. Once you have your search results displayed, you can sort them
by clicking any of the linked column headings.
When entering search values, you can use the percent sign (%) as a wildcard to search
3-6 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
for generic items. For example, to search for all orders beginning with 27 and end in a 5
(such as 275, 2715, 27125) enter 27%5. The % wildcard does not control the number of
wild characters. Note the search logic attempts to find matches containing values in any
position.
There are three types of search functions available to you.
Quick Search
The Quick Search feature is available to you from the Home page. Using Quick Search,
you can look for
• Purchase orders
• Shipments
• Invoices
• Payments
Quick Search
To use the Quick Search:
1. Select the search type from the Search menu.
2. Enter a search value.
3. Click Go.
SimpleSearch
The Simple Search feature occurs on many pages and allows you so specify multiple
search fields and enter criteria for each. You can use any or all of the fields available to
you. The system displays only those results that match all the criteria you entered.
Navigating and Searching 3-7
Simple Search
Advanced Search
Advanced Search allows you to build complex search queries containing multiple
search criteria. You can select which fields you wish to search on and enter search
values for each. Such fields include (among others):
• PO Number
• Receipt Number
• Item Number
You can use the default search fields that appear for that page's Advanced Search
function, or apply additional search fields from the "Add Another" menu for the page.
Search operators enable you to specify the matching conditions for a search. Available
search operators are:
• is - Use this operator for an exact match.
• is not - Use this operator to exclude a specific match.
• contains - Use this operator to find a partial match.
• starts with - Use this operator to find a partial match only at the beginning.
• ends with - Use this operator to find a partial match that only ends with your
criteria.
• greater than - Use this operator to include results greater in value than a value
specified.
• less than - Use this operator to include results lower in value than a value specified.
3-8 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
• after - Use this operator to include results with a date after the specified date.
• before - Use this operator to include results with a date before the specified date.
Note that you can use the same search field twice to specify a search range, for example
a Ship Date range. Also note that you can choose to require the results to match all
search criteria (resulting in a more focused, narrower set of results) by selecting the
option "Show table data when all conditions are met," or allow a match of any of the
search criteria (resulting in a larger set of results) by selecting the option "Show table
date when any condition is met."
Advanced Search
Order Information 4-1
4
Order Information
This chapter covers the following topics:
• Order Information
• Purchase Orders
• Viewing Purchase Orders
• Printing Purchase Orders
• Acknowledging Purchase Orders
• Submitting Change Requests
• Splitting Shipments and Pay Items
• Using Work Confirmations (Complex-Work Purchase Orders Only)
• Canceling Orders or Shipments
• Managing Deliverables
• Work Orders
• Agreements
• Purchase Order Revision History
• Requests For Quotes (RFQ)
• Viewing Time Cards
Order Information
The real-time data provided in Oracle iSupplier Portal allows you to communicate
procure-to-pay information with the buying company while viewing the purchase
order flow.
Using purchase order information, you can acknowledge purchase orders, make change
requests to purchase orders, split shipments, or cancel orders. You can also view
supplier agreements and the revision history of a purchasing document.
4-2 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
This section includes the following topics:
• Purchase Orders, page 4-2
Managing Deliverables, page 4-31
• Work Orders, page 4-32
• Agreements, page 4-32
• Purchase Order Revision History, page 4-35
• Request for Quotes, page 4-36
• Viewing Time Cards, page 4-37
Purchase Orders
When your buying company enters a purchase order in Oracle Purchasing, the
purchase order details are available to you in Oracle iSupplier Portal. The View
Purchase Orders page display the most recent 25 purchase orders (use the Previous and
Next links to view additional purchase orders). Oracle iSupplier Portal enables you to
track your purchase orders throughout the entire procure-to-pay flow.
The purchase order section includes:
• Viewing Purchase Orders, page 4-3
• Printing Purchase Orders, page 4-7
• Acknowledging Purchase Orders, page 4-7
• Submitting Change Requests, page 4-12
• Splitting Shipments, page 4-21
Note: For the pages mentioned in this chapter, you may view
details to various attributes by clicking the link associated with that
attribute.
Accessing purchasing orders:
The View Purchase Orders page is the central page from which you access and process
your purchase orders.
To access a purchase order for further processing:
1. From the iSupplier Portal Home
Order Information 4-3
page, click the Orders tab.
2. From the View menu, choose which purchase orders to display:
• All Purchase Orders
• Purchase Orders to Acknowledge
• Purchase Orders Pending Change
An advanced search , page 3-7 facility is available to refine your search even
further. You also have the option to export the displayed data.
On the resulting View Purchase Orders page, select the purchase order you wish to
process:
• To acknowledge , page 4-7 a purchase order, click Acknowledge
• To submit a change request, page 4-12 click Request Changes.
• To view purchase order changes,, page 4-18click View Change History.
Viewing Purchase Orders
Supplier Brokers have access to information about multiple suppliers, therefore a search
filter for transaction documents is enabled for all supplier broker logins. This allows
supplier brokers to search for, and filter required data only.
If you have logged in as a supplier broker, then this page displays the Supplier drop-
down, the Supplier Site field, and the View drop-down. Select a supplier from the list.
This is a mandatory field. The Supplier Site field is optional. The View drop-down
enables you limit your view to all purchase orders, purchase orders to acknowledge, or
purchase orders pending supplier change.
Viewing Order Details
You can view details of a purchase order such as terms and conditions, lines, shipments,
and attachments from the Purchase Order Details page.
To view the details of a purchase order:
1. Access , page 4-2 the purchase order you want to view by clicking its purchase
order number .
4-4 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
The View Order Details page shows you detailed information about the purchase
order, including both header and line information. The Order Information section
shows general information, terms and conditions, ship-to (non-complex work purchase
orders), work location (for complex-work purchase orders) and bill-to information.
The Linked Attributes column in the PO Details region has a Linked Attributes link.
Click this link to view the attributes associated to the Job - Purchasing Category -
Shopping Category combination. External descriptors that are associated to the Job –
Purchasing Category – Shopping Category combination are displayed along with the
job or item related details. Internal descriptors are not seen by suppliers at all, they are
visible to buyers only
In the Summary container, you can view the:
• Total - amount of the total purchase order.
• Received - amount for the items of the purchase order that have been received.
• Invoiced amount - amount for the items on the purchase order that have been
invoiced.
• Payment status - status of the invoices against the PO.
By selecting options from the Actions menu, you can:
• Request changes. See Submitting Change Requests, page 4-12 for more
information.
• Cancel the purchase order.
• View the change history for this purchase order. See Purchase Order Revision
Order Information 4-5
History, page 4-35 for more information.
• View work orders. See Work Orders, page 4-32 for more information.
• Print the purchase order. See Printing Purchase Orders, page 4-7 for more
information.
• View related contracts. The View Related Contracts page for a purchase order
displays the summary of the approved or signed related contracts associated with
the purchase order. Use this action to track or view related contracts such as master
agreements and umbrella agreements. You can view only contracts related to the
organizations to which you have access.
• Create a work confirmation (complex-work purchase orders only).
• View work confirmations (complex-work purchase orders only).
• View current receipts.
• View current invoices.
• View current payment status.
• View current shipment status.
Line Information
4-6 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
Viewing Order Details (Complex Work)
The Summary container on the View Details page for a complex work PO displays
different information.
• Approved amount - total approved amount of work confirmations against the PO.
• Financed amount - total pay item amounts financed plus advanced billed.
• Advanced billed amount - total advance amounts billed at the line level.
• Progress payment - total amount financed or billed of all pay items.
• Delivered - amount of the delivery shipment approved through the work
confirmation. Delivery shipments are created for orders where progress payments
are considered contract financing. This field is hidden by default.
• Recouped - amount of advances and pay items recouped to date. This field is
hidden by default.
• Retained - amount of pay items retained to date. This field is hidden by default.
The Actions menu options include:
• Request changes.
• Cancel the purchase order.
Order Information 4-7
• View the change history for this purchase order.
• Print the purchase order.
• Create a work confirmation.
• View work confirmations.
• View current receipts.
• View current invoices.
• View current payment status.
The PO Details sections shows line specific information. Click Show to see the
receiving, invoicing and payment information for a particular line, or pay item
information for a complex work line.
Line Information (Complex Work Line)
Printing Purchase Orders
You can view and print Portable Document Format (PDF) versions of purchasing
documents, including blanket agreements. If your buying company has implemented
Oracle Procurement Contracts, you can also print the contract terms or clauses that the
buying company has defined on the purchasing documents.
To print purchase orders:
1. Access , page 4-2 the purchase order.
2. Select View PDF from the Actions menu, and click Go..
3. On the prompt window, you can choose to open the document immediately, or
save it locally for later printing.
Acknowledging Purchase Orders
When creating a purchase order, buying companies can request acknowledgment of the
purchase order. If so, you as a supplier will receive a notification requiring your
response. The purchase order may include a date by which you need to acknowledge or
4-8 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
sign it.
You acknowledge purchase orders to communicate to the buying company that you
have received, reviewed the details of, and accepted or rejected a purchase order. You
cannot communicate changes to the purchase order during acknowledgment. To
communicate changes, click the Request Changes button in the Purchase Orders
Summary page or select the Request Changes action from the Actions dropdown in the
Purchase Orders Details page.
If you have logged in as a supplier broker, use the actions in the preceding paragraphs
(as a supplier would use) to acknowledge purchase orders.
The Reject Entire Order action is made available by the buyer using responsibility
functions. Using the Reject Entire Order action, you can let the buyer know if you are
unable to fulfill any part of the purchase order.
If you have logged in as a supplier broker, you can reject the entire order. Use the
Reject Entire Order action to communicate the rejection to the buyer.
You can either acknowledge the order online, or accept or reject the order using the
notification. The notification does not allow shipment level acknowledgment, which
must be entered online. When you respond, the purchase order is automatically
updated, and a notice is sent to the buyer.
You can submit acknowledgments for an entire order, or for individual shipments. For
example, if you can fulfill only part of a purchase order, accept the shipments you can
fulfill, and reject the others (note that shipment level acknowledgement cannot be
performed using the acknowledgement notification).
When the supplier clicks the Save button, the order will be saved in an intermittent state
and supplier can work on the order later.
Suppliers can save orders without needing to select an action from the Actions
dropdown for all shipments.
Later when a supplier returns to this order, the supplier can modify all the responses
that have been entered earlier for the shipments, and also enter responses for those
shipments which were not acknowledged in earlier rounds.
Please note that the buyer will not be able to take any action on an order that has been
saved by the supplier unless the supplier submits it.
If the order is set to be acknowledged at the document and shipment levels, you cannot
indicate change requests during acknowledgment.
For complex work purchase orders, you can acknowledge pay items.
Note: The value of the need-by date is defaulted to the promised date
field on supplier acceptance in the acknowledgment process.
To acknowledge purchase orders:
1. Access the purchase order you wish to acknowledge.
Order Information 4-9
Acknowledge Purchase Order Page
2. On the Acknowledge page, you can accept or reject an entire order, or you can
accept or reject individual shipments.
3. To accept/reject an individual line's shipment or pay item, click Show for the line.
Acknowledging Shipments and Pay Items
1. For the shipment/pay item, select Accept or Reject from the Action menu. If
rejecting a shipment or pay item, provide a reason.
2. Click Submit.
Acknowledging pay items
If the terms for a complex-work purchase order terms require "document or shipment"
acknowledgement, you can accept/reject at the pay item level. To accept/reject an
individual pay item, click Show for that line. Select Accept or Reject from the Action
menu at the end of the line (if you reject the pay item, you must also provide a reason).
4-10 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
If you either accept or reject all the pay items, the purchase order status changes to
"acknowledged."
Pay item changes are immediately submitted to the buyer for acknowledgement even if
the rest of the order is only partially acknowledged. If the buyer rejects the change, the
purchase order status reverts back to "Requires Acknowledgement."
Suppliers can:
• Accept or reject the purchase order at document level that has lines with pay items
as well as with shipments.
• Accept or reject an individual pay item or schedule in a purchase order document.
• Acknowledge pay items and schedules.
Signing Purchase Orders
If your buying company has implemented Oracle Procurement Contracts, your buyer
may ask that you electronically sign a purchasing document while acknowledging it.
Legally binding purchasing documents must be signed by both the buyer and supplier.
After you sign the document, your buyer will be notified. The purchase order will be
ready for execution after both the buyer and supplier have electronically signed the
purchasing document.
Note: If your buyer asks that you electronically sign a purchasing
document, you cannot respond at a specific shipment level, you have to
accept or reject the entire order.
To sign a purchase order:
1. Click the Orders tab, and then click Purchase Orders in the task bar below the tabs.
2. Search for and select the purchase order with a status of Requires Signature, and
then click Acknowledge.
Order Information 4-11
Purchase Order Signature Page
3. On the Acknowledge page, click Sign Document.
Sign Document Page
4. Click any attachments you would like to view to review the attachments for terms
and conditions.
5. Click Accept or Reject.
Sign Document Page
6. On the Notification Signing page, enter your username and password and click
Submit.
7. You will receive confirmation that your purchase order has been acknowledged.
4-12 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
Submitting Change Requests
Oracle iSupplier Portal enables you to request changes to purchase orders when
modifications are needed to fulfill an order. You can make changes before and after
acknowledgment. You can change a single purchase order, or, depending on the change
you need to make, you can update multiple change orders at the same time.
If you have logged in as a supplier broker, you can submit a single change request only.
Use the steps in the following paragraphs to submit a single change request.
To submit a single change request:
1. Click the Orders tab, and then click Purchase Orders in the task bar below the tabs.
2. On the View Purchase Orders page, search for and select the purchase order for
which you wish to request changes.
3. Select the purchase order and Click Request Changes.
4. On the Request Changes page, enter your changes.
Request Changes for Standard Purchase Order
Order Information 4-13
5. You may request changes to the following values :
• Price/Price Breaks on Blanket Agreements
• Supplier Item
• Supplier Order Reference Number
6. In the reason text box, enter a reason for your change request.
7. If you wish to request changes to shipments or pay items, click Show. You can
request changes to
• Price/Price Breaks on Blanket Agreements
• Quantity Ordered
• Promised Date
• Supplier Order Line
• Note that you can also enter change request information in the Additional
Change Request text box.
8. Enter the changed values as appropriate.
9. Enter a reason for your change.
10. Select the appropriate action.
11. Click Submit.
The supplier can submit an order without selecting an action (or providing
acknowledgement) for all the shipments. In such a case the supplier is supposed to
4-14 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
provide acknowledgement for all the shipments for which he either requested change
or did not select any value for, once the buyer has provided his response on the change
request.
Example: An order that consists of a line and four shipments was sent to a supplier for
acknowledgement. The supplier performs the following action before submitting the
change request:
• 1st shipment – Accepted
• 2nd shipment – Change
• 3rd shipment – Rejected
• 4th shipment – No value selected
On receiving this request, the buyer approved all the changes. The purchase order was
sent again to the supplier for acknowledgement.
The supplier acknowledged shipment numbers 2 and 4. The supplier could not change
the shipment number 1 and 3 because his decision (Accepted and Rejected) were final
for those shipments. The shipments 1 and 3 were displayed to the supplier in read-only
mode.
When the supplier provided his acknowledgement (Accept/Reject) for all the shipments
and submitted the order, only then the order was considered to be completely
acknowledged.
When the supplier clicks the Save button, the order is saved in an intermittent state and
supplier is allowed to work on it later. The supplier can save an order without selecting
a value in the Actions dropdown for all the shipments.
Later when the supplier returns to this order to work on it, he can modify all the
responses that he has entered earlier for the shipments, and also to enter the response
for those shipments which he didn't acknowledge/change the previous time.
Please note that buyer cannot take any action on an order that has been saved by the
supplier, until the supplier submits the order.
Submitting change requests for complex-work purchase orders
Order Information 4-15
Request Changes for Complex-Work Purchase Order
If Oracle Services Procurement is licensed and implemented, then a supplier can submit
the following change requests for order documents for which Progress Payments and
Schedules are enabled:
• Request changes to goods with milestones for the order document that has lines
with pay items.
• Request changes to services with milestones or lump sum for the order document
that has lines with pay items.
• Request changes to services with rate based milestone for the order document that
has lines with pay items.
• Request changes to Ordered Quantity for the Order document that has lines with
schedules.
• Request changes to Need By date for the Order document that has lines with
schedules.
• Cancelling purchase order lines that have both pay item lines and shipment lines.
• Canceling pay items and schedules.
• Splitting of payment schedule.
4-16 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
• Splitting shipment schedule.
• View the changes and Change history.
Once the supplier submits the changes, the supplier user can view the latest approved
revision of the purchase order. In addition, the supplier user can view details of the
changes and the history of changes requested and the corresponding responses from
both the supplier user and the buyer.
Changing complex-work purchase orders
If this is a complex-work purchase order you can only change the supplier item at the
line level. If progress payments are treated as delivery, price updates are only allowed
at the pay item level (any changes roll up to the line level). If pay items are considered
contract financing, then price updates at both the line level and pay item level are
allowed.
• Price changes - For milestone and rate, price changes are not allowed if the pay
item has been partially received or invoiced (that is, retroactive price changes are
not allowed). For a lump sum, if the pay item has been partially received or
invoiced, the new price should equal or greater than the amount received or
invoiced to date.
Changes in price are prorated to the distributions if the shipment has multiple
distributions. The buyer can change the distribution amounts during response.
• Quantity changes -
Quantity changes are only allowed for Rate pay items. If the pay item has been
partially received or invoiced, the new quantity should be greater than or equal to
the larger of either the quantity received or the quantity invoiced. A change in
quantity is prorated to distributions, if the pay item has multiple distributions. The
buyer can enter new quantities when responding.
Note: After submitting your changes, the purchase order status changes to Supplier
Changes Pending until the buyer approves the changes.
To update multiple purchase orders simultaneously:
Many times, you may need to make the same change to a group of purchase orders.
Depending on the type of change you need to make, you may be able to update
multiple purchase orders simultaneously. You can perform multiple changes to
standard purchase orders, agreements, and releases.
For purchase order lines, you can change:
• Unit Price (only for goods lines)
• Supplier Part Number
For purchase order shipments, you can change:
Order Information 4-17
• Promised Date
• Quantity Ordered (only for goods shipments)
• Price (only for shipments with lines where value basis is fixed price).
To update multiple purchase orders:
1. On the Purchase Orders page, click Multiple PO Change.
Multiple Purchase Order Changes
2. You can search for shipments to acknowledge or change by selecting
• Overdue Shipments
• Shipments Dues in One Week
• Shipments Requiring Acknowledgments
• All Shipments
from the View menu and clicking Go.
3. You search for a group of purchase orders, click the Lines tab and use the advanced
search option to identify the group of purchase orders you wish to change.
4-18 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
Multiple Purchase Order Change Page
4. If you wish to change the same attribute for multiple purchase orders to the same
value,
1. Enter the new value in the Default Value field.
2. Select the appropriate purchase orders.
3. Click Apply Default Values.
5. If you wish to update multiple purchase order attributes to different values, enter
the new values directly into the fields in the Lines table.
6. Enter a short text explanation for the change in the Reason field.
7. Click Apply.
Change Requests for Services
Suppliers can request changes to the price for service lines and create new service
schedules by splitting an existing schedule.
To view change order history:
This view enables you to view the history of change requests submitted on a document,
and the corresponding buyer response.
1. Click the Orders tab, and then click Purchase Orders in the task bar below the tabs.
2. Search for and select a purchase order, and then click View Change History.
Order Information 4-19
3. View the change order history details on the PO Change Order History page.
Note: If Oracle Services Procurement is licensed and implemented,
then when the order document has both "Schedules" and "Progress
Payments" enabled, the column name "Pay item" in the multiline
changes to "Schedule/Pay item".
PO Change History Page
4. Click OK to return to the Purchase Orders page.
Statuses for Acknowledgment and Change Request processes
The following table outlines the statuses for the Acknowledgement and Change
Request processes for both the buyer and the supplier:
Action Taken Supplier Status Supplier
Change
Request Status
Buyer Status Buyer
Acknowledgme
nt Status
PO Submitted
(Supplier
Acknowledgeme
nt required)
Requires
Acknowledgeme
nt
- Approved Requires
Acknowledgeme
nt
Supplier Saves
Order
Requires
Acknowledgeme
nt
Draft Approved Supplier Locked
Supplier
Requests Change
Requires
Acknowledgeme
nt
Changes
Submitted
In Process Requires
Acknowledgeme
nt
4-20 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
Action Taken Supplier Status Supplier
Change
Request Status
Buyer Status Buyer
Acknowledgme
nt Status
Buyer Accepts
All Changes
Requires
Acknowledgeme
nt
- Approved Requires
Acknowledgeme
nt
Buyer Rejects All
Changes
Requires
Acknowledgeme
nt
Changes
Rejected
Approved Requires
Acknowledgeme
nt
Buyer Approves
Few Changes
Requires
Acknowledgeme
nt
- Approved Requires
Acknowledgeme
nt
Supplier Accepts
Entire Order
Accepted - Approved Accepted
Supplier Rejects
Entire Order
Rejected - Approved Rejected
Supplier
Acknowledges
Complete Order
(Accepts few
shipments and
Rejects others
Accepted - Approved Acknowledged
Changes to Shipments that have linked Drop Ship Lines
When you submit a change request for a drop ship purchase order shipment, where
you need to update or change the Promised Date, the following validations occur in the
system. A drop ship purchase order integrates with Oracle Order Management, thus the
following validations take place:
1. When you make a change to the Promised Date and the change is within the Buyer
Auto-Acceptance Tolerances set for Supplier Change Order, an Oracle Order
Management API is called to validate if the requested changes can be allowed on
the sales order. If the validations are successful, the change order request by the
supplier is automatically approved and the modified Promised Date is updated as
Scheduled Ship Date in the sales order. If the validations are not successful, the
error message from the Oracle Order Management API is displayed in the Change
Request page for the supplier to take corrective action.
Order Information 4-21
2. When you make a change to the Promised Date, and the change is not within the
Buyer Auto-Acceptance Tolerances set for Supplier Change Order (Setup >
Tolerances and Routings > Supplier Change Order), an Oracle Order Management
API is called to validate if the requested changes can be allowed on a sales order. If
the validations are successful, the change order request by the supplier is routed to
the buyer/requester for approval. When the buyer/requester accepts/rejects the
changes from the workflow notification the following scenarios occur during the
submission check of the purchase order:
• An Oracle Order Management API is called and if all the validations are
successful, the value of the updated Promised Date is carried over to the
Scheduled Ship Date of the sales order.
• If the call to the Oracle Order Management API is not successful, the error
message from the Oracle Order Management API is displayed at the top of the
notification.
3. When you make a change to the Promised Date, and the change is not within the
Buyer Auto-Acceptance Tolerances set for Supplier Change Order, an Oracle Order
Management API is called to validate if the requested changes can be allowed on a
sales order. If the validations are successful, the change order request by the
supplier is routed to the buyer for approval. When the buyer accepts/rejects the
changes from the "Respond to Supplier changes" page the following scenarios occur
during the submission check of the purchase order:
• An Oracle Order Management API is called and if all the validations are
successful, the value of the updated Promised Date is carried over to the
Scheduled Ship Date of the sales order.
• If the call to the Oracle Order Management API is not successful, the error
message from the Oracle Order Management API is displayed in the page for
the buyer to take corrective action.
Splitting Shipments and Pay Items
You can request to split a shipment. For example, if you can only partially ship the
quantity ordered for the given date, you can enter a split shipment change request. This
request will let the buyer know the number of items you can deliver and what date you
will deliver them.
To request to split a shipment:
1. Click the Orders tab, and then click Purchase Orders in the task bar below the tabs.
2. Search for and select a purchase order, and then click Request Changes.
3. On the Request Changes page, click Show to display shipment details.
4-22 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
4. Click the split icon on the desired shipment line. (Another row is added for your
split shipment).
Split Shipments Page
5. In the Quantity Ordered field of the first shipment line, enter a new quantity.
6. In the Quantity Ordered field of the second shipment line, enter the new quantity.
7. Change the Promised Date.
8. Enter the Supplier Order Line.
9. Enter a reason for splitting.
10. Select an action for change.
11. Click Submit.
Note: You can split a shipment as many times as needed. To create
more shipment lines, click the split icon.
Splitting Pay Items for Complex Work Purchase Orders
The pay items for a complex-work purchase order are stored at the line details level the
same way as shipment information. Therefore, you can use the instructions above to
split an existing pay item to create a new payment schedule. A new pay item is created
with a price of 0 and quantity or 0. You can modify the following fields:
• Description
• Price (if lump sum, the price on the original pay item should be greater than the
larger of either the amount received or the amount invoiced).
• Promised date.
Order Information 4-23
Using Work Confirmations (Complex-Work Purchase Orders Only)
Over the course of a complex work project, various pay items defined for the contract
come due. To notify a buyer that a pay item needs to be processed for a completed unit
of work, you can create a work confirmation.
Note: If there are any pay items linked to receipt of materials, then you
cannot create work confirmations for those as long as the material is not
fully received. Work confirmation can be created for the pay items only
if the schedules mapped to the pay item are fully received. You can
select a pay item only when all the schedules mapped to the Pay item
are in the Closed for Receiving or Cancelled status. You cannot create a
work confirmation if any of the mapped schedules to the pay item are
in the Frozen, Open, or Finally Closed status.
To search for existing work confirmations:
1. From the home page, click the Orders tab, and then click the Work Confirmation
subtab. The Work Confirmations page displays with the views listed. You can
search for your work confirmations by using the View drop-down and clicking Go.
2. Alternatively, you can search for your work confirmations by using the Advanced
Search button. When you click the Advanced Search button, the Work
Confirmations Advanced Search region displays. You could use the standard search
criteria, or use the Add Another drop-down to search using additional search
criteria, such as PO Number, Order Line Number, Work Confirmation, etc.
3. Supplier Brokers have access to information about multiple suppliers, therefore a
search filter for transaction documents is enabled for all supplier broker logins. This
allows supplier brokers to search for, and filter required data only.
If you have logged in as a supplier broker, this page displays Supplier drop-down,
Supplier Site field, and the View drop-down. Select a Supplier from the drop-down,
this is a mandatory field. The Supplier Site field is optional. The View drop-down
enables you to select Last 25 Work Confirmations, Draft Work Confirmations,
Rejected Work Confirmations, All Work Confirmations. This enables you to search
for specific supplier information.
To create a work confirmation:
1. Access the purchase order.
2. On the PO Details page, select Create Work Confirmation from the Actions menu
and click Go.
3. From the View menu, select either
4-24 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
• Pay Items Due This Week
• Pay Items Due This Month
• All Pay Items
4. You can also enter and track the progress of the complex work using the following
fields:
• Previously Requested / Delivered
• Previous Progress %
• Current Requested / Delivered
• Material Stored
Note: The Material Stored field allows the supplier to request a
payment for material which has been purchased and stored on
site for use. Using the work confirmation, the supplier can
enter the requested amount based on work actually completed,
and has an option for requesting payment for material
purchased but not yet consumed in work.
• Current Progress %
• Total Requested / Delivered
• Total Progress %
You can enter / update the values of the Current Progress % and Total Progress
% fields, they will be recalculated.
5. Click Go.
6. On the Create Work Confirmation page, select one or more pay items and click
Next.
Order Information 4-25
Create Work Confirmation page
7. Enter a work confirmation ID.
8. Enter a request date for the work confirmation in the Date field. You can specify the
request date as the current date or a past date, however, the date cannot be a future
date.
Important: Your system administrator can define the POS: Use
Approval Date for Work Confirmation Processing profile option to
use the approval date for work confirmation processing instead of
the submission date. For more information, see Oracle iSupplier
Portal Implementation Guide.
9. If this work confirmation reflects a particular span of time, optionally enter
performance period dates.
10. Accept the default or enter a value for Requested/Delivered. .
11. Update the Progress Percentage column, if appropriate.
12. Enter comments in the Comments text area. The comments specified at this header
level are displayed as part of the notification to the approver.
You can enter comments for the work confirmation as a buyer, as a supplier or
using the iSupplier Portal - Internal View responsibility.
13. Attachments added to the Complex Purchase Order at the pay item level are
displayed to the buyer when work confirmations are created.
4-26 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
14. Click Save to keep a draft work confirmation in the system. You can return to the
draft later for make further updates or submit it. When you have finished defining
your work confirmation, click Submit. Once you click Submit, the approver is
notified of the work confirmation and must approve it.
15. Internal users, buyers, or contractors can create work confirmation even if the
complex purchase order transaction has a status Frozen, however suppliers cannot.
To view or update an existing work confirmation:
You can view existing work confirmations.
1. From the Orders tab, click the Work Confirmations subtab.
2. From the View menu, select either
• Last 25 Work Confirmations
• Draft Work Confirmations
• Rejected Work Confirmations
• All Work Confirmations
3. The search results show the progress of the complex work order using the following
columns:
• Previous Requested
• Previous Delivered
• Current Requested
• Current Delivered
• Total Progress %
4. Click the work confirmation number to access and view the work confirmation.
You can select the work confirmation and click Update if you need to make changes
to confirmation or address any issues with a rejected confirmation. You can modify
details of a rejected work confirmation as well as add additional items.
If the confirmation has a status of Processing, Rejected, or Pending Approval, then
you can select the confirmation and delete it.
5. The supplier submits a work confirmation for approval, and the buyer rejects the
work confirmation and adds header level comments stating the reason for rejection;
these comments are visible to the supplier when the supplier updates the rejected
work confirmation.
Order Information 4-27
6. Buyers or other users using the iSupplier Portal – Internal View responsibility can
use the action View Work Confirmation. The View Work Confirmation page
displays the Approval History column. The Approval History icon, when clicked,
displays the Approval History page that shows you the current and pending
approvers. The Approval History icon does not display if the transaction has an
error, or has a status of Draft or Processing.
The Approval History icon is shown to users only if the status of the work
confirmation document is: Pending Approval, Error, Rejected, Approved,
Processed, Processing Error, Cancelled and Corrected. This icon is not visible if the
status of the work confirmation document is Draft or Processing.
The Approval History page has two regions:
The first region displays the Approvers sequenced in order according to the date
and timestamp of when they took action regarding the notification. This section also
displays the approved person and the date of approval along with comments.
The second region displays the current/pending approvers, the type of approvers
and the approver with whom the document is pending.
7. Buyers or other users using the iSupplier Portal – Internal View responsibility can
view the status column of the work confirmation documents.
The status column is displayed as a link only for Error and Processing Error
statuses. The link opens the View Errors page (if the system captures any errors).
For all other status of the work confirmation document, the status column does not
have a link.
The View Errors page displays all the validation failures that are identified when
running the Receiving Transaction Processor concurrent program. Internal users
cannot perform any action, or take corrective actions using this page.
To correct an existing work confirmation:
You can correct existing work confirmations that are in the Processed or Approved
status.
1. From the Orders tab, click the Work Confirmations subtab.
2. From the View menu, select the Work Confirmations I Have Approved option or
the All my Work Confirmations option.
3. Click Go.
4. The search results show a list of work confirmations as per the option you select in
step 2. Click the work confirmation number link of a work confirmation, with the
status as processed or approved, to access the required work confirmation details.
5. Click the Correct button.
4-28 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
Work Confirmations page
6. Enter the required correction. You can correct details such as the
requested/delivered amount/quantity, Date, and the percentage of progress, under
the Current and Total headers of the work confirmation.
• Ensure that the value you enter in the Requested/Delivered or
the Progress (%) field is lesser than the approved value.
• Ensure that you enter appropriate comments in the Comments
field for each pay item submitted for correction.
• Ensure that you select the pay items for which you want to
submit a correction by selecting the appropriate check box.
• You can update or correct the request date as the current date
or a past date, however, the date cannot be a future date or
earlier than the receipt creation date. The system validates the
date to ensure that it is in an open GL period and in open
accounting / receiving periods if the date is updated.
Order Information 4-29
Work Confirmation Correction Details page
7. Click the Submit button.
8. You can verify the work confirmation correction after the status of the work
confirmation changes to Corrected. You can view the correction details in the Work
Confirmation Correction History region on the Work Confirmation Details window.
Using the Response Page for Complex Work Purchase Orders
For complex work purchase orders:
• When the document style has both "Schedules" and "Progress Payments" enabled
and if all the lines in the order document has "Schedule" related details then the
header region caption displays "Ship-To Address" and "Bill To Address"
• When the document style has both "Schedules" and "Progress Payments" enabled
and if any of the lines in the order document has "Pay items" details then the header
region caption displays "Work Location" instead of "Ship to Address" and "Bill To
Location" instead of "Bill To Address"
• When the Order document has both "Schedules" and "Progress Payments" enabled,
then the column name "Pay item" in the changes to "Schedule/Pay item".
Using AME for approving Work Confirmations
Depending on business requirements, administrators can set up approvers and
reviewers in AME for work confirmation approval.
Organizations can use the predefined AME transaction type (WCAPPROVE) and Work
4-30 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
Confirmation Approval workflow process on the supplied components and their
business requirements.
Based on the setup, the Approvers region displays approvers, reviewers, and signers.
Creators of the work confirmation have the flexibility to send Work Confirmation
documents to approvers based on the AME setup.
Approvers can edit Work Confirmation when they receive the approval notification.
Approvers can approve, approve and forward, reject, or reassign the Work
Confirmation approval notification. They can add their comments to the notification
page.
For information about AME, refer to the Oracle Approvals Management Implementation
Guide.
Canceling Orders or Shipments
You can submit cancellation requests for an entire order or a particular shipment. You
can also submit changes and cancellations at the same time.
1. Click the Orders tab, and then click Purchase Orders in the task bar below the tabs.
2. Search for and select a purchase order, and then click Request Cancellation.
3. On the Request Cancellation page, click Submit.
Note: To cancel a few shipments, but not the entire order, click
Show in the PO Details section, and then select Cancel from the
Action list of values (on the shipment line you want to cancel).
Enter a cancellation reason, and then click Submit.
Order Information 4-31
Request Cancellation Page
Canceling an order by a buyer or supplier
If a buyer or supplier cancels a shipment and enters a reason for the cancellation, then
the Reason column is populated in the Shipments table in the Order Details page. If a
shipment is cancelled by a buyer or a supplier, the status of such a shipment is
Cancelled.
Managing Deliverables
If your buying company has implemented Oracle Procurement Contracts, you may
have deliverables assigned to you. Deliverables include both repository deliverables
and purchase order deliverables. Deliverables are also tasks to be completed in order to
achieve a certain outcome or business objective, and may be used to track projects for
compliance reasons and risk reduction.
For example, your buyer may ask that you send a monthly status report detailing the
status of a certain shipment. In this case, your buyer will create a deliverable called
"Send Status Report," and assign the deliverable to you. You will see the "Send Status
Report" deliverable in the notifications section of the iSupplier Portal home page, and
can manage the deliverable from there, or through the View Order Details page. You
may attach your status report to the deliverable and change the status of the
deliverable.
To manage deliverables:
Use the Manage Deliverables page to search for a specific deliverable and update it. To
view repository contracts deliverables, select the appropriate contract document type.
To manage deliverables, you can also search for deliverables for a specific purchase
order in the Purchase Orders tab.
1. Click the Orders tab, and then click Purchase Orders.
4-32 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
2. Select the PO number of the purchase order that includes deliverables that you
want to manage.
3. On the View Order Details page, select Manage Deliverables from the Actions
menu, and click Go.
4. On the Deliverables page, click the deliverable that you want to update.
5. Update and add attachments to the deliverable as necessary, and then change its
status to Submitted.
6. Click Apply.
You will receive confirmation that your deliverable has been updated. Your buyer
will also receive notification that the status of the deliverable has been updated.
Work Orders
Using work orders, buyers and suppliers can monitor outside processing from third
parties whose Work In Process (WIP) status and delivery tracking information is critical
to their supply chain process flow. Outside processing activities are the activities of the
third-party suppliers who provide services needed to complete the final product or
maintenance activity.
To view work orders, click the Orders tab, and then click Work Orders in the task bar
directly below the tabs. Using the search criteria, you can view details of the orders,
schedules, WIP details, operations instructions, components, and component
instructions by selecting the links provided. You can also reschedule an order.
Work Orders Page
Agreements
Supplier agreements are purchase agreements you have made with the buying
company. On the Supplier Agreements page, you can review the details of those
Order Information 4-33
agreements, and the corresponding releases (orders) that have been created for a
particular agreement.
To view agreements, click the Orders tab, and then Agreements in the task bar directly
below the tabs. Use the search criteria to get a summarized list of agreements. For each
agreement, you can select to view the releases created to date for that agreement. You
can export details from any page.
Blanket Agreement page
Supplier Brokers have access to information about multiple suppliers, therefore a search
filter for transaction documents is enabled for all supplier broker logins. This allows
supplier brokers to search for, and filter required data only.
If you have logged in as a supplier broker, this page displays the Supplier dropdown
and Supplier Site field. Select a Supplier from the dropdown, this is a mandatory field.
The Supplier Site field is optional.
Blanket Purchase Agreements
External descriptors that are associated to the Job – Purchasing Category – Shopping
Category combination are displayed along with the job/item related details. You can see
the external descriptors in the line details page. Internal descriptors are not seen by
suppliers at all, they are visible to buyers only. Suppliers cannot access, download, or
edit internal descriptors. Descriptors are external by default, unless they are defined as
Internal.
The Linked Attributes column in the PO Details region has a Linked Attributes
hyperlink. If you click the hyperlink, a popup displays, showing you the attributes
associated to the Job - Purchasing Category - Shopping Category combination.
Editing Agreements
Buying organizations can provide suppliers with the ability to author their own content
online, either via bulk file upload or on-line authoring. The industry standard formats
4-34 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
supported in the upload mode include OAG XML, cXML, CIF and text file. Suppliers
can upload and modify their catalog and buyers only need to approve the upload or
change requests. Content provided by the supplier is subject to the buyer's approval
before it is made available to the requesters.
To edit catalog information:
1. Access the blanket purchase agreement.
2. On the Blanket Purchase Agreement page, click the purchase number link in the
header.
3. On the View Order Details page, select Edit Agreement from the Actions menu,
then the Go button, you will be brought to the catalog authoring page and start
creating or modifying a catalog.
Update Agreement page
4. After you submit the change, the buyer will receive a notification. The buyer can
now approve the change through a notification or through the pending change
page.
Downloading Blanket Agreement Lines
You can download agreement lines along with base and user defined descriptors in the
format expected by Upload Catalog process. Use the following steps:
• As a buyer, create a Global Blanket Purchase Agreement and enable Supplier
Authoring in the agreement.
• Login as supplier and search for the agreement.
• Click the Edit Agreement icon in the search results.
• Click Download Lines, this will run a concurrent program and the concurrent
request ID shows in the page.
• Click the View Requests link, the request details will show. Click View Output, and
Order Information 4-35
save the output file.
Note: Internal Descriptors cannot be downloaded. When suppliers
upload agreement lines, the internal descriptors are unaffected by
suppliers.
Purchase Order Revision History
The PO Revision History page enables you to search for details on the revision history
of a purchase order.
If Oracle Services Procurement is licensed and implemented, users can see changes to
the Linked Schedules and Payment terms, which includes Advance and Retention for
the lines for which Enable Schedules check box is selected. The Enable Schedules check
box is available for a complex PO in Oracle Purchasing Buyer Work Center. For more
information, refer to the Entering Purchase Order topic in the Oracle Purchasing User's
Guide.
You can see changes to the Linked Attributes (Descriptors) for Rate based Temp Labor
lines in the Purchase Order Revision History page. If there are any changes made to the
descriptors associated to a Job – Purchasing Category – Shopping Category
combination, the system shows the changes to the attributes in this page. Note that any
changes to the descriptor value results in the purchase order revision number being
incremented.
Using the search criteria, you can get a summarized list of purchase orders that have
been revised. You may choose to compare each revised PO to the original PO, the
previous PO, or last signed PO (if the revised PO has been signed). You can also view
all changes made to the PO.
1. From the iSupplier Portal Home page, click the Orders tab, then click the Purchase
History subtab.
2. Enter search criteria to identify the purchase order(s) you wish to inspect. Click Go.
Supplier Brokers have access to information about multiple suppliers, therefore a
search filter for transaction documents is enabled for all supplier broker logins. This
allows supplier brokers to search for, and filter required data only.
If you have logged in as a supplier broker, this page displays Supplier dropdown,
and the Supplier Site dropdown. Select a Supplier from the dropdown, this is a
mandatory field. The Supplier Site dropdown is optional. This enables you to
search for specific supplier information.
4-36 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
Purchase Order Change History Page
3. From the PO Revision History page, for any particular version, you can compare it
to its previous version, compare it to the original purchase order, or you can
generate a detailed listing of all changes to the purchase order.
Requests For Quotes (RFQ)
Viewing requests for quotes (RFQs) enables you to select possible negotiations to
participate in with the buying company.
To view RFQs, click the Orders tab, and then click RFQ in the task bar directly below
the tabs. Enter search criteria in the search fields and click Go. The RFQ Summary page
provides the details of all RFQs created by the buying company in its ERP application.
Click any of the links on the RFQ Summary page to get more details about the RFQ.
Order Information 4-37
RFQ Summary Results Page
Viewing Time Cards
To be paid for services rendered, contractors can record hours worked using timecards.
You may access these time cards if the Timecards task appears under the Orders Tab.
You will be able to view timecard information and check the amount of time confirmed
by the hiring manager.
To view timecards, click the Orders tab, and then click Timecards in the task bar
directly below the tabs. Use the search criteria to get a summarized list of timecards.
Click View Timecard to get more details about the timecard. You can export details
from any page.
iSupplier Implementation.pdf
Shipping Information 5-1
5
Shipping Information
This chapter covers the following topics:
• Shipping Overview
• Shipping Information
• Using Advance Shipment Notices and Advance Shipment Billing Notices
• Creating Advance Shipment Notices and Advance Shipment Billing Notices
• Uploading Advance Shipment Notices and Advance Shipment Billing Notices
• Canceling Advance Shipment Notices and Advance Shipment Billing Notices
• Uploading Routing Requests
• Viewing Routing Responses
• Viewing Delivery Schedules
• Viewing Overdue Receipts
• Receiving Information
• Viewing Receipts
• Viewing Returns
• Viewing On-Time Delivery Performance
• Quality Information
Shipping Overview
This section includes the following topics:
• Shipping Information, page 5-2
• Receiving Information, page 5-13
• Quality Information, page 5-16
5-2 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
Shipping Information
Oracle iSupplier Portal enables you to view your existing shipments. Using your
shipments you can create or cancel advance shipment notices. The system enables you
to view other shipment information such as delivery schedules.
Using shipping features, you can alert the buyer to upcoming shipments and expedite
receipts and payments for the buying company.
Shipping information details all of your shipping transactions on Oracle iSupplier
Portal. You can create or cancel shipment notices as well as view shipment delivery
schedules and overdue shipment receipts.
Supplier Brokers have access to information about multiple suppliers, therefore a search
filter for transaction documents is enabled for all supplier broker logins. This allows
supplier brokers to search for, and filter required data only.
If you have logged in as a supplier broker, this page displays Supplier dropdown,
Supplier Site dropdown, along with other search fields. Select a Supplier from the
dropdown, this is a mandatory field. The Supplier Site dropdown is optional. This
enables you to search for specific supplier information.
Supplier Brokers can filter their search using the following pages: Create Advanced
Shipment Notice, Create Advanced Shipment Billing Notice, View/Cancel Advanced
Shipment Notice, Returns, and Receipts.
The shipping information section includes:
• Using Advance Shipment Notices and Advance Shipment Billing Notices, page 5-
5
• Uploading Routing Requests, page 5-10
• Viewing Routing Responses, page 5-11
• Viewing Delivery Schedules, page 5-11
• Viewing Overdue Receipts, page 5-12
Using Advance Shipment Notices and Advance Shipment Billing Notices
When you enter an Advance Shipment Notice (ASN) or Advance Shipment Billing
Notice (ASBN), you alert the buying company of upcoming shipment deliveries. To
create an ASN or ASBN, select the purchase order shipments being shipped and
provide the appropriate shipment details.
Note: If Oracle Services Procurement is licensed and implemented, you
can create ASN or ASBN for shipments on a complex purchase order
Shipping Information 5-3
having lines with shipment details. The purchase order styles that
dictate which of the complex work procurement attributes are available
are created in Oracle Purchasing. See: Defining Document Styles, Oracle
Purchasing Users Guide
The details that can be specified on an ASN/ASBN include:
Shipment Lines
• Shipment Line Defaults:
• Packing Slip
• Country of Origin
• Bar Code Label
• Container Number
• Truck Number
• Comments
• Shipments in Advance Shipment Notices
Note: In the Shipments in Advance Shipment Notices section, to
view Details, click Show. To hide details, click Hide.
Shipment Headers
• Shipment Information (Required fields are marked with *)
• Shipment Number*
• Shipment Date*
• Expected Receipt Date*
• Freight Information
• Freight Terms
• Number of Containers
• Freight Carrier
• Waybill/Airbill Number
5-4 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
• Bill of Lading
• Packaging Code
• Packing Slip
• Tar Weight
• Special Handling Code
• Net Weight
• Tar Weight UOM
• Comments
• Net Weight UOM
You can enter billing information on a shipment notice to create an ASBN. An ASBN
creates an invoice in the buyer's payables system. To create an ASBN, in addition to the
above details, the following billing details should be provided (Required fields are
marked with *):
• Invoice Number*
• Invoice Amount*
• Invoice Date*
• Payment Terms
• Freight Amount
• Currency
• Tax Amount
• Remit To Site
The Advance Shipment Notices section includes:
• Creating Advance Shipment Notices and Advance Shipment Billing Notices, page
5-5
• Uploading Advance Shipment Notices and Advance Shipment Billing Notices, page
5-8
• Canceling Advance Shipment Notices and Advance Shipment Billing Notices, page
5-9
Shipping Information 5-5
Creating Advance Shipment Notices and Advance Shipment Billing
Notices
You can create advance shipment notices and advance shipment billing notices using
PO shipment lines.
To create advance shipment notices and advance shipment billing notices:
1. Click the Shipments tab, and then click Shipment Notices in the task bar directly
below the tabs.
2. On the Shipment Notices page, click Create Advance Shipment Notices for an ASN
or Create Advance Shipment Billing Notice for an ASBN.
Note: If you are creating an ASBN, all selected shipments must
belong to the same operating unit.
Create ASN Page
3. Select either View Shipments Due This Week or View Shipments Due Any Time,
and then click Go. Click Advanced Search to enter additional search criteria to
perform a more restrictive search .
4. Select one or multiple purchase order shipments, and then click Add to Shipment
Notice.
5-6 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
Add to Shipment Notice Page
5. On the Create Advance Shipment Notice or Create Advance Shipment Billing
Notice page, enter the appropriate shipment line defaults.
Note: Note:You can always add more shipments by clicking Add
Shipments on the Shipments Line page.
6. You can enter the line details once for all shipment lines if the details are common
to all lines. To copy all default shipment lines, click Default to All Lines.
7. To split a shipment line, click the split icon in the Shipments in Advance Shipment
Notice section, and enter Shipping Quantity for the original and new lines.
8. To remove a shipment, click the remove icon in the Shipments in Advance
Shipment Notice section.
Note: To display shipment details, click Show in the Shipment and
Advance Shipment Notice section. To hide shipment details, click
Hide in the Shipment and Advance Shipment Notice section.
9. If you would like to enter Licence Plate Number (LPN), Lot, or Serial Information,
click the LPN/LOT/serial icon.
You will be able to enter lot and serial information for shipment lines only when the
item has been defined as a lot or serial controlled item. You will only be able to enter lot
Shipping Information 5-7
information if the item is lot controlled, serial information if the item is serial controlled,
and both lot and serial information if your item is a lot and serial controlled.
LPN Details page
To enter details for a lot and serial controlled item:
1. Enter lot information. If you would like to add additional lot attributes, click the lot
attributes icon.
2. If you would like to enter serial details for the lot, click Show, and then enter serial
information. If you would like to add additional serial attributes, click the serial
attributes icon.
3. If you have more than one lot or serial controlled item, click Add Another Row.
4. If you have LPNs nested within each other, enter nesting details in the License Plate
Configuration Details section.
Note: You may change the total shipment quantity on the
LPN/Lot/Serial Detail page. The total shipment quantity entered
should be equal to the total lot/serial quantity.
5. When you are finished entering your LPN/Lot/Serial details, click OK.
6. Click Shipment Headers. Enter the required ASN or ASBN information.
You can also enter other information. The information you enter at the header level
is transferred to the line level. (However, changes you make at the line level
override information at the header level).
If you are entering an ASBN, you must enter the following billing information:
5-8 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
• Invoice number
• Invoice date
• Invoice amount
In the Remit-To site section, verify that the Remit To Site details are correct. If
the Remit to Site details need to be changed, click Change, select the correct
Remit To Site details, and then click Apply.
7. To preview the ASN or ASBN, click Preview.
8. Review the ASN or ASBN and click Submit.
Barcode Printing for ASN Shipment Number
The ASN details page has a Print button, which, when clicked, generates the barcode for
the Shipment Number. Additionally, the ASN details are also printed along with the
barcode.
Whether the Shipment Number is a numeric value or an alphanumeric value, the
system converts the Shipment Number to a barcode automatically when you click Print.
For more information on setting up the barcode printing for ASN Shipment Number,
see:Oracle iSupplier Portal Implementation Guide.
Uploading Advance Shipment Notices and Advance Shipment Billing
Notices
If you have a large volume of ASNs or ASBNs, you may create a spreadsheet containing
shipment details and upload it into your buying company's system. Using the
spreadsheet template in iSupplier Portal, you can create shipment notices offline, and
then upload the file.
To download instructions on how to upload ASN and ASBNs:
1. Click the Shipments tab, and then click Shipment Notices in the task bar directly
below the tabs.
2. Click Upload Advanced Shipment and Billing Notice
3. On the Upload Shipment Notices page, click Download Templates for instructions
on uploading an ASN or ASBN.
Shipping Information 5-9
Download Templates Page
4. On the Download Templates page, choose the file you want to download and click
Download. You may choose from the following files to download:
• ASN Template and Instructions - Contains instructions for uploading ASNs, a
sample ASN spreadsheet file, and the template to use when entering ASN
information offline.
• ASBN Template and Instructions - Contains instructions for uploading ASBNs,
a sample ASBN spreadsheet file, and the template to use when entering ASBN
information offline.
• Valid List of UOM, freight terms, etc.... - A list of values including country of
origin, UOM, freight, carriers, payments terms, etc. is provided. You should use
these values when creating your ASN/ASBN file.
• Zip, All Files - Contains instructions for uploading ASNs, ASBNs, samples of
ASN and ASBN spreadsheet files, templates to use while entering ASN and
ASBN information offline, and lists of values.
5. Complete the templates according to the instructions. Save your completed file
locally.
6. To upload your template, return to the Upload Shipment Notices page, browse for
your completed template and upload it.
Canceling Advance Shipment Notices and Advance Shipment Billing
Notices
When you cancel an ASN or ASBN, the system sends a notification to the buyer. You
can always reenter an ASN for the same purchase order shipments at a later time. When
you cancel an ASBN, both the shipment notice and corresponding invoice that was
issued in the buyer's payable system are canceled.
To cancel a submitted advance shipment notice or advance shipment billing notice:
5-10 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
1. Click the Shipments tab, and then click Shipment Notices in the task bar directly
below the tabs.
2. On the Shipment Notices page, click View/Cancel Advance Shipment Notices.
3. On the View/Cancel Advance Shipment Notices page, search for and select the
advance shipment notice you would like to cancel.
Note: You can use the advanced search feature to narrow your
search.
4. Click Cancel Shipment Notice. A notification of your cancellation is sent to the
buyer.
Note: Canceling a shipment notice cannot be undone. An ASN can
be canceled if any of the lines have been received by the buying
company. You can cancel an ASBN if the lines have been received
and the invoice has not been paid by the buying company.
Alternatively, you can cancel an ASN or ASBN line using the Advance Shipment
Notices page. The Shipments in the Advance Shipment Notice region has a Cancel
button that you can use to cancel ASN or ASBN lines after receiving and/or invoicing
are complete. Select the ASN or ASBN line or multiple lines, and click Cancel. This will
remove the lines from the ASN / ASBN.
After the supplier has cancelled a shipment in the submitted shipment notice, the
shipment goes back to the purchase order and is available to be taken up in the next
shipment notice.
The supplier can edit a shipment in the shipment notice after the buyer has partially
received that shipment.
Uploading Routing Requests
If your buying company is responsible for arranging the packing and shipping of
materials, you may need to submit a routing request. A routing request notifies your
buyer when goods are ready for shipment. You may upload a routing request using a
spreadsheet template.
To download instructions on how to upload a routing request:
1. Click the Shipments tab, and then click Shipment Notices in the task bar directly
below the tabs.
2. On the Shipment Notices page, click Create Routing Requests.
Shipping Information 5-11
3. On the Upload Routing Requests page, click Download Template.
The Readme file included in the download will provide instructions on how to upload
your routing request.
Viewing Routing Responses
You may view buyer responses to your routing requests. From the Shipment Notices
page, click View Routing Responses. On the Routing Response page, you may search
for routing responses (after your buyer has responded to them). You may search using
the following search criteria:
• Response Number
• Routing Number
• PO Number
• Ship-From
• Ship-To
• Pick Up Time
When you have found the routing response you would like to view, click the response
number for details.
Viewing Delivery Schedules
You can use the Delivery Schedules Results page to quickly determine deliveries that
need to be scheduled and deliveries that are past due. Click the purchase order number,
receipt quantity, and ship-to location links to view further detail.
Supplier Brokers have access to information about multiple suppliers, therefore a search
filter for transaction documents is enabled for all supplier broker logins. This allows
supplier brokers to search for, and filter required data only.
If you have logged in as a supplier broker, this page displays Supplier dropdown,
Supplier Site dropdown, along with other search fields. Select a Supplier from the
dropdown, this is a mandatory field. The Supplier Site field is optional. This enables
you to search for specific supplier information.
5-12 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
Delivery Schedules Results Page
Viewing Overdue Receipts
The Overdue Receipts Results page enables you to view the details of past due
purchase order shipments. Click the PO number, Ship-To Location, and Buyer to view
further detail.
Shipping Information 5-13
Overdue Receipts Results Page
Receiving Information
Receiving information enables you to view your receipts, returns, and delivery
performance.
The receiving information section includes:
• Viewing Receipts, page 5-13
• Viewing Returns, page 5-15
• Viewing On-Time Delivery Performance, page 5-15
Viewing Receipts
The View Receipts page enables you to explore a historical view of all receipts that
have been recorded for your shipped goods.
5-14 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
View Receipts page
1. On the View Receipts page, enter a value in one of the search fields to retrieve the
receipt information. Optionally use the Advanced Search , page 3-7 function to
specify more complex search criteria.
2. Supplier Brokers have access to information about multiple suppliers, therefore a
search filter for transaction documents is enabled for all supplier broker logins. This
allows supplier brokers to search for, and filter required data only.
If you have logged in as a supplier broker, this page displays Supplier dropdown,
Supplier Site field, along with other search fields. Select a Supplier from the
dropdown, this is a mandatory field. The Supplier Site dropdown is optional. . This
enables you to search for specific supplier information.
3. The View Receipts redisplays, listing the receipts who matched your search
criteria.
4. To view the information on a particular receipt, click the receipt number link.
5. The Receipt: details page displays information on that particular receipt. From this
page, there are links to display
• ASN/ASBN
• PO information
• Invoice information
Shipping Information 5-15
• Return information
• On Time Performance information
• Defect information
Viewing Returns
The Returns Summary page enables you to view the return history, the causes for
goods returned by the buying company, and inspection results of a shipment. The
search summary results include basic information along with details about the return,
such as quantities and a reason for return. Click Receipt Number, and PO Number to
view further detail.
Supplier Brokers have access to information about multiple suppliers, therefore a search
filter for transaction documents is enabled for all supplier broker logins. This allows
supplier brokers to search for, and filter required data only.
If you have logged in as a supplier broker, this page displays the Supplier dropdown,
Supplier Site field, along with other search fields. Select a Supplier from the dropdown,
this is a mandatory field. The Supplier Site dropdown is optional. This enables you to
search for specific supplier information.
Returns Summary page
Viewing On-Time Delivery Performance
The On-Time Performance page provides the delivery status of shipments you made
5-16 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
against purchase orders. You can view your performance for timeliness of deliveries.
Click the PO Number and Receipt Number to view further details.
On-Time Performance Page
Quality Information
Entering quality information online enables paperless transactions for required quality
standards. You can only enter quality information if the buying company has Oracle
Quality and you have permission.
You first create a Quality Collection Plan in Oracle Quality and associate the plan with
the Self-Service Quality for outside processing transactions. You enter quality
information to communicate to your buyer if your item meets the quality standards
required. For example, an electrical motor supplier performs a detailed electrical test on
each motor. That supplier can enter the quality data gathered from each test and enter
that information online in Oracle iSupplier Portal prior to shipping the motor. Quality
engineers can evaluate the results and stop the shipment of any motors that do not meet
the requirements.
The system displays an available link in the Quality Plans column. Clicking this link
displays a list of collection plans associated with your purchase order. You can enter
quality results, view quality results submitted, or view attachments for any purchase
order listed.
You can associate ERES enabled transaction events such as Quality Result Creation or
Quality Result Update to iSupplier quality collection transactions. You can then enable
signature flows when you add and update quality results for the iSupplier collection
plans and parent and child collection plans in the Quality Workbench.
For a list of Oracle Quality events predefined in Oracle E-Records, see E-records and E-
signatures for Oracle Quality, Oracle Quality User's Guide.
Shipping Information 5-17
The Quality Shipments page displays purchase order and shipping information for any
purchased item being shipped, but only for open jobs that also have at least one
collection plan assigned to them. You can obtain the shipment number, ship-to location,
and ship-to organization. You can also download quality collection plans, and collect
and submit quality data regarding your shipments.
1. On the Shipments tab, click Quality in the task bar directly below the tabs.
Search - Quality Shipments Page
2. On the Search - Quality Shipments page, search for a shipment.
3. Click Available in the Quality Plans column for the appropriate shipment.
4. On the Quality Plans page, click the enter quality results icon. To view existing
quality results, click the view quality results icon. To view attachments, click the
attachment icon.
Quality Plans Page
1. On the Enter Test Results page, enter a number and click Continue. (You can only
complete this task if you have permission).
5-18 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
Enter Quality Results Page
2. On the Enter Quality Results page, enter your quality information (the fields
available to enter data vary depending on the type of information you need to
enter) and click Submit. You can enter up to 25 rows of quality data at a time.
3. Once you have submitted all of the quality results, a notification is sent to the
buyer.
To send quality notifications to the buyer or recipient:
After you have saved and submitted all of your quality results, click Notification to
notify the buyer or recipient that you have submitted results (if you have permission).
You can only submit 25 rows of results at a time. If you are submitting more than 25
rows of results, for example 100 rows of results, you must submit your results four
times.
Note: To avoid sending duplicate notifications, click Notification only
after you complete and submit all of your rows of data.
Planning and Inventory Information 6-1
6
Planning and Inventory Information
This chapter covers the following topics:
• Overview
• Forecast Information
• Product Information
• Viewing Supplier Item Summary
• Viewing Item Inventory Information
• Maintaining Capacity Information
• Maintaining Order Modifiers
• Vendor Managed Inventory
• Consigned Inventory
• Viewing Schedules from Supplier Scheduling
Overview
Oracle iSupplier Portal enables you to view demand forecasts from the buying
company. Using your item number, you can view different transactions. You can also
maintain certain item information such as manufacturing and order modifiers. Oracle
iSupplier Portal enables you to perform vendor managed inventory or track consigned
inventory stock. You also can maintain your orders and capacity information on the
system. You can view planning and shipping schedules from Supplier Scheduling too.
This chapter includes the following:
• Forecast Information, page 6-2
• Product Information, page 6-2
• Vendor Managed Inventory, page 6-8
6-2 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
• Consigned Inventory, page 6-9
• Viewing Schedules from Supplier Scheduling, page 6-10
Forecast Information
Forecast information enables you to view real-time forecasts from the buying company.
You can view plans, arranged by schedules, that communicate expected demand over
different time horizons. You can see all available schedules and select the schedule
number to view further details. The Planning tab allows you to view plans that
communicate forecast information. You can also view forecast schedules. A summary of
schedules is displayed and you can select each schedule to view details. Click the
Schedule Number for further information.
The Planning Schedule Summary page displays forecast information for all items. To
view forecast information for all items on a single page, click the summarized view
icon.
Product Information
Using the Product tab, you can easily access and view information about the products
you provide sorted by item.
The product information section includes:
• Viewing Supplier Item Summary, page 6-2
• Viewing Item Inventory Information, page 6-4
• Maintaining Capacity Information, page 6-5
• Maintaining Order Modifiers, page 6-7
Viewing Supplier Item Summary
The Supplier Items page enables you to view all of the details of the products that you
supply. You can view your search results in a summary format with links on each line
for:
Planning and Inventory Information 6-3
Supplier Items Page
Orders
A summary of order lines placed with you for this item. This summary includes
quantity ordered, quantity received, and price break information. Click PO Number,
Ship-To Location, and Buyer for further information.
Overdue
A summary of overdue receipts for the selected item. Click PO Number and Receipt
Number for further information.
Receipt History
A summary of receipts for the selected item. Click PO Number and Receipt Number for
further information.
Defects
A summary view of failed inspection items.
Returns
A summary view of returns for an item that includes shipment information, RMA
number, and quantities. Click PO Number and Receipt Number for further information.
On-Time Performance
A summary of receipts for an item that includes due dates, receipt dates, and shipping
information. Click PO Number and Receipt Number for further information.
Inventory
The On-Hand page provides more details about the item, on-hand quantity, and links
to both. Revision history and sub-inventory breakdown of the on-hand quantity (with
locator, lot, and serial).
6-4 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
Vendor Managed Inventory
A summary view of vendor managed items that includes supplier, item shipment
notice, and buyer information.
Consigned Inventory
A summary view of consigned items including item, shipment, and transaction
information. Click the appropriate icon for further information.
Most of the summaries are available to export.
Viewing Item Inventory Information
The On-Hand Items page enables you to view your item inventory information.
Viewing your item inventories enables you to view on-hand inventories, item locations,
lots, and serials.
To view item inventory information:
1. Click the Product tab, click Supplier Item in the task bar directly below the tabs.
2. Search for an item.
3. On the Supplier Items Result page, select your item and click the inventory icon.
4. Click Revision to view any revisions made to an item.
On-Hand Items Page
5. Click the Subinventory icon to view subinventory information for an item.
6. Click the Locator, Lot, or Serial icon to view any specific item information.
On-Hand items Subinventories Page
7. Click Export to download your inventory information.
Planning and Inventory Information 6-5
Maintaining Capacity Information
You can accurately maintain your delivery capacity online. Your buying company can
allocate planned orders taking into account your changes to the capacity constraints.
This provides more accuracy and flexibility in making sourcing allocations during the
organization's planning, scheduling, and procurement processes.
You can update your capacity abilities for various items for which you are an approved
supplier. You can use the Order Modifiers page to define processing lead times, fixed
lot multiples, and minimum order quantities. You can also define tolerance fences by
Days in Advance and Tolerance on the Maintain Capacity page. Once your updates are
submitted, the company's buyer is notified and their approved supplier list is updated
with your information. The company can then better allocate planned orders taking
allocation and current capacities into account.
You can update the following capacity constraints for each item that has been sourced
to you:
• Processing lead time
• Order modifiers: minimum order quantity and fixed lot multiple
• Capacity per day for a range of effective date
• Tolerance fences: tolerance percentage and days in advance
After you change capacity information, a notification is sent to the planner and the
buyer. Based on the preference set by the buying company, the information may go
through an approval from a buyer or planner. You will be notified of the status of the
request.
To maintain capacity information:
1. Click the Product tab, click Maintain Capacity in the task bar directly below the
tabs.
2. On the Maintain Capacity page, enter search criteria information.
6-6 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
Maintain Capacity Page
3. Click Search. (You can perform a blind search by clicking Search without entering
any criteria. This results in all items assigned to you being displayed).
4. Select your item and click Maintain Capacity.
Capacity of Item Page
Note: The Maintain Capacity page displays information from
today's date forward. You can modify the current defined capacity
or create new entries by clicking Add Another Row.
5. You can also add or modify the Over Capacity Tolerance by changing existing Days
in Advance and Tolerance values.
Note: To add additional Over Capacity Tolerance information, click
Add Another Row.
6. When you have completed your update, click Update Capacity. An Update
Capacity Confirmation message is displayed.
Planning and Inventory Information 6-7
Maintaining Order Modifiers
Maintaining order modifiers enables you to view and make changes to the details of
your ability to fulfill purchase orders scheduled for delivery. You can view shipment
processing lead times, minimum order quantities, and fixed lot multiples. You can then
adjust these to fit your delivery ability.
To maintain order modifiers:
1. Click the Product tab, click Order Modifiers in the task bar directly below the tabs.
2. On the Order Modifiers page, enter search criteria information and click Go.
Order Modifiers Page
3. Select your item and click Maintain Order Modifiers.
Maintain Order Modifiers Page
4. On the Order Modifiers for Item page, you can add or modify the following item
attribute values:
• Processing Lead Time (in days)
• Minimum Order Quantity
• Fixed Lot Multiple
6-8 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
5. Click Submit.
The item is immediately updated with the changes and an information notification is
sent to the planning manager or buyer of the item. They can verify your changes in their
approved supplier list.
Note: You can erase any changes before submitting your request by
clicking Cancel.
Vendor Managed Inventory
Vendor Managed Inventory enables you to manage the inventory at the customer's
location. Customers can set up the minimum and maximum stock levels required for an
item enabled for maintenance by a supplier.
Using Oracle iSupplier Portal, you can view these minimum and maximum levels and
also view the current on-hand quantities for that item at the customer location. You
have the option of triggering the replenishment requests from this page to ensure that
the stock quantity is maintained at the customer location.
On the Product tab, on the Supplier Item Results page, click the VMI icon. From the
Vendor Managed Inventory Status page, your search results are displayed with
detailed information about the status of each item you included in your search and links
to enter replenishment information. You then initiate replenishment requests for the
item.
Note: You can save searches that you use frequently by clicking
Personalize, entering your search criteria, and then saving by clicking
Apply. Personalize also enables you to customize the information that
is displayed when you view the VMI Search page.
To generate supply requests:
1. Search for the items you are responsible for.
2. Review the replenishment method for the item.
3. If the method for the item is Buyer or Supplier Initiates Release; you then select the
item, enter the quantity, and click Release.
4. If the method for the item is Manual Requisition; you click the enter requisition icon
in the Create Requisition column. On the Enter Order Details page, enter a
quantity, need-by date, and other details of the order as required by the customer.
Once you have completed and submitted the replenishment request, you will receive a
confirmation message that contains the request identifier. You can use the request
identifier to monitor the progress of your request.
Planning and Inventory Information 6-9
You can override the quantity with either of the manual types of replenishment
methods. For Automatic Release method items, you can click the enter replenishment
icon in the Create Requisition column and enter a quantity.
Consigned Inventory
Oracle Procurement along with Discrete Manufacturing supports maintaining
consigned inventory for an item. Buying companies can enable items to have consigned
inventory. This enables you to maintain the stock at the buying company location.
Buying companies do not incur financial liabilities until they start consuming the stock.
Oracle iSupplier Portal enables you to view on-hand stock for consigned items and also
associated procure-to-pay transactions.
To view consigned items:
1. Click the Product tab, and then click Consigned Inventory in the task bar directly
below the tabs.
2. On the Consigned Inventory page, search and select your item.
3. For a given item, suppliers can view the following information:
• Supplier Item
• Item
• Item Description
• Consigned On-Hand - Displays the on-hand stock levels for the item at the
buying company.
• Consigned Shipments - Displays the purchase order shipment details that
enable the item to be shipped from you to the buying company location.
• Consumption Orders - Displays the purchase orders/blanket releases that are
created when consigned stock is consumed by the buying company. These are
the orders against which you can submit invoices to the buying company.
• Consigned Receipts - Displays the history of receipts for consigned stock.
• Consigned Returns - Displays the history of return transactions created for the
consigned stock.
• Material Transactions - Displays the material transactions that occurred for the
consigned item. It includes transactions to procure the item, which is the
consigned stock, and then the transactions to move the stock to regular
inventory for consumption.
6-10 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
If the consigned item is also enabled for Vendor Managed Inventory, suppliers can
initiate replenishment requests online.
To view consigned inventory aging items:
1. Click the Product tab, and then click Consigned Inventory Aging in the task bar
directly below the tabs.
2. On the Consigned Inventory Aging page, you may search for items that are past
due, or items that are due in the next 7, 15, or 30 days. Select the appropriate search
criteria for your item and click Go.
3. For a given item, suppliers can view the following information:
• Supplier Site
• Organization
• Supplier Item
• Item
• Item Revision
• Item Description
• Subinventory
• UOM
• Quantity
• Receipt Date
• Consume Before - Date the item must be consumed.
• Days Before Consumption is Due - Displays the number of days before the
ownership of the item is transferred.
Viewing Schedules from Supplier Scheduling
You must be logged in as a supplier to view the schedules that have been confirmed by
the buyer. Click the Planning tab. Click Go (with or without any search criteria) and the
plans display in the search results. Drill down to view the schedule and see the
demand.
Invoice and Payment Information 7-1
7
Invoice and Payment Information
This chapter covers the following topics:
• Overview
• Submitting Invoices
• Viewing Invoice Information
• Viewing AP AR Netting Report
• Viewing Payment Information
Overview
You can access invoice and payment information as well as review invoice status online
using Oracle iSupplier Portal. If the buying company uses Oracle Payables, you can also
submit invoices online.
This section includes the following topics:
• Submitting Invoices, page 7-1
• Viewing Invoice Information, page 7-6
• Viewing Payment Information, page 7-11
• Viewing AP AR Netting Report, page 7-9
Submitting Invoices
If your buying company has implemented Oracle Payables, you may submit invoices
online.
You can submit an invoice online to the buying company based on the purchase order
lines you have fulfilled. You need to only identify those items shipped and enter a
quantity. You can invoice against open, approved, standard, or blanket purchase orders
7-2 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
that are not fully billed. You can enter a credit memo against a fully billed purchase
order (use negative quantity amounts to enter a credit memo), as well as invoice against
multiple purchase orders. However, the currency and organization of all items on an
invoice must be the same. The organization is the entity within the buyer's company
that you are invoicing.
You can also partially complete an invoice, save it, and submit it later.
After you submit an invoice, you cannot change the invoice. If you need to make
adjustments to a submitted invoice, you can create a credit memo against the same
purchase order items to net out the invoice charges. The purchase order will then be
available for a new invoice.
In some cases, there will be no matching purchase order. If you have provided a service,
to the buying company, for example, landscape services, the buying company may not
have submitted a formal purchase order. You can submit invoices in these cases as well.
To submit an invoice with a matching purchase order:
1. Click the Finance tab, and then click Create Invoices in the task bar directly below
the tabs.
2. On the Invoice Actions page, select either With a PO from the Create Invoice Menu
and click Go.
Create Invoices Select PO
3. On the Create Invoice: Purchase Orders page, enter search criteria to identify the
purchase order, and click Go.
4. Select items of the PO to be invoiced and click Add to Invoice. Add as many items
as you need (items on your invoice display at the bottom of the page). If you
mistakenly add an item to the invoice, you can select it and click Remove from
invoice.
5. When finished adding items, click Next.
Invoice and Payment Information 7-3
Create Invoice: Details Page
6. On the Create Invoice: Details page, enter an invoice number and remit to address.
You can also update the quantity and/or price. Enter and any additional
information, and then click Next.
Create Invoice: Manage Tax Page
7. On the Create Invoice: Manage Tax page, you can view the tax information
generated.
8. When finished, click Next.
7-4 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
Review/Submit Invoice Page
9. On the Create Invoice: Review and Submit page, review your invoice and click
Submit. You also have the option to return to this invoice later by clicking Save for
Later.
10. A Confirmation page is generated informing you of successful invoice creation. .
Creating an Invoice Without a Purchase Order
The process of creating invoices that do not have matching purchase orders is similar,
although some information is not required, and some must be entered.
The contact information for invoices with purchase orders is restricted to the sites for
the users, but for invoices without purchase orders, the system will display all contacts
for the supplier sites to which the user has access.
iSupplier users can enter an invoice without a PO, but if the approval workflow for
their customer (Oracle Applications user) is not implemented, the status of that invoice
request will remain IN PROCESS and will not change.
Note: You need work with the customers to ensure these type of
invoices are accepted.
To create an invoice without a purchase order:
1. From the iSupplier Portal Home page, click the Finance tab.
2. On the Create Invoices page, select Without PO from the Create Invoice menu,
and click Go.
Invoice and Payment Information 7-5
3. Enter information as needed. The following fields are required.
• Invoice number
• Remit to name
• Currency
• Customer tax payer ID
Enter any other appropriate information. Use the Items fields to identify and
describe the item or service for which you are invoicing. When you are finished,
click Next.
7-6 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
4. The Review and Submit page shows the tax information generated by the tax
system. If the invoice information is correct, click Submit.
Viewing Invoice Information
The View Invoices page enables you to search for and view details of an invoice you
have submitted. You can search using various any or all of the search criteria on the
page such as:
• Invoice Number
• Invoice date
• Due date
• Payment status
• Invoice Amount
To view invoice information:
1. On the iSupplier Portal Home page, click the Finance tab, then click the View
Invoices subtab.
2. On the View Invoices page, enter search values into one or more of the search fields,
Invoice and Payment Information 7-7
and click Go. Or use the Advanced Search option.
Invoice Summary Results Page
3. Supplier Brokers have access to information about multiple suppliers, therefore a
search filter for transaction documents is enabled for all supplier broker logins. This
allows supplier brokers to search for, and filter required data only.
If you have logged in as a supplier broker, this page displays Supplier dropdown,
Supplier Site dropdown, along with other search fields. Select a Supplier from the
dropdown, this is a mandatory field. The Supplier Site dropdown is optional. This
enables you to search for specific supplier information.
4. When the search results display, click the Invoice Number link to view details of the
invoice. (You can also view any associated purchase order(s), payments, scheduled
payments, or netting report by clicking their respective links, or icons).
7-8 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
Invoice Details page
5. On the Invoice Details page, you can see the header level information.
6. To view invoice line information, click the Invoice Lines tab. You can also view any
scheduled payments and any hold information.
Note: If you submitted your invoice online, there may be a delay
before you can review it because the Accounts Payable department
needs to process it first.
7. In the Payment Information region of Invoice Header, you can view the following
dispute information for an Invoice:
• Original Invoice Amount
• Dispute Reason
Note: Oracle Transportation Management (OTM) will pass the
disputed invoice to Oracle Payables with the original invoice
amount of the invoice and disputed reasons. Refer the Oracle
Payables Users Guide for more information on dispute
resolution setup.
8. You can view the following Netting Information attributes at the header level under
Netting Information:
• Netting Amount
• Reckoning Currency
• Netting Report
Invoice and Payment Information 7-9
Note: You can view the netting attributes only when the profile
POS: AP AR Netting Information is set as Yes at the User level, or
the Site level.
Viewing AP AR Netting Report
Netting functionality of Oracle Payables is integrated with the iSupplier Portal to enable
you to view the netting information for an invoice. Please refer to the Payables and
Receivables Netting section in the Oracle Payables User's Guide for more information on
the AP AR Netting set up.
Oracle Payables enables you to offset supplier payables (AP invoice payments) against
the customer receivables or claims with the netting functionality.
To view the AP AR Netting Report:
1. Navigate to the iSupplier Portal Full Access > Finance> View Invoices. The View
Invoices page displays.
2. Enter the search criteria for an invoice number and Click Go.
3. Search result displays the invoices matching to your search criteria.
7-10 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
View Invoices
Note: The Netting Report icon is enabled when the invoice is
netted off and netting batch is completed, otherwise it is disabled.
Please refer to the Payables and Receivables Netting section in the
Oracle Payables User's Guide to know how the invoice is netted off
and netting batch is completed.
4. Click the Netting Report icon. The View Netting Report page displays.
View Netting Report
5. Select the Final Netting Report item from the Template list.
6. Select the Language from the Locale list. For Example: English: United States (*)
7. Select the Format from the list. You can select the format as Excel, HTML, PDF, and
RTF from the list.
8. Click Run. The Oracle Netting Report page displays.
Invoice and Payment Information 7-11
9. You can view the following netting information on this page along with invoice
details:
• Netting Agreement
• Netting Bank Account
• Reckoning Currency
• Final Netting Amount
Note: You can view the netting information at the Invoice Header
level, only when the POS: AP AR Netting Information profile is set
as Yes at the User level, or the Site level.
10. Click Export to save the netting report.
Viewing Payment Information
Payment inquiry enables you to view the history of all the payments to your invoices
completed by the buying company. You can use the View Payments page to search
using various search criteria, including:
• Payment number
• Invoice number
• Payment date
• Purchase order number
7-12 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
To view payment information:
1. On the iSupplier Portal Home page, click the Finance tab, then click the View
Payments subtab.
2. On the View Payments page, enter search values into one or more of the search
fields, and click Go. Or use the Advanced Search option.
Payment Summary Results Page
3. Supplier Brokers have access to information about multiple suppliers, therefore a
search filter for transaction documents is enabled for all supplier broker logins. This
allows supplier brokers to search for, and filter required data only.
If you have logged in as a supplier broker, this page displays Supplier dropdown,
Supplier Site dropdown, along with other search fields. Select a Supplier from the
dropdown, this is a mandatory field. The Supplier Site dropdown is optional. This
enables you to search for specific supplier information.
4. When the search results display, click the payment number link to view details of
the payment. (You can also view any associated purchase order(s), or invoices by
clicking their links).
Invoice and Payment Information 7-13
Payment Details page
5. On the Payments details page, you can see the payment details including the
invoices addressed by the payment.
iSupplier Implementation.pdf
Supplier Profile Management 8-1
8
Supplier Profile Management
This chapter covers the following topics:
• Overview
• Supplier Profile Management Flow
• General Company Information
• Company Profile
• Tax Details
• Address Book
• Contact Directory
• Business Classifications
• Products and Services
• Banking Details
• Creating Banking Details
• Responding to Buyer Surveys
• Manage Supplier Broker
Overview
Supplier Profile Management enables you to manage key profile details used to
establish or maintain a business relationship with the buying company. This profile
information includes address information, names of main contacts, user accounts (if you
have the Supplier Profile and User Management responsibility), business classifications,
banking details, and category information about the goods and services you are able to
provide to the buyer. Buyer administrators will review the details you provide and use
them to update the appropriate records in the buyer's purchasing transaction system.
You benefit from managing your profile yourself. Supplier Profile Management enables
you to effectively represent yourself to the buying company and update your profiles
8-2 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
details as necessary, making important information accurate.
Notifications for Change Requests
You receive notifications when buyers approve or reject requests for changes to:
• Address book.
• Contact directory.
• Business classifications.
• Product and services.
Approval notifications are for your information only. Rejection notifications include a
link to enable you to view the reasons for the rejection and to make any necessary
updates.
The chapter includes the following sections:
• Supplier Profile Management Flow, page 8-2
• General Company Information, page 8-3
• Company Profile, page 8-4
• Tax Details, page 8-5
• Address Book, page 8-7
• Contact Directory, page 8-9
• Business Classifications, page 8-12
• Products and Services, page 8-13
• Banking Details, page 8-16
• Creating Banking Details, page 8-16
• Responding to Buyer Surveys, page 8-19
• Managing Supplier Broker, page 8-19
Supplier Profile Management Flow
To have the information you enter in Supplier Profile Management processed in the
system, log into the Oracle iSupplier Portal and access your profile. You can then enter
information for your address book, contact directory, business classifications, products
and services, or user accounts. The buyer administrator will review any changes to your
Supplier Profile Management 8-3
profile and use this information to update their purchasing system.
General Company Information
Management of your company's profile information involves the use of two high-level
pages. The General information page provides a quick, high-level display of
information at the company level. You can use the General information page to add an
attachment to your profile. Adding attachments allows you to upload documents
pertinent to your relationship with the buying company or upload documents that may
have been specifically requested by the buying company (for example, tax documents).
The Company Organization page allows you to navigate to other pages where you can
add or update your actual profile information.
To access the General page, on the iSupplier Portal Home page, click the Admin tab.
General Information page
To upload a local attachment:
1. Click Add Attachment.
2. To upload an attachment stored locally, accept the default Desktop File/Text/URL
from the Add menu.
3. Give the attachment a title, description, and select a Category value to indicate its
original source
4. Browse to the location of the attachment and select it.
8-4 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
5. Click Apply.
To upload an attachment from the buyer's document catalog:
1. Click Add Attachment.
2. Select From Document Catalog from the Add menu.
3. Search on the document title, or expand the search options to use additional search
fields.
4. Select the document(s), and click Apply.
Company Profile
Use the Company Profile pages to define the detailed information about your company.
Use the navigation bar on the left to access the different pages of the Company Profile.
The Organization page defines high-level details about your company. To access the
Organization page, click Organization in the Company Profile navigation tree.
Supplier Profile Management 8-5
Organization Page
Once you have entered appropriate information, click Save.
Tax Details
Using the Payables responsibility ((N) Setup > Options > Payables Options) you can use
the option to apply the withholding tax at Invoice Validation and Payment or both the
Invoice Validation and Payment.
8-6 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
Withholding Tax window in Payables
The option At Invoice Validation and Payment time has been included. This option can
be selected only if the Use Withholding Tax box is selected in the Withholding Tax
region of Payables Options and the option in Apply Withholding Tax is selected as At
Invoice Validation and Payment Time. Another option called At Withholding
Application is added to the Create Withholding Invoice region.
In the Supplier/Supplier Site pages, there are two Lists of Values to display Invoice
Withholding Tax Group and Payment Withholding Tax Group. At the Supplier level,
the Allow withholding tax box in tax details tab of the supplier is editable at the
irrespective of the payables option selected. At the supplier site level the Allow
withholding tax box is displayed at the supplier site level but is editable only if Use
Withholding tax box is enabled in the Payables Options of the operating unit to which
the supplier site is attached and Allow Withholding tax box is selected at the supplier
level.
Supplier Profile Management 8-7
Tax Details Page with Withholding Tax
Tax Details Page with Withholding Tax (contd.)
Address Book
Use the Address Book page to enter information on your company sites. You can create
and modify the multiple addresses used in transactions with the buying company (for
example, purchasing locations, payment sites, and addresses for RFQs). You can
provide a comment for each address entry to describe how it is used. For example, you
8-8 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
can enter an address record and indicate that this is an address for a location from
which goods or services may be purchased.
The Create Address and Update Address pages in the Address Book display the
Address Purpose region, using which you can assign a purpose (reason) for the
address. Add a new Address Purpose row by clicking the Add Another Row icon.
Select an Address Purpose such as Bill To, Acknowledgment, or Install At from the
Purpose drop-down. Select multiple address purposes for an address. Remove an
address purpose by clicking the Delete icon.
Address Book Page
After you enter address information, buyer administrators are notified of the changes.
Buyer administrators must review the updates and decide how to use the details to
update the purchasing system. Therefore, any changes you make may not be promoted
to the application for a few days. Use the Status column in the Address Book page to
track the status of the address that you create or update and submit for approval. The
status is Pending when the address information is pending approval and changes to
Current after the buyer approves the address information.
To manage address book details:
1. To access the Address Book page, click Address Book in the Company Profile
navigation tree.
2. The Address Book page displays the current addresses defined for your company.
From this page you can:
• Delete an address.
• Update an address.
• Add a new address by clicking Create.
Supplier Profile Management 8-9
Create Address Page
1. On the Create Address page, enter the appropriate information for the new
address (required fields are marked with an asterisk). Note that entering
the address purpose is optional.
2. When finished, click Save.
Contact Directory
The Contact Directory lists the employees at your company who function as contacts
between you and your buyer.
After entering the contact details, you can link the contacts to the appropriate address
(described below). As people move within your organization, you can also revise the
address details for a contact.
You can create multiple contacts and link each one to as many addresses as needed.
Each contact must be unique based on first name, last name, and phone number.
Contacts that are obsolete can be removed.
After you enter the information, buyer administrators are notified so they can review
the details and use then to update their purchasing system. Therefore, your changes
may not be promoted to the purchasing system for a few days.
Viewing contact information:
1. Click Contact Directory under the Company Profile navigation tree. The system
displays your current list of contacts.
8-10 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
Contact Directory Details Page
2. On the Contact Directory page, you can
• Delete a contact by clicking the trash can icon.
• Update contact information by clicking the pencil icon.
• View the inactive contacts by expanding the Contact Directory : Inactive
Contacts region.
• Manage address information for a contact by clicking the Addresses icon.
Address Associations for Contact Page
Use the Address Associations for Contact page to manage the addresses for a
particular contact:
• To remove an address for a contact, click the trashcan icon.
• To add an address to a contact, click Add Another Row, search for the
Supplier Profile Management 8-11
address, and click Save.
To create a new contact
1. On the Contact Directory Details page, click Create.
Create Contact Page
2. Enter appropriate information such as Contact Title, First Name, Middle Name,
Last Name, Alternate Contact Name, Job Title, Email Address, URL, Phone Area
Code, Phone Number, Phone Extension, Alternate Phone Area Code, Alternate
Phone Number, Fax Area Code, Fax Number, and Inactive Date for the contact. To
create a temporary contact, use the pop-up calendar to identify and expiration date.
3. If you have the authority to create user accounts, the Create User Account for This
Contact checkbox appears on this page. Clicking this checkbox displays additional
fields for creating and authorizing users with access to iSupplier Portal..
Note: The Supplier Onboarding Configuration page provides the
Create User Account check box, which determines if user account
must be created by default for a primary contact. Based on their
8-12 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
business requirements, buyer administrators can select the check
box either at the Global or the Operating Unit level.
To create a user account, grant the appropriate responsibilities and specify the
appropriate user access restrictions to the new user. See the Oracle iSupplier Portal
Implementation guide for details about defining user accounts.
4. The Create Contact page (and the Update Contact page) in the Contact Directory
display the Contact Purpose region, using which the user can assign a purpose
(reason) for the contact, such as Administrative Contact, or Technical Contact. Add
a new Contact Purpose row by clicking the Add Another Row icon. Select a contact
purpose from the Purpose dropdown list. You can select multiple purposes for a
contact. Remove a contact purpose by clicking the Delete icon. Entering the Contact
Purpose is optional.
The purpose the user selects determines the type of communication that will be
received from the buying organization. Thus the buying organization sends out
various types of communication to the supplier contacts, based on the specific
purpose(s) assigned to them.
5. When you have specified your contact (and user account, if applicable) information,
click Save.
Business Classifications
Buying companies establish a list of business classifications they want to use to classify
their supply base. In some regions, these classifications are required by government
regulations.
You can claim classifications that are appropriate to your business and add any
required classification details. Buyers can then audit your qualifications. Once you
claim the appropriate classifications, buyer administrators are notified so they can
review the details.
Designated supplier users will be notified when the re-certification date for supplier's
business classification is due. This is for the re-certification of the business classification
and is based on the Business Classification Re-Certification Notification Reminder Days
profile option set by the system administrator.
To claim / re-certify business classifications:
1. On the Admin information page, click Business Classifications.
2. On the Business Classifications page, check Applicable check box for all
classifications that apply to your company.
Supplier Profile Management 8-13
Business Classifications page
3. Select the "I certify, that I have reviewed the classification below and they are
current and accurate" check box.
Note: Even if this check box is not selected the business
classification is recertified when you click Save.
4. Complete the remaining fields.
5. Click Save. The Business Classification is updated.
Products and Services
Buying companies define product and service category sets that they use to categorize
their supply base. You can browse the list of goods and services and select all those that
apply to your business. Buying companies can then use this information; some may use
it to help generate supplier invitation lists for RFQs or for reporting.
You can browse the hierarchy tree and select a parent category or child categories.
When a parent is selected, the buying company assumes that you can provide all the
products or services in that category. After you select the product and services
categories that apply to your business, buyer administrators are notified so they can
review the details. You can update your selections at any time.
A supplier or supplier profile management administrator can search for a specific
product or service from the Product & Services hierarchy. Supplier administrator can
view the validation code corresponding to the respective product or service on the Add
8-14 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
Products and Services page. Suppliers can view the search results with:
• Products and Services codes along with Description.
• List of Product and Services ordered by Description.
You can search for the products and services in the Prospective Supplier Registration:
Additional Details page, Prospective Supplier Registration: Add Product and Services
page, Supplier Profile Change Request page, and Product and Services Subcategories
page.
To claim, or search for products and services:
1. On the Admin information page, click Product and Services.
Product and Services page
2. On the Products and Services page, the system displays the list of categories with
their codes, and approval status that have already been claimed by your company.
(To browse child category details for any parent, click the view sub-category icon.)
3. Click Add. The Add Products and Services page displays.
Supplier Profile Management 8-15
Add Products and Services page
4. In the Add Products and Service page, the supplier user can search for products
and services with the Browse All Products & Services default option, or select the
Search for Specific Product & Services option to enter the search criteria for code,
description, or a combination of both and click Go.
5. You can view the search results for products and services ordered by description.
6. Select the Applicable check box. (Applicable check box is greyed out for products or
services which are already selected as Applicable.)
7. Click Apply.
8. To view sub-category information about a product or service, click the view sub-
8-16 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
categories icon. On the Add Products and Services page, click Applicable to apply
a particular sub-category, and then click Apply.
View Products and Services Subcategories
To remove products or services:
1. On the Products and Services page, select a product or service.
2. Click Remove.
If you, as the supplier user, remove any associated products or services categories, the
system sends an FYI notification to the buyer about the deletion. However, please note
that the removal / deletion of product and services or categories does not require
approvals from the buyer.
Banking Details
To simplify the process of capturing bank account related details and to improve data
quality, you can create and maintain your own bank account details and assign these
accounts to multiple addresses within your company. Buying companies can then
access and approve these details for propagation into their payables systems.
You can create and maintain bank account details that you want the buying company to
use when they make payments to you. The system captures all relevant information.
Since bank accounts are defined for a particular bank, branch and account number, you
have the ability to enter all this information when creating your account entries. When
you enter your account information, the system validates for duplicate entries.
Creating Banking Details
To view existing bank accounts:
1. From the Company Profile navigation tree, click Banking Details. The Banking
Details page displays information on any bank accounts already defined for your
company. Use the View menu entries to control which bank accounts are displayed.
Supplier Profile Management 8-17
Banking Details Page
• General Accounts displays accounts that are used company-wide (as opposed
to accounts assigned to a particular address).
• All Accounts displays general accounts as well as accounts assigned to an
address. Use this view to update account information.
• All Assignments displays which accounts are assigned to which sites.
2. To add an additional existing account to the list of general accounts, click Add,
select the account, and click Save.
To create a new account:
1. On the Banking Details page, click Create.
2. On the Create Bank Account page, enter the appropriate values. Note that you can
expand the Bank, Branch, and Bank Account sections to enter additional details.
8-18 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
Create Bank Accounts Page
3. When creating a bank account, you can create a new account at an existing
bank/branch, or a new bank and/or branch.
1. To create an account at a new bank:
1. Identify the country where the bank is located.
2. Click Create New Bank.
3. Enter the bank name and number.
4. Click "Show Bank Details" and enter details about the new bank as needed.
2. To use an existing bank
1. Click the magnifying glass icon.
2. Use the Search and Select page to identify the bank.
3. To create a new branch
1. Click Create New Branch.
2. Enter the branch name and number.
3. Click "Show Branch Details" link and enter details about the new branch as
needed. .
Supplier Profile Management 8-19
4. Enter the detail information about the new branch.
4. To use and existing branch:
1. Click the magnifying glass icon.
2. Use the Search and Select page to identify the branch.
4. Provide any additional account details by clicking "Show Account Details."
5. When you have finished entering bank account details, click Save.
Note: For suppliers in European Union countries, International Bank
Account Number (IBAN) information is part of compliance with the
European Union requirement. To derive the IBAN or validate the
number entered by the user, the supplier administrator should
implement a custom code-hook. The application displays an error
message, if the number is incorrect. For information on the custom
code-hook, refer to the Oracle iSupplier Portal Implementation Guide
Responding to Buyer Surveys
From time to time, buyers may request you respond to surveys. Surveys are used by the
buying organizations to solicit information and input for use in improving relationships
with suppliers.
To respond to a buyer survey:
1. From the iSupplier Portal Home page, click the Admin tab.
2. On the General page, click Surveys in the navigation tree on the left.
3. All surveys appropriate for you are listed in the table. To respond to a survey, click
the pencil icon. The instructions on completing surveys vary from one to another.
Manage Supplier Broker
Log in to Oracle iSupplier Portal as a supplier and select the Supplier Profile & User
Manager responsibility. Open the Manage Supplier Broker subtab. Click Manage
Supplier Broker. Select a supplier broker name, and click Apply to give the supplier
broker access to your organization's transactions. A confirmation message indicates that
the supplier broker is associated with your organization. The supplier broker can then
access and manage supplier transactions.
iSupplier Implementation.pdf
Buying Company View 9-1
9
Buying Company View
This chapter covers the following topics:
• Buying Company View
• Using the Oracle iSupplier Portal Home Page with the Buying Company View
• Order Information
• Purchase Orders
• Agreements
• Purchase History
• Acknowledging Changes
• Shipment Information
• Shipment Notices
• Receipts
• Account Information
• Invoices
• Payments
• Tolerance Based Auto-Approval
Buying Company View
The buying company view provides the same easy to use view of procure-to-pay
transactions as the supplier view. Using the Internal User View responsibility in Oracle
iSupplier Portal, your buying company can view order, shipment, receipt, invoice, and
payment information. They can also search for information across all suppliers, as well
as respond to supplier change requests.
When buyers select the Reset Password checkbox in the User Profile page, and save the
changes, a Reset Password notification is sent to suppliers. The notification contains a
9-2 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
link, that suppliers can use to change their password.
This section includes information for buying companies using Oracle iSupplier Portal,
and includes the following:
• Using the Oracle iSupplier Portal Home Page with the Buying Company View,
page 9-2
• Order Information, page 9-3
• Shipment Information, page 9-10
• Account Information, page 9-12
Using the Oracle iSupplier Portal Home Page with the Buying Company
View
When you access the Oracle iSupplier Portal application using the Internal User View
responsibility, the Oracle iSupplier Portal home page displays.
Oracle iSupplier Portal Home Page
This page provides the following information:
Global buttons
The following buttons display on the home page and all Oracle iSupplier Portal pages:
Home - Returns you to the main portal where you can select another responsibility or
Buying Company View 9-3
application
Logout
Preferences - Displays the Preferences page
Tabs
Oracle iSupplier Portal provides tabs for easy navigation. For example, if you want to
view of a purchase order, start by clicking the Orders tab, and then click an order type
in the task bar directly below the tabs.
Quick Links
This section displays direct links to various functionality in the Oracle iSupplier Portal
application. Click any link to go directly to the corresponding page.
Notifications
To view notifications, click the linked subject. Notifications are messages that you may
respond to. For example, a supplier may have submitted a change request and is
waiting for you to respond to (accept) it.
Orders at a Glance
To view your most recent orders, click a purchase order number.
Pending Change Requests
To respond to supplier change requests, click a purchase order number.
Order Information
For more information, please refer to the iSupplier Portal Implementation Guide.
Purchase Orders
The Purchase Orders page enables you to view and search for purchase orders.
9-4 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
Purchase Orders Page
Some examples of fields for you to enter search criteria include:
• Operating Unit
• PO Number
• Order Date
• Supplier
• Supplier Site
• Buyer
You must enter a minimum search criteria to display search results. Minimum search
criteria for purchase orders include operating unit and PO number or supplier.
Using advanced search, you can build and narrow searches with the available search
operators. Search operators enable you to specify the matching conditions for a search.
Available search operators include:
• is - Use this operator for an exact match.
After you have entered you search criteria, click Go.
Once your search criteria is displayed, you may view details of purchase orders in the
purchase orders list.
Buying Company View 9-5
Purchase Order Search Results page
If you would like to export data regarding purchase orders, click Export.
To view the details of a purchase order, click the purchase order number link.
Purchase Order Details page
The View Order Details displays the details of the purchase order. Use the Actions
menu options to view further details for the purchase order. Note also that you can
create a work confirmation for this purchase order by selecting Create Work
Confirmation from the Actions menu.
9-6 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
The Linked Attributes column in the PO Details region has a Linked Attributes
hyperlink. If you click the hyperlink, a popup displays, showing you the attributes
associated to the Job - Purchasing Category - Shopping Category combination. External
and Internal descriptors that are associated to the Job – Purchasing Category –
Shopping Category combination are displayed along with the job/item related details.
Agreements
The Supplier Agreements page enables you to view and search for supplier agreement
details.
You may search for details on supplier agreements using the following search criteria:
• Operating Unit
• PO Number
• Supplier
• Supplier Site
• Global
• Effective From Date
• Effective To Date
• Status
You must enter a minimum search criteria to display search results. Minimum search
criteria for agreements include operating unit and PO number or supplier.
You may view details of supplier agreements in the search results list.
If you would like to export data regarding supplier agreements, click Export.
Buying Company View 9-7
Supplier Agreements Page
Purchase History
The Purchase Order Revision History page enables you to view and search for
purchase history details.
You may search for details on purchase order revision histories using the following
search criteria:
• Business Unit
• PO Number
• Release Number
• Supplier
• Revision
• Supplier Site
• Document Type
• Creation Date
• Revised Date
9-8 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
You must enter a minimum search criteria to display search results. Minimum search
criteria for purchase history includes business unit and PO number or supplier.
You may view details of purchase order revision histories in the search results list.
If you would like to export data regarding purchase order revision histories, click
Export.
Purchase Order Revision History Page
Acknowledging Changes
Over the lifecycle of a purchase order, the supplier may communicate changes to values
on the purchase order. These changes could be changes to the purchase order values
themselves. If the purchase order represents a complex work project, the supplies may
need to bill you at interim points during the life of the contract. In these cases, the
supplier will create a work confirmation to notify you that a certain milestone has been
reached, or a certain completion percentage has been performed. In either case, you
need to acknowledge the change.
Route Change Requests to Requester
Buying organizations can route supplier change requests to the requester for approval.
A routing rule may be created based on any combination of these attributes: promised
date, shipment quantity, and price for non-catalog items. Using a Purchasing
responsibility, navigate to Setup > Tolerance and Routing > Supplier Change Order.
Supplier change requests that meet the predefined rule are be routed to the requester
Buying Company View 9-9
for approval. When the requester does not have the appropriate approval authorization,
the approval of the requester's approval hierarchy will be needed.
To acknowledge purchase order change requests:
The Change Requests page enables you to view purchase orders with outstanding
change requests as well as purchase orders which have been rejected by suppliers. .
To view a list of purchase orders which suppliers have rejected, select Supplier
Acknowledgement Rejections from the View menu and click Go.
To respond to supplier change requests:
1. From the iSupplier Portal Home page, click the Orders tab, and then click the
Pending Changes subtab.
2. Select Change Requests Pending Response from the View menu and click Go.
3. Select the purchase order whose changes you wish to approve/reject, and click
Respond to Changes.
Respond to Changes Page
4. On the Respond to Supplier Changes page, the values for the purchase order lines
that have been changed by the supplier are displayed in the PO Details section. For
any value that has changed, you can see the previous value and the new value,
flagged with a green star.
5. To accept all the changes, click Accept All. To reject all changes, click Reject All.
6. Otherwise, for any changes you wish to address, select Accept or Reject from the
Response menu. You can also enter text documentation in the Reason column.
When finished, click Submit.
9-10 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
7. You will receive confirmation that your response to changes has been submitted.
To acknowledge a work confirmation:
1. On the Orders tab, click the Work Confirmations subtab.
Work Confirmation Summary page
2. On the Work Confirmations page, select Work Confirmations to Approve from the
View menu and click Go.
3. Select the work confirmation you wish to view and click Respond.
4. The work confirmation may include one or more pay items for approval. Select the
appropriate action from the Response menu. You can enter a note to the supplier (if
you reject a pay item, a reason is required).
5. When finished replying to the pay items on the work confirmation, click Submit.
Shipment Information
Shipment Notices
On the View Advance Shipment Notices page, you may search for details on advance
shipment notices using the following search criteria:
• Shipment Number
• Supplier
Buying Company View 9-11
• Supplier Site
You must enter a minimum search criteria to display search results. Minimum search
criteria for shipment notices include shipment number or supplier.
You may view details of shipment notices in the search results list.
If you would like to export data regarding shipment notices, click Export.
View Advance Shipment Notices Page
Receipts
On the Receipt Transactions page, you may search for details on receipt transactions
using the following search criteria:
• Organization
• Supplier
• Supplier Site
• Receipt Number
• Receipt Date
• PO Number
• Item
• Supplier Item
9-12 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
• Receipt Location
You must enter a minimum search criteria to display search results. Minimum search
criteria for receipts include receipt or supplier.
You may view details of receipt transactions in the search results list.
If you would like to export data regarding receipt transactions, click Export.
Receipt Transactions Page
Account Information
Invoices
On the View Invoices page, you may search for details on invoices using the following
search criteria:
• Invoice
• Supplier
• Supplier Site
• Invoice Date
• PO Number
• Payment
Buying Company View 9-13
• Packing Slip
• Payment Status
• Operating Unit
• Gross Amount
• Invoice Date
• Amount Due
• Due Date
You must enter a minimum search criteria to display search results. Minimum search
criteria for invoices include invoice number or supplier.
You may view details of invoices in the search results list.
If you would like to export data regarding invoices, click Export.
View Invoices Page
Payments
On the View Payments page, you may search for payment summaries using the
following search criteria:
9-14 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
• Payment
• Supplier
• Supplier Site
• Payment Date
• PO Number
• Packing Slip
• Operating Unit
• Payment Amount
• Payment Date
You must enter a minimum search criteria to display search results. Minimum search
criteria for payments include payment number or supplier.
You may view payment details in the search results list.
If you would like to export data regarding payments, click Export.
View Payments Page
Tolerance Based Auto-Approval
Buying organizations can filter supplier change order requests and auto-approve them
based on predefined supplier change order tolerances. These tolerances can be set at
Operating Unit level.
Buying Company View 9-15
Supplier change order requests that fall within tolerance limits are automatically
approved. The buyer is notified when a change request is auto-approved but does not
need to take any action.
Use a Purchasing responsibility where you can use the Setup option. Navigate to Setup
> Tolerance and Routing > Supplier Change Order.
Note: Tolerance limits and routing rules apply to services procurement
complex purchase orders. The tolerance limits are retrieved from the
data entered for both pay items and schedules.
Supplier Change Order
Select an operating unit and click the Go button.
• In the Buyer Auto-Acceptance Tolerance table, you can find that each attribute has
both Maximum Increment and Maximum Decrement entries. By default, all are set
to 0.
• You can find the table has more attributes than the ones suppliers can change, like
Document, line, and shipment amounts. These attributes will be altered if supplier
initiates changes to shipment qty or line price. The system will check against not
only the values directly changed by the supplier, but also the values altered by the
changes.
• For some attributes, like Document Amount or Line Amount, tolerance can be set
up for both % and dollar values, If only one, say %, is set up, the system will check
against the % value. If both % and dollar value are set up, the system will take the
more restrictive attribute that is applicable to the change order.
9-16 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
Click the Save button to complete the tolerance setup.
Electronic Kanban 10-1
10
Electronic Kanban
iSupplier Portal and Electronic Kanban Integration
If your organization has installed both Electronic Kanban and iSupplier Portal, you can
integrate the two products to display an Electronic Kanban tabbed region in iSupplier
Portal. The tabbed region in iSupplier Portal displays the Summary and Actions tabs of
the Electronic Kanban Workbench. This enables your supplier to view relevant data and
change the status of their kanban cards.
Kanban Tab
If you have integrated Electronic Kanban and iSupplier Portal, you can use the Kanban
tab that displays in iSupplier Portal. This tab displays the Summary and Actions sub-
tabs of the Electronic Kanban Workbench.
Summary Sub-Tab
Use the Summary tabbed region of the Electronic Kanban Workbench to search and
view kanban cards for specific items. In the Summary region, your supplier can only
view kanban card summary and detail data relevant only to that supplier. It contains
the following regions:
• Search – This region provides advanced search and save search capabilities.
See: Searching for Kanban Cards, Oracle Electronic Kanban User's Guide
• Kanban Cards Summary – This region contains listing values such as destination,
card number, inventory health, and source data. This region also contains
configurable columns that can be detached from the workbench. You can also
export the data to a spreadsheet.
See: Viewing Kanban Card Summary Information, Oracle Electronic Kanban User's
Guide
• Kanban Cards – This region enables you to view details for the selected pull
10-2 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide
sequence. This region also contains configurable columns and can be detached from
the workbench. This region also enables you to export data to a spreadsheet and
print kanban cards.
See: Viewing Kanban Card Summary Information, Oracle Electronic Kanban User's
Guide
See: Viewing and Updating Kanban Card Details, Oracle Electronic Kanban User's
Guide
Note: Cancelled kanban cards do not display in the iSupplier Portal
Kanban tab. Use the Setup tabbed region in Electronic Kanban
Workbench to view and perform transactions for cancelled cards
See: Kanban Pull Sequence, Card, and Parameter Setup, Oracle
Electronic Kanban User's Guide
Actions Sub-Tab
In the Actions region, your supplier can only view and create actions for electronic
kanban cards relevant to them. Predefined supply statuses cannot be changed. The
supplier can change the status to In Process, or a custom status that is attached to the
predefined status of In Process.
See: Changing Status Action for Kanban Cards, Oracle Electronic Kanban User's Guide
Glossary-1
Glossary
accept
An action to indicate that you accept the previous approver's authorization.
acceptance
Supplier acknowledgement of a purchase order that indicates that the supplier agreed
to and accepted the terms of the purchase order.
account
See: accounting flexfield
account alias
An easily recognized name or label representing an account charged on miscellaneous
transactions. You may view, report, and reserve against an account alias.
Account Generator
A feature that uses Oracle Workflow to provide various Oracle Applications with the
ability to construct Accounting Flexfield combinations automatically using custom
construction criteria. You define a group of steps that determine how to fill in your
Accounting Flexfield segments. You can define additional processes and/or modify the
default process(es), depending on the application.
See also: activity (Workflow), function, item type, lookup type, node, process,
protection level, result type, transition, Workflow Engine
accounting flexfield
A feature used to define your account coding for accounting distributions. For example,
this structure can correspond to your company, budget account, and project account
numbers. For simplicity, Inventory and Oracle Manufacturing use the term account to
refer to the accounting flexfield.
accounting flexfield limit
The maximum amount you authorize an employee to approve for a particular range of
accounting flexfields.
Glossary-2
accounting period
The fiscal period a company uses to report financial results, such as a calendar month or
fiscal period.
accounts payable accrual account
The account used to accrue payable liabilities when you receive your items. Always
used for inventory and outside processing purchases. You can also accrue expenses at
the time of receipt. Used by Purchasing and Inventory, the accounts payable account
represents your non-invoiced receipts, and is included in your month end accounts
payable liability balance. This account balance is cleared when the invoice is matched in
Payables.
accrual accounting
Recognition of revenue when you sell goods and recognition of expenses when a
supplier provides services or goods. Accrual based accounting matches expenses with
associated revenues when you receive the benefit of the good and services rather than
when cash is paid or received.
acquisition cost
The cost necessary to obtain inventory and prepare it for its intended use. It includes
material costs and various costs associated with procurement and shipping of items,
such as duty, freight, drayage, customs charges, storage charges, other supplier's
charges, and so on.
activity (Workflow)
An Oracle Workflow unit of work performed during a business process.
See also: activity attribute, function activity
activity attribute
A parameter for an Oracle Workflow function activity that controls how the function
activity operates. You define an activity attribute by displaying the activity's Attributes
properties page in the Activities window of Oracle Workflow Builder. You assign a
value to an activity attribute by displaying the activity node's Attribute Values
properties page in the Process window.
alert
A specific condition defined in Oracle Alert that checks your database and performs
actions based on the information it finds there.
alert action
In Oracle Quality, an electronic mail message, operating system script, SQL script, or
concurrent program request that is invoked when specified action rule conditions are
met.
Glossary-3
alphanumeric number type
An option for numbering documents, employees, and suppliers where assigned
numbers can contain letters as well as numbers.
amount based order
An order you place, receive, and pay based solely on the amount of service you
purchase.
approve
An action you take to indicate that you consider the contents of the purchasing
document to be correct. If the document passes the submission tests and you have
sufficient authority, Purchasing approves the document.
approved
A purchase order or requisition status that indicates a user with appropriate
authorization approved the purchase or requisition. Purchasing verifies that the
purchase order or requisition is complete during the approval process.
archiving
The process of recording all historical versions of approved purchase orders.
Purchasing automatically archives a purchase order when you approve it for the first
time. Purchasing subsequently archives your purchase orders during the approval
process if you have increased the revision number since the last time you approved the
purchase order.
ASC X12
Accredited Standards Committee X12 group. This group is accredited by ANSI and
maintains and develops the EDI standards for the United States and Canada.
ASCII
American Standard Code for Information Interchange. A standard file format used for
transmission and storage. ASCII is a seven-bit code with an eighth bit used for parity.
ASL
Approved Suppliers List. A list where you can set up your Approved Suppliers, Sites,
and Items.
ASN
(Advanced Shipping Notice)
asset item
Anything you make, purchase, or sell including components, subassemblies, finished
Glossary-4
products, or supplies which carries a cost and is valued in your asset subinventories.
asset subinventory
Subdivision of an organization, representing either a physical area or a logical grouping
of items, such as a storeroom where quantity balances are maintained for all items and
values are maintained for asset items.
assigned units
The number of resource units assigned to work at an operation in a routing. For
example, if you have 10 units of machine resource available at a department, you can
assign up to 10 of these units to an operation in a routing. The more units you assign,
the less elapsed time Work in Process schedules for the operation.
assignment hierarchy
You can assign sourcing rules and bills of distribution to a single item in an inventory
organization, all items in an inventory organization, categories of items in an inventory
organization, a site, and an organization. These assignments have an order of
precedence relative to one another.
assignment set
A group of sourcing rules and/or bills of distribution and a description of the items
and/or organizations whose replenishment they control.
attribute
See: activity attribute, item type attribute
authorization check
A set of tests on a purchasing document to determine if the document approver has
sufficient authority to perform the approval action.
automatic numbering
A numbering option Purchasing uses to assign numbers to your documents, employees,
or suppliers automatically.
automatic sourcing
A Purchasing feature which allows you to specify for predefined items a list of
approved suppliers and to associate source documents for these suppliers. When you
create a requisition or purchase order line for the item, Purchasing automatically
provides appropriate pricing for the specified quantity based on the top-ranked open
source document for the supplier with the highest percentage allocation.
autoschedule
You can set up a supplier/site/item to have the schedules built by the concurrent
Glossary-5
program autoschedule. The schedules are not built by the Scheduler's Workbench.
balancing entity
An organization for which you prepare a balance sheet, represented as a balancing
segment value in your accounting flexfield. This is the equivalent of a fund in
government organizations. Examples include companies, strategic business units, and
divisions.
balancing segment
An Accounting Flexfield segment you define so that Oracle General Ledger
automatically balances all journal entries for each value of this segment. For example, if
your company segment is a balancing segment, General Ledger ensures that within
every journal entry, the total debits to company 01 equal the total credits to company
01.
base unit
The unit of measure to which you convert all units of measure within one class. The
base unit is the smallest or most commonly used unit of measure in the class. For
example, millimeter is the base unit in the Length class. You define your base unit of
measure when you create your unit class.
bill of distribution
Specifies a mutilevel replenishment network of warehouses, distribution centers, and
manufacturing centers (plants).
bill-to address
The customer's billing address. It is also known as invoice-to address.
blanket purchase agreement
A type of purchase order you issue before you request actual delivery of goods or
services. You normally create a blanket purchase agreement to document a long-term
supplier agreement. A blanket purchase agreement may contain an effective date and
an expiration date, a committed amount, or quantity. You use a blanket purchase
agreement as a tool for specifying agreed prices and delivery dates for goods and
services before ordering them.
blanket purchase order
See: blanket purchase agreement
blanket release
An actual order of goods and services against a blanket purchase agreement. The
blanket purchase agreement determines the characteristics and prices of the items. The
blanket release specifies actual quantities and dates ordered for the items. You identify
Glossary-6
a blanket release by the combination of the blanket purchase agreement number and the
release number.
blind receiving
A site option that requires your receiving staff to count all items on a receipt line. Blind
receiving prevents display of expected receipt quantities in receiving windows.
budget organization
An entity, such as a department, division, or activity responsible for entering and
maintaining budget data. You define budget organizations for your agency, then assign
appropriate accounting flexfields to each budget organization.
bucket patterns
Bucket patterns can be defined to include daily, weekly, monthly, or quarterly buckets.
Bucket patterns are used to bucket quantity requirements on Planning or Shipping
Schedules.
budgetary account
An account segment value (such as 6110) that is assigned one of the two budgetary
account types. You use budgetary accounts to record the movement of funds through
the budget process from appropriation to expended appropriation.
business document
A document used for conducting business between two trading partners - a purchase
order or invoice, for example.
business group
An organization which represents the consolidated enterprise, a major division, or an
operation company. This entity partitions Human Resources information.
buyer
Person responsible for placing item resupply orders with suppliers and negotiating
supplier contracts.
cancel
You can cancel a purchase order after approving it. When you cancel a purchase order,
you prevent anyone from adding new lines to the purchase order or receiving
additional goods. Purchasing still allows billing for goods you received before
cancelling the purchase order. Purchasing releases any unfilled requisition lines for
reassignment to another purchase order.
Glossary-7
candidate
A record Purchasing selects to purge based on the last activity date you specify.
Purchasing selects only records that you have not updated since the last activity date.
Purchasing does not purge a candidate until you confirm it.
carrier
See: freight carrier
category
Code used to group items with similar characteristics, such as plastics, metals, or glass
items.
category set
A feature in Inventory where users may define their own group of categories. Typical
category sets include purchasing, materials, costing, and planning.
check funds
To certify whether you have funds available to complete your requisition or purchase
order. The difference between the amount you are authorized to spend and the amount
of your expenditures plus encumbrances equals your funds available. You can certify
funds available at any time when you enter a requisition or a purchase order. You can
track funds availability at different authority levels on-line.
close
A purchase order is automatically closed once it is received (if you require a receipt)
and is billed for all purchase order shipments. Since you do not require or expect any
further activity, Purchasing closes the purchase order. You can also manually close the
purchase order early if you do not expect further activity. Adding lines to it or receiving
against it, reopens the purchase order. Purchasing does not consider closed purchase
orders for accruals.
close for invoicing
A purchase order control that you can assign manually or that Purchasing can assign
automatically when the amount invoiced reaches a defined percentage of the order
quantity.
close for receiving
A purchase order control you can assign manually or that Purchasing can assign
automatically when the amount received reaches a defined percentage of the order
quantity.
column headings
Descriptions of the contents of each column in the report.
Glossary-8
combination of segment values
A combination of segment values uniquely describes the information stored in a field
made up of segments. A different combination of segment values results when you
change the value of one or more segments. When you alter the combination of segment
values, you alter the description of the information stored in the field.
commitment
A contractual guarantee with a customer for future purchases, usually with deposits or
prepayments. You can then create invoices against the commitment to absorb the
deposit or prepayment. Receivables automatically records all necessary accounting
entries for your commitments. Oracle Order Entry allows you to enter order lines
against commitments.
A journal entry you make to record an anticipated expenditure as indicated by
approval of a requisition. Also known as pre-commitment, pre-encumbrance or pre-
lien.
committed amount
The amount you agree to spend with a supplier.
concurrent manager
Components of your applications concurrent processing facility that monitor and run
time-consuming tasks for you without tying up your terminal. Whenever you submit a
request, such as running a report, a concurrent manager does the work for you, letting
you perform many tasks simultaneously.
concurrent process
A task in the process of completing. Each time you submit a task, you create a new
concurrent process. A concurrent process runs simultaneously with other concurrent
processes (and other activities on your computer) to help you complete multiple tasks at
once with no interruptions to your terminal.
concurrent queue
A list of concurrent requests awaiting completion by a concurrent manager. Each
concurrent manager has a queue of requests waiting in line. If your system
administrator sets up simultaneous queuing, your request can wait to run in more than
one queue.
concurrent request
A request to complete a task for you. You issue a request whenever you submit a task,
such as running a report. Once you submit a task, the concurrent manager
automatically takes over for you, completing your request without further involvement
from you, or interruption to your work. Concurrent managers process your request
Glossary-9
according to when you submit the request and the priority you assign to your request.
If you do not assign a priority to your request, your application prioritizes the request
for you.
configuration
A product a customer orders by choosing a base model and a list of options. It can be
shipped as individual pieces as a set (kit) or as an assembly (configuration item).
consigned location
The physical location of inventories which resides on the property of buyers and sellers
through a consigned agreement with the manufacturer.
context element
A collection element associated with a quality collection transaction. Values for context
elements are automatically transferred to Oracle Quality as their parent collection
transaction are entered.
context field prompt
A question or prompt to which a user enters a response, called a context field value.
When Oracle Applications displays a descriptive flexfield pop-up window, it displays
your context field prompt after it displays any global segments you have defined. Each
descriptive flexfield can have up to one context prompt.
context field value
A response to your context field prompt. Your response is composed of a series of
characters and a description. The response and description together provide a unique
value for your context prompt, such as 1500, Journal Batch ID, or 2000, Budget Formula
Batch ID. The context field value determines which additional descriptive flexfield
segments appear.
context segment value
A response to your context-sensitive segment. The response is composed of a series of
characters and a description. The response and description together provide a unique
value for your context-sensitive segment, such as Redwood Shores, Oracle
Headquarters, or Minneapolis, Merrill Aviation's Hub.
context-sensitive segment
A descriptive flexfield segment that appears in a second pop-up window when you
enter a response to your context field prompt. For each context response, you can define
multiple context segments, and you control the sequence of the context segments in the
second pop-up window. Each context-sensitive segment typically prompts you for one
item of information related to your context response.
Glossary-10
contract
An agreement between you and a supplier for unspecified goods or services. This
agreement may include terms and conditions, committed amount, and an effective and
expiration date. You reference contract purchase agreements directly on standard
purchase order lines. Purchasing monitors the amount you have spent against contract
purchase agreements.
conversion
Converts foreign currency transactions to your functional currency.
See also: foreign currency conversion
conversion formula
The number that, when multiplied by the quantity of one unit of the source base unit,
gives you the quantity of one unit of the destination base units in the interclass
conversion. The number is also the conversion between units for standard unit
conversion or item-specific conversion.
copy
An AutoCreate option that lets a buyer designate a specific requisition line as the source
of information that Purchasing copies to the purchase order or RFQ line.
corporate exchange rate
An exchange rate you can optionally use to perform foreign currency conversion. The
corporate exchange rate is usually a standard market rate determined by senior
financial management for use throughout the organization.
cost element
A classification for the cost of an item. Oracle Manufacturing supports five cost
elements: material, material overhead, resource, outside processing, and overhead.
cost variance
The difference between the actual and expected cost. Oracle Manufacturing and
Payables supports the following cost variances: invoice price, resource rate, and
standard cost variances.
credit memo
A document that partially or fully reverses an original invoice.
CUM
Total received for a supplier site, item, and organization within a CUM Period.
Glossary-11
CUM Period
The Period you are going to use to track the quantity received to date for a particular
organization. In the Automotive industry this may be a model year.
current on-hand quantity
Total quantity of the item on-hand before a transaction is processed.
default value
Information Oracle Applications automatically enters depending on other information
you enter. Also referred to as defaults or a defaulted value.
deliver-to location
A location where you deliver goods previously received from a supplier to individual
requestors.
delivery
Internal delivery of items to requestors within your organization.
demand
Projected inventory issue transactions against an item. For Order Management, it is an
action you take to communicate current or future product needs to manufacturing.
depot repair
A process used to track items returned by a customer for repair or replacement.
descriptive flexfield
An Oracle Applications feature used to collect information unique to your business.
You determine the additional information you need and descriptive flexfield lets you
customize your application to your needs without additional programming.
descriptor
Descriptors are the attributes of an item or service that help describe it to the requester.
Base descriptors apply to all items or services in the catalog. Some base descriptors,
such as Description, are required. Local descriptors apply only to items within a specific
shopping category and could also be thought of as category attributes.
destination base unit
The unit of measure to which you are converting when you define interclass
conversions. Your destination base unit is the base unit of a unit class.
Glossary-12
destination organization
An inventory organization that receives item shipments from a given organization.
detailed message action
A message representing one exception. Oracle Alert inserts the exception values into the
text of the message.
direct receipt
The receipt of an item directly to its final destination (either directly to the person who
requested the item or directly to the final inventory location). It differs from a standard
receipt in that it is received into a receiving location and delivered in one transaction,
rather than received and delivered in two separate transactions.
discrete manufacturing
A manufacturing environment where you build assemblies in discrete jobs or batches.
Different from a repetitive production environment where you build assemblies on
production or assembly lines at a daily rate.
distribution account
An account where you record material, material overhead, resource, outside processing,
and overhead charges incurred by a discrete job or repetitive assembly. In a standard
costing system, this is where you record your standard costs.
distribution list
A predefined list of electronic mail IDs that you can use rather than entering individual
mail IDs (To, Cc, and Bcc) when defining mail message alert actions in Oracle Quality.
Distribution Resource Planning (DRP)
Application of replenishmnent inventory calculations to assist in planning of key
resources contained in a distribution system, such as sourcing and transport. DRP is an
extension of distribution requirements planning, which applies MRP logic to inventory
replenishment at branch warehouses.
document reference
A message that precisely identifies the document or part of document you want to
describe using standard or one-time notes.
drop shipment
A method of fulfilling sales orders by selling products without handling, stocking, or
delivering them. The selling company buys a product from a supplier and has the
supplier ship the product directly to customers.
Glossary-13
due date
The date when scheduled receipts are currently expected to be received into inventory
and become available for use.
duplicate
An exception Oracle Alert located for the same action set during a previous alert check.
Oracle Alert does not consider a detail action to contain a duplicate exception until
Oracle Alert sends the final action level to a specific action set, and then locates the
same exception for the same action set again. For example, if on Monday Oracle Alert
notifies a buyer that a supplier shipment is overdue, then on Tuesday Oracle Alert finds
the shipment is still overdue, you can choose whether Oracle Alert should re-notify the
buyer or suppress the message.
dynamic distribution
You can use output variables to represent electronic mail IDs. When you define mail
message alert actions in Oracle Quality, the message is sent to all defined mail IDs.
dynamic insertion
Automatically creates new accounting flexfield combinations as you enter them. If you
do not use dynamic insertion, you create new accounting flexfield combinations with a
separate window.
EDI
See: Electronic Data Interchange (EDI)
EDIFACT
Electronic Data Interchange for Administration, Commerce, and Trade is the current
acronym for standards developed within Working Party 4. See also WP4
electronic commerce
Conducting business via an electronic medium. This includes methods of exchanging
business information electronically, such as Electronic Data Interchange (EDI), FAX,
email, and eforms.
Electronic Data Interchange (EDI)
Exchanging business documents electronically between trading partners. EDI
subscribes to standard formats for conducting these electronic transactions as stated by
various standards.
electronic funds transfer
A method of payment in which your bank transfers funds electronically from your bank
account into another bank account. In Oracle Payables, funds are transferred from your
Glossary-14
account into that of a supplier. This information is sent to the bank in a file.
employee supervisor hierarchy
An approval routing structure based on employee/supervisor relationships. See
position hierarchy
encumbrance
See: purchase order encumbrance.
encumbrance type
An encumbrance category that allows you to track your expenditures according to your
purchase approval process and better control your planned expenditures. You can set
up separate encumbrance types for each stage in your purchasing cycle to track your
spending at each level. Examples of encumbrance types are commitments (requisition
encumbrances) and obligations (purchase order encumbrances).
event alert
An alert that runs when a specific event occurs that you define. For example, you can
define an event alert to immediately send a message to the buyer if an item is rejected
on inspection.
exception
An occurrence of the specified condition found during an alert check. For example, an
alert testing for invoices on hold may find five invoices on hold, or none. Each invoice
on hold is an exception.
exception message
A message received indicating a situation that meets your predefined exception set for
an item, such as Items that are overcommitted, Items with excess inventory, and Orders to be
rescheduled out.
exception reporting
An integrated system of alerts and action sets that focuses attention on time-sensitive or
critical information, shortens your reaction time, and provides faster exception
distribution. Exception reporting communicates information by either electronic mail
messages or paper reports.
expected receipts report
A printed report of all expected receipts for a time period and location you specify.
expense item
Anything you make, purchase, or sell including components, subassemblies, finished
products, or supplies and that does not carry a cost. Also known as a non-asset item.
Glossary-15
expense subinventory
Subdivision of an organization, representing either a physical area or a logical grouping
of items, such as a storeroom where no value exists but the quantities may be tracked.
exchange rate
A rate that represents the amount of one currency you can exchange for another at some
point in time. Oracle Applications use the daily, periodic, and historical exchange rates
you maintain to perform foreign currency conversion, re-evaluation, and translation.
You can enter and maintain daily exchange rates for Oracle Purchasing to use to
perform foreign currency conversion. Oracle Purchasing multiplies the exchange rate
times the foreign currency to calculate functional currency.
exchange rate type
A specification of the source of an exchange rate. For example, a user exchange rate or a
corporate exchange rate.
See also: corporate exchange rate, spot exchange rate
explode
An AutoCreate option that lets a buyer split a single requisition line for an item into one
or more requisition lines for different items. Use this option to expand a requisition line
for an item that your company purchases in component parts.
express delivery
An option that lets you deliver the entire quantity of a receipt without entering
quantities for each shipment or distribution.
express receipt
A site option that lets you receive an entire purchase order or blanket purchase
agreement release with one keystroke.
express requisitions
To create requisitions quickly from predefined requisition templates. You only need to
provide an accounting flexfield and quantities to create a requisition for commonly
purchased items.
FIFO (first-in-first-out) costing method
A cost flow methodused for inventory valuation. Inventory balances and values are
updated perpetually after each transaction is sequentially costed. It assumes that the
earliest inventory units received or produced are the first units used or shipped. The
ending inventory therefore consists of the most recently acquired goods. FIFO cost flow
does not have to match the physical flow of inventory.
Glossary-16
final close
A purchase order control you can assign to prevent modifications to or actions against
completed documents, lines, and shipments by final closing them. Final-closed
documents are not accessible in the corresponding entry windows, and you cannot
perform the following actions against final-closed entities: receive, transfer, inspect,
deliver, correct receipt quantities, invoice, return to supplier, or return to receiving.
firm
A purchase order control. When you firm an order, Master Scheduling/MRP uses the
firm date to create a time fence within which it does not suggest new planned purchase
orders, cancellations, or reschedule-in actions. It continues to suggest reschedule-out
actions for orders within the time fence. If several shipments with different promised or
need-by dates reference the same item, Master Scheduling/MRP sets the time fence at
the latest of all scheduled dates.
flexfield
A field made up of segments. Each segment has a name you assign and a set of valid
values.
See also: descriptive flexfield, key flexfield
flexfield segment
One of the parts of your key flexfield, separated from the other parts by a symbol you
choose (such as -, /, or ). Each segment typically represents a cost center, company,
item family, or color code.
FOB
See: freight on board.
foreign currency
A currency you define for your ledger for recording and conducting accounting
transactions in a currency other than your functional currency. When you enter and pay
an invoice in a foreign currency, Oracle Payables automatically converts the foreign
currency into your functional currency based on the exchange rate you define.
See also: exchange rate, functional currency
forward
An action you take to send a document to another employee without attempting to
approve it yourself.
four-way matching
Purchasing performs four-way matching to verify that purchase order, receipt,
inspection and invoice quantities match within tolerance.
Glossary-17
freight on board
(FOB) The point or location where the ownership title of goods is transferred from the
seller to the buyer.
freeze
You can freeze a purchase order after printing. By freezing a purchase order, you
prevent anyone from adding new lines or changing the purchase order. You can
continue to receive goods and be billed on already existing purchase order lines. The
ability to continue receiving against the purchase order is the difference between
freezing and cancelling.
freight carrier
A commercial company used to send item shipments from one address to another.
function
A PL/SQL stored procedure referenced by an Oracle Workflow function activity that
can enforce business rules, perform automated tasks within an application, or retrieve
application information. The stored procedure accepts standard arguments and returns
a completion result. See also
function activity
An automated Oracle Workflow unit of work that is defined by a PL/SQL stored
procedure.
See also: function
functional currency
Currency you use to record transactions and maintain your accounting information.
The functional currency is generally the currency used to perform most of your
company's business transactions. You determine the functional currency for the ledger
you use in your organization. Also called base currency.
funds available
The difference between your budget, less encumbrances of all types and actual
expenditures.
funds checking
The process of certifying funds available. When you check funds, the transaction
amount is compared with your funds available, and you are notified whether funds are
available for your transaction. Checking funds does not reserve funds for your
transaction.
You can check funds when you enter a requisition, purchase order, or invoice.
Glossary-18
funds reservation
The creation of requisition, purchase order, or invoice encumbrance journal entries.
Purchasing immediately updates your funds available balances and creates an
encumbrance journal entry in which you can post in your general ledger.
This is also the process of reserving funds available. You can reserve funds when you
enter actual, budget, or encumbrance journals. When you reserve funds, the amount of
your transaction is compared with your funds available and you are notified on-line
whether funds are available.
general ledger transfer
The process of creating a postable batch for the general ledger from summarized
activity for a given period. Using Journal Import in General Ledger, you can create a
postable batch in your general ledger. After running Journal Import, you can post your
journal using the General Ledger posting process.
inspection
A procedure you perform to ensure that items received conform to your quality
standards. You can use inspections to prevent payment for goods and services that fail
to meet your quality standards.
inter-organization transfer
Transfer of items from one inventory organization to another You can have freight
charges and transfer credits associated with inter-organization transfer. You can choose
to ship items directly or have them go through intransit inventory.
interclass conversion
The conversion formula you define between base units from the different unit classes.
intercompany invoice
An automatically generated statement that eliminates intercompany profit. This
transaction may occur between organizations in the same or different legal entities.
internal requisition
See: internal sales order, purchase requisition.
internal sales order
A request within your company for goods or services. An internal sales order originates
from an employee or from another process as a requisition, such as inventory or
manufacturing, and becomes an internal sales order when the information is transferred
from Purchasing to Order Management. Also known asinternal requisition or
purchase requisition.
Glossary-19
intransit inventory
Items being shipped from one inventory organization to another. While items are
intransit you can view and update arrival date, freight charges, and so on.
inventory item
Items you stock in inventory. You control inventory for inventory items by quantity and
value. Typically, the inventory item remains an asset until you consume it. You
recognize the cost of an inventory item as an expense when you consume it or sell it.
You generally value the inventory for an item by multiplying the item standard cost by
the quantity on hand.
inventory organization
An organization that tracks inventory transactions and balances, and/or that
manufactures or distributes products.
inventory transaction
A record of material movement. The basic information for a transaction includes the
item number, the quantity moved, the transaction amount, the accounting flexfields,
and the date. See material transaction
invoice
A summarized list of charges, including payment terms, invoice item information, and
other information that is sent to a customer by a supplier for payment.
invoice price variance
The difference between the purchase order price for an item and the actual invoice price
multiplied by the quantity invoiced. Payables records this variance after matching the
invoice to the purchase order. Typically, the price variance is small since the price the
supplier charges you for an item should be the one you negotiated on your purchase
order.
item
Anything you make, purchase, or sell, including components, subassemblies, finished
products, or supplies. Oracle Manufacturing also uses items to represent planning items
that you can forecast, standard lines that you can include on invoices, and option
classes you can use to group options in model and option class bills.
item attributes
Specific characteristics of an item, such as order cost, item status, revision control,
COGS account, etc.
item category
See: category.
Glossary-20
item-specific conversion
The conversion formula you define between the primary unit of measure for an item
and another unit of measure from the same unit class. If you define a conversion rate for
a specific item, Purchasing uses the item-specific conversion rate instead of the standard
conversion rate for converting between units for that item.
item type
A term used by Oracle Workflow to refer to a grouping of all items of a particular
category that share the same set of item attributes, used as a high level grouping for
processes. For example, each Account Generator item type (e.g. FA Account Generator)
contains a group of processes for determining how an Accounting Flexfield code
combination is created. See also item type attribute.
item type attribute
A feature of a particular Oracle Workflow item type, also known as an item attribute.
An item type attribute is defined as a variable whose value can be looked up and set by
the application that maintains the item. An item type attribute and its value is available
to all activities in a process.
Item Validation Organization
The inventory organization that contains your master list of items. You define it in the
Financials Options window. See also organization.
job
A category of personnel in your organization. Examples of a typical job include Vice
President, Buyer, and Manager. See also position.
key flexfield
A set of segments. You choose the number of segments you want, the length of each
segment, the order of your segments and more. You can then define the list of
acceptable values for each segment.
key flexfield segment
One of up to 30 different sections of your key flexfield. You separate segments from
each other by a symbol you choose (such as -, / or .). Each segment can be up to 25
characters long. Each key flexfield segment typically captures one element of your
business or operations structure, such as company, division, region, or product for the
accounting flexfield and item, version number, or color code for the item flexfield.
key flexfield segment value
A series of characters and a description that provide a unique value for this element,
such as 0100, Eastern region, V20, or Version 2.0.
Glossary-21
LIFO (last-in-first-out) costing method
A cost flow methodused for inventory valuation. Inventory balances and values are
updated perpetually after each transaction is sequentially costed. It assumes that the
most recent inventory units received or produced are the first units used or shipped.
The ending inventory consists of old goods acquired in the earliest purchases or
completions.
legal entity
An organization that represents a legal company for which you prepare fiscal or tax
reports. You assign tax identifiers and other relevant information to this entity.
license plate number (LPN)
LPNs are unique identifiers used to store and transact inventory throughout the supply
chain. They store a container's contents, including item, revision, lot and serial numbers,
and quantity.
line type
Determines whether a purchasing document line is for goods, services, or any other
type that you define. The line type also determines whether the document line is based
on price and quantity or on amount.
location
A shorthand name for an address. Location appears in address lists of values to let you
select the correct address based on an intuitive name. For example, you may want to
give the location name of 'Receiving Dock' to the Ship To business purpose of 100 Main
Street.
locator
Physical area within a subinventory where you store material, such as a row, aisle, bin,
or shelf.
lockbox
A service commercial banks offer corporate customers to enable them to outsource their
accounts receivable payment processing. Lockbox processors set up special postal codes
to receive payments, deposit funds and provide electronic account receivable input to
corporate customers. A lockbox operation can process millions of transactions a month.
logical organization
A business unit that tracks items for accounting purposes but does not physically exist.
See organization.
Glossary-22
lookup code
The internal name of a value defined in an Oracle Workflow lookup type. See also
lookup type.
lookup type
An Oracle Workflow predefined list of values. Each value in a lookup type has an
internal and a display name. See alsolookup code.
long notes
A Purchasing feature that lets you provide up to 64K characters per note. You can add
long notes to your headers and lines. Purchasing automatically wraps the note while
you are typing. You can also format the note by providing extra lines or indenting parts
of your message. You can provide as many long notes as you want wherever the long
notes capability is available.
lot
A specific batch of an item identified by a number.
manual numbering
A numbering option to let someone assign numbers manually to documents,
employees, and suppliers.
Make or Buy
An item attribute the Planner Workbench uses to default an appropriate value for
implementation type when implementing planned orders for the item. A value Make
means the item is usually manufactured. The Planner Workbench defaults the
implementation type for planned orders for the item to Discrete job. The planning
process passes demand down from manufactured items to lower level components. A
value of Buy means the item is usually purchased. The Planner Workbench defaults the
implementation type for planned orders for the item to Purchase requisition. The
planning process does not pass demand down from purchased items to lower level
components.
material release
For a Planning Schedule, indicates that the schedule forecast requirements include
unimplemented Planned Orders and Approved Requisitions. The schedule released
quantities include Approved Releases.
material requirements planning (MRP)
A process that utilizes bill of material information, a master schedule, and current
inventory information to calculate net requirements for materials.
Glossary-23
message
The text or data Oracle Alert sends when it finds an exception while checking an alert.
min-max planning
An inventory planning method used to determine when and how much to order based
on a fixed user-entered minimum and maximum inventory levels.
modal window
Certain actions that you perform may cause a modal window to display. A modal
window requires you to act on its contents before you can continue, usually by
choosing OK or Cancel.
move transaction
A transaction to move assemblies from operation to operation or within an operation on
a discrete job or repetitive schedule.
MPS Plan
A set of planned orders and suggestions to release or reschedule existing schedule
receipts for material to satisfy a given master schedule for MPS-planned items or MRP-
planned items that have an MPS-planned component. Stated in discrete quantities and
order dates.
MRP plan
A set of planned orders and suggestions to release or reschedule existing schedule
receipts for material to satisfy a given master schedule for dependent demand items.
Stated in discrete quantities and order dates.
multi-source
An AutoCreate option that lets a buyer distribute the quantity of a single requisition
line to several suppliers whenever the buyer wants to purchase the requisition line item
from more than one supplier.
multiple sets of books
A General Ledger concept for having separate entities for which chart of accounts,
calendar, or functional currency differs.
node
An instance of an activity in an Oracle Workflow process diagram as shown in the
Process window of Oracle Workflow Builder. See also process.
Glossary-24
note name
A name that uniquely identifies a standard or one-time note. You use note names to
locate a note you want to use or copy on a document.
numeric number type
An option for numbering documents, employees, and suppliers where assigned
numbers contain only numbers.
offsetting account
The source or opposite side of an accounting entry.
omit
An AutoCreate option that lets a buyer prevent Purchasing from including certain
displayed requisition lines when creating a purchase order or RFQ. If you omit a
requisition line, Purchasing returns it to the available pool of requisition lines.
on-hand quantity
The physical quantity of an item existing in inventory.
one-time item
An item you want to order but do not want to maintain in the Items window. You
define a one-time item when you create a requisition or purchase order. You can report
or query on a one-time item by specifying the corresponding item class.
one-time note
A unique message you can attack to an order, return, order line, or return line to convey
important information.
open
An open purchase order exists if the purchase order has any lines that have not been
fully invoiced and are not cancelled. If you require receipt for items you order, an open
purchase order exists if any lines have not been fully received and fully invoiced and
are not cancelled.
open interface
A Manufacturing function that lets you import or export data from other systems
through an open interface. An example is a bar code reader device accumulating data
you later import into your manufacturing system for further processing.
operating unit
An organization that partitions data for subledger products (AP, AR, PO, OE). It is
Glossary-25
roughly equivalent to a single pre-Multi-Org installation.
order cycle
A sequence of actions you or Oracle Management perform on an order to complete the
order. An order cycle lets you define the activity an order follows from initial entry
through closing. Order cycles are assigned to order types.
organization
A business unit such as a plant, warehouse, division, department, and so on.
outside operation
An operation that contains outside resources and possibly internal resources as well.
outside processing
Performing work on a discrete job or repetitive schedule using resources provided by a
supplier.
outside processing operation
Any operation that has an outside processing resource. See outside resource
outside processing item
An item you include on a purchase order line to purchase supplier services as part of
your assembly build process. This item can be the assembly itself or a non-stocked item
which represents the service performed on the assembly.
outside resource
A resource provided by a supplier that you include in your routings, such as supplier
sourced labor or services. This includes both PO move and PO receipt resources.
parameter
A variable used to restrict information in a report, or determine the form of a report. For
example, you may want to limit your report to the current month, or display
information by supplier number instead of supplier name.
payment batch
A group of invoices selected for automatic payment processing via Oracle Payables
AutoSelect function.
payment terms
The due date and discount date for payment of an invoice. For example, the payment
term '2% 10, Net 30' lets a customer take a two percent discount if payment is received
within 10 days, with the balance due within 30 days of the invoice date.
Glossary-26
pending
A status where a process or transaction is waiting to be completed.
period
See: accounting period.
period expense
An expense you record in the period it occurs. An expense is typically a debit.
periodic alert
An alert that checks your database for the presence of a specific condition according to a
schedule you define.
planned purchase order
A type of purchase order you issue before you order actual delivery of goods and
services for specific dates and locations. You normally enter a planned purchase order
to specify items you want to order and when you want delivery of the items. You later
enter a shipment release against the planned purchase order when you actually want to
order the items.
PO
See: purchase order
PO move resource
An outside resource that is automatically charged upon receipt of a purchase order. PO
move resources also automatically initiate shop floor move transactions upon receipt.
PO receipt resource
An outside resource that is automatically charged upon receipt of a purchase order.
position
A specific function within a job category. Examples of typical positions associated with
the Vice President job include: Vice President of Manufacturing, Vice President of
Engineering, and Vice President of Sales. See job.
position hierarchy
A structure of positions used to define management line reporting and control access
to employee information.
pre-approved
A document that has been approved by someone with final approval authority, but
then forwarded to yet another approver for additional approval; or a document that has
Glossary-27
been authorized for approval but for which funds have not yet been reserved (if your
organization uses encumbrance). A document with a status of Pre-Approved does not
show up as supply until its status changes to Approved.
price break line
Supplier pricing information for an item or purchasing category on a quotation. The
price you enter on a price break line depends on the quantity you order from your
supplier. Usually, suppliers provide you with price break line structures to indicate the
price you would pay for an item depending on the quantity you order. Generally, the
more you order, the less expensive your unit price. Also, depending on the quantity
you order, a supplier may provide you with different purchase conditions, such as
advantageous payment or freight terms when you buy in large quantities.
process
A set of Oracle Workflow activities that need to be performed to accomplish a business
goal. See also Account Generator, process activity, process definition.
process activity
An Oracle Workflow process modelled as an activity so that it can be referenced by
other processes; also known as a subprocess. See also .
processing status
The processing state of a row (record) in an open interface table. Common statuses
include, but are not restricted to, Pending, Running, and Error.
profile option
A set of changeable options that affect the way your applications run. In general, profile
options can be set at one or more of the following levels: site, application, responsibility,
and user.
project
A unit of work broken down into one or more tasks, for which you specify revenue and
billing methods, invoice formats, a managing organization, and project manager and
bill rates schedules. You can charge costs to a project, as well as generate and maintain
revenue, invoice, unbilled receivable and unearned revenue information for a project.
Project Manufacturing
A type of manufacturing environment where production requirements are driven by
large projects. You can plan, schedule, process, and cost against a specific project or a
group of projects. If Oracle Project Manufacturing is installed and the Project References
Enabled and Project Control Level parameters are set in the Organization Parameters
window in Oracle Inventory, you can assign project and, if required, task references to
sales orders, planned orders, jobs, requisitions, purchase orders, and other entities
Glossary-28
within Oracle Manufacturing. If the Project Cost Collection Enabled parameter is also
set, you can collect and transfer manufacturing cost to Oracle Projects.
project purchase order
A purchase order with a project and task reference.
project requisition
A requisition with a project and task reference.
promise date
The date on which your supplier agrees to ship the products to you, or the date that
you will receive the products.
proprietary accounty
An account segment value (such as 3500) that is assigned one of the five proprietary
account types.
protection level
In Oracle Workflow, a numeric value ranging from 0 to 1000 that represents who the
data is protected from for modification. When workflow data is defined, it can either be
set to customizable (1000), meaning anyone can modify it, or it can be assigned a
protection level that is equal to the access level of the user defining the data. In the latter
case, only users operating at an access level equal to or lower than the data's protection
level can modify the data. See also Account Generator.
purchase order
A type of purchase order you issue when you request delivery of goods or services for
specific dates and locations. You can order multiple items for each planned or standard
purchase order. Each purchase order line can have multiple shipments and you can
distribute each shipment across multiple accounts. See standard purchase orderand
planned purchase order.
purchase order encumbrance
A transaction representing a legally binding purchase. Purchasing subtracts purchase
order encumbrances from funds available when you approve a purchase order. If you
cancel a purchase order, Purchasing creates appropriate reversing entries in your
general ledger. Purchase order encumbrance is also known as obligation, encumbrance,
or lien.
purchase order receipt
See: receipt.
Glossary-29
purchase order revision
A number that distinguishes printed purchase order versions. Purchasing automatically
sets the revision to 0 when you initially create a purchase order. Each purchase order
you print displays the current revision number.
purchase order shipment
A schedule for each purchase order line composed of the quantity you want to ship to
each location. You can also provide delivery dates for each shipment line. You can
create an unlimited number of shipments for each purchase order line. You receive
goods and services against each shipment line.
purchase price variance
The variance that you record at the time you receive an item in inventory or supplier
services into work in process. This variance is the difference between the standard unit
cost for the item or service and the purchase unit price multiplied by the quantity
received. You record purchase price variances in a purchase price variance account for
your organization. Since standard cost is a planned cost, you may incur variances
between the standard cost and the purchase order price.
purchase requisition
An internal request for goods or services. A requisition can originate from an employee
or from another process, such as inventory or manufacturing. Each requisition can
include many lines, generally with a distinct item on each requisition line. Each
requisition line includes at least a description of the item, the unit of measure, the
quantity needed, the price per item, and the Accounting Flexfield you are charging for
the item. See also internal sales order.
purchased item
An item that you buy and receive. If an item is also an inventory item, you may also be
able to stock it. See also inventory item.
purchasing documents
Any document you use in the purchasing life cycle, including requisitions, RFQs,
quotations, purchase orders, and purchase agreements.
purchasing open interface
A Purchasing function that lets you import price/sales catalog information from your
suppliers. It receives the catalog data electronically, verifies and processes the data, and
imports the data directly into Purchasing as blanket purchase agreements or quotations.
purge
A technique for deleting data in Oracle Manufacturing that you no longer need to run
your business.
Glossary-30
purge category
A Purchasing feature you use to purge a particular group of records from the database.
Purchasing lets you choose from the following separate categories: Simple Requisitions,
Simple Purchase Orders, Suppliers, Simple Invoices (only if you installed Payables), and
Matched Invoices and POs (only if you installed Payables). The last category is the most
comprehensive category you can choose. You should purge all appropriate documents
before purging your supplier information, because Purchasing does not purge suppliers
that you referenced on existing documents.
purge status
A Purchasing method of reporting the progress of a purge you initiate. The Status field
lets you take an action on your purge process (Initiate, Confirm, Abort), or reports on
the current status of the purge (Printed, Deleting, Completed-Aborted, Completed-
Purged).
quantity accepted
The number of items you accept after inspection.
quantity-based order
An order you place, receive, and pay based on the quantity, unit of measure, and price
of the goods or services that you purchase.
quantity received tolerance
The percentage by which you allow quantity received to exceed quantity ordered.
quantity rejected
The number of items you reject after inspection.
quotation
A statement of the price, terms, and conditions of sale a supplier offers you for an item
or items. A quotation usually includes a detailed description (specifications) of goods or
services the supplier offers. Suppliers consider quotations as an offer to sell when given
in response to an inquiry. A quotation may be verbal or written. You often get verbal
quotations for minor purchases by telephone. You usually send a request for quotation
if you want a written quotation from a supplier. Written quotations often have an
effective date and an expiration date.
quotation type
A QuickCode you define to categorize your quotation information. Purchasing provides
you with the following set of predefined quotation types: Catalog, Verbal, Telephone, or
From RFQ. You can define other quotation types that better fit your business.
Glossary-31
receipt
A shipment from one supplier that can include many items ordered on many purchase
orders.
receipt line
An individual receipt transaction that identifies receipt of an item against a purchase
order shipment.
receipt routing
A method of simplifying transaction entry by specifying routing steps for receipts.
receipt traveler
An internal routing ticket you place on received goods to show their final destination.
receiving open interface
A set of interface tables in Purchasing that lets you import information from outside of
Purchasing, from Oracle or non-Oracle applications. Some examples of information
imported into the receiving open interface are Advance Shipment Notices (ASNs). The
receiving open interface validates the information before importing it into the
Purchasing application.
receiving organization
For drop-ship orders, the purchasing organization that records receipt of a drop-
shipped item.
reject
For Oracle Automotive, Oracle Service and Oracle Work in Process, reject is an
intraoperation step in an operation where you can record assemblies that require
rework or need to be scrapped. For Oracle Purchasing and Oracle Quality, reject is an
option you use to indicate that you do not want to approve a document. Purchasing
returns the document to its owner for modification and resubmission if appropriate.
reject over quantity tolerance
An option you use to disallow receipts that exceed the tolerance level.
release
An actual order of goods and services you issue against a blanket purchase agreement.
The blanket purchase agreement determines the characteristics and the prices of the
items. The release specifies the actual quantities and dates ordered for the items. You
identify a release by the combination of blanket purchase agreement number and
release number.
Glossary-32
reorder point planning
An inventory planning method used to determine when and how much to order based
on customer service level, safety stock, carrying cost, order setup cost, lead time and
average demand.
report
An organized display of Oracle Applications information. A report can be viewed on-
line or sent to a printer. The content of information in a report can range from a
summary to a complete listing of values.
report headings
General information about the contents of the report.
report options
Options for sorting, formatting, selecting, and summarizing the information in the
report. This section describes the options available for each report.
requisition template
A feature that lets you define a list of commonly purchased items from which a
requestor can create a requisition. You can define the list of items by referencing an
existing purchase order. Requestors use the requisition template to create simple, pre-
sourced requisitions.
request for quotation (RFQ)
A document you use to solicit supplier quotations for goods or services you need. You
usually send a request for quotation to many suppliers to ensure that you get the best
price and terms possible. Depending on the way you do business, you can use two
general types of RFQs: specific and generic.
requisition
See: purchase requisition and internal sales order.
requisition approval
The act of approving the purchases of the items on a requisition. A requisition must
receive the required approvals before a buyer can create purchase orders from this
requisition. The approvals can come from any employee, but a requisition is fully
approved only when an employee who has enough authority approves it. If you require
encumbrance or budgetary control for requisitions, a requisition is fully approved only
when an employee with sufficient approval authority approves and reserves funds for
the requisition.
requisition encumbrance
A transaction representing an intent to purchase goods and services as indicated by the
Glossary-33
reservation of funds for a requisition. Purchasing subtracts requisition encumbrances
from funds available when you reserve funds for a requisition. If you cancel a
requisition, Purchasing creates appropriate reversing entries in your general ledger.
requisition pool
Requisition lines that are approved, not cancelled, and not yet on a purchase order.
reserve
An action you take in Purchasing to reserve funds for a purchasing document or an
action in Order Entry to allocate products for a sales order. If the document passes the
submission tests and if you have sufficient authority, Purchasing reserves funds for the
document.
Reserve for Encumbrance account
The account you use to record your encumbrance liability. You define a Reserve for
Encumbrance account when you define your ledger. When you create encumbrances
automatically in Purchasing or Payables, General Ledger automatically creates a
balancing entry to your Reserve for Encumbrance account when you post your
encumbrance journal entries. And General Ledger overwrites the balancing segment for
your Reserve for Encumbrance account, so you automatically create the reserve for
encumbrance journal entry to the correct company.
responsibility
Determines the data, forms, menus, reports, and concurrent programs you can access in
Oracle Applications. It is linked directly to a data group. Several users can share the
same responsibility, and a single user can have multiple responsibilities.
result code
In Oracle Workflow, the internal name of a result value, as defined by the result type.
See also: result type, result value.
result type
In Oracle Workflow, the name of the lookup type that contains an activity's possible
result values.
result value
In Oracle Workflow, the value returned by a completed activity, such as Approved.
See also: result code, result type.
return
In Purchasing, an AutoCreate option that lets a buyer return a requisition line and all
other unpurchased requisition lines on the same requisition to the requisition preparer.
In Order Entry, it is the opposite of a sales order. It involves receipt of goods previously
Glossary-34
sold to a customer, credit to a customer, and possibly replacement with an identical or
similar product.
return material authorization (RMA)
Permission for a customer to return items.
return to supplier
A transaction that allows you to return to the supplier items from a fully or partially
received purchase order and receive credit for them.
revision
A particular version of an item, bill of material, or routing.
revision quantity control
A condition placed on an item that ensures that you always identify an item by its
number and its revision. Certain items require tighter controls than other. For instance,
you may want to control the quantities you have in inventory for an item by revision.
For another item, you may just want to know the quantities you have on hand across all
revisions. You keep track of inventory quantities by revision when an item is under
revision quantity control. You keep track of inventory quantities by item when an item
is not under revision quantity control.
RFQ
See also: request for quotation.
RMA
See also: Return Material Authorization.
serial number
A number assigned to each unit of an item and used to track the item.
ledger
A financial reporting entity that partitions General Ledger information and uses a
particular chart of accounts, functional currency, and accounting calendar. This concept
is the same whether or not the Multi-organization support feature is implemented.
ship-to address
A location where items are to be shipped.
ship via
See: freight carrier
Glossary-35
shipment release
An actual order of goods and services against a planned purchase order. The planned
purchase order determines the characteristics of the items on the order. The planned
purchase order also has the expected quantities, prices, and ship-to locations, and
delivery dates for the items on the order. You identify a shipment release by the
combination of the planned purchase order number and the release number. Each
planned purchase order line can have multiple shipments and you can distribute the
quantity of each shipment across multiple accounts.
shipment relief
The process of relieving the master demand schedule when a sales order ships. This
decrements the demand schedule to represent an actual statement of demand.
short notes
A Purchasing feature that lets you provide up to 240 characters on your documents.
Typically, these notes are for your supplier, approver, buyer, or receiver.
simulation schedule
Unofficial schedules for personal use that contain the most current scheduled item
information. You can print simulation schedules, however you cannot confirm or send
them via EDI.
source base unit
The unit of measure from which you are converting when you define your interclass
conversions. You define the destination base unit in terms of the source base unit. Your
source base unit is the base unit of a unit class.
sourcing
The action of identifying a purchasing source or supplier for goods or services. To
identify the best sources for your purchases, you can create RFQs that you send to your
suppliers, enter quotations from your supplier, and evaluate these quotations for each
item you purchase.
sourcing rule
Specifies how to replenish items in an organization, such as purchased items in plants.
You can also use sourcing rules to override sourcing that is specified in the bill of
distribution assigned to an item.
sourcing rule assignment
See: assignment hierarchy
spot buy
Indirect spend for items that are not sourced, business critical and the requester needs
Glossary-36
it. These are typically low Spend items, project based purchase with high volume
transactions and too costly to involve sourcing and procurement organizations. Spot
Buy is also defined as non-budgeted spend and are mostly non-catalog requests.
SQL validation statement
A statement written in SQL to customize action details.
standard note
A long note you define and can later reference on as many documents as you want.
standard purchase order
A type of purchase order you issue when you order delivery of goods or services for
specific dates and locations for your company. Each standard purchase order line can
have multiple shipments and you can distribute the quantity of each shipment across
multiple accounts. See purchase order.
standard receipt
A receipt routing in which shipments are received into a receiving location and then
delivered in a separate transaction. Standard receipts can be inspected or transferred
before delivery.
standard unit conversion
The conversion formula you define between different units from the same unit class.
You define your own standard conversion.
status check
A set of tests Purchasing performs on a purchasing document to ensure it is in a valid
state before performing an approval action.
submission check
A set of tests on a purchasing document to ensure it is ready to be submitted for
approval processing.
submit
To send a document to another employee without attempting to approve or reserve
funds for it yourself.
substitute receipt
An option that lets you receive predefined acceptable substitutes for any item.
supply chain planning
The development and maintenance of multi-organizational distribution and
Glossary-37
manufacturing plans across a global supply chain.
summary message action
A message representing one or more exceptions. The message may include introductory
and closing paragraphs separated by the exceptions listed in a columnar report format.
supplier
Provider of goods or services.
supplier product number
The number your supplier assigns to an item. You and your supplier can have different
item naming conventions. You can identify the item with one number (Item) while your
supplier identifies this item using another number (Supplier Product Number). Using
and referencing supplier product numbers helps you speed up your purchasing cycle.
By referencing a number your supplier knows, you can help your suppliers understand
your purchase orders and RFQs better.
supplier purchasing hold
A hold condition you place on a supplier to prevent new purchasing activity on the
supplier. You cannot approve purchase orders for suppliers you placed on hold.
supplier quotation list
A list of suppliers who can provide goods or services you need. You often define a
supplier quotation list for an item or class of items. You can use a supplier quotation list
to generate multiple copies of a RFQ automatically and to manage supplier responses.
supplier sourced component
A component item on a bill of material supplied to work in process directly by a
supplier.
supply
A quantity of materials available for use. Supply is replenished in response to demand
or anticipated demand.
supply agreement blanket purchase order
A type of purchase order you issue before you request actual delivery of goods or
services. You normally create a blanket purchase agreement to document a long-term
supplier agreement. A blanket purchase agreement may contain an effective date and
an expiration date, a committed amount, or quantity. You use a blanket purchase
agreement as a tool for specifying agreed prices and delivery dates for goods and
services before actually ordering them. Blanket agreement in Oracle Purchasing with
the Supply Agreement flag set on the Blanket Agreement header. Only Supply
Agreement Releases are picked up by Supplier Scheduling.
Glossary-38
task
A subdivision of project work. Each project can have a set of top level tasks and a
hierarchy of subtasks below each top level task.
See also: work breakdown structure.
tax codes
Codes to which you assign sales tax or value-added tax rates.
three-way matching
Purchasing performs three-way matching to verify the purchase order, receipt, and
invoice information match within tolerance.
total quantity accepted
The total number of accepted items for the receipt line.
total requisition limit
The maximum amount you authorize an employee to approve for a specific requisition.
trading partner
Any company that sends and receives documents via EDI.
transaction interface
An open interface table through which you can import transactions. See open interface.
transition
In Oracle Workflow, the relationship that defines the completion of one activity and the
activation of another activity within a process. In a process diagram, the arrow drawn
between two activities represents a transition.
See also: activity, Workflow Engine.
two-level master scheduling
A technique that facilitates the forecast explosion of product groupings into related
master production schedules. The top-level MPS is usually defined for a product line,
family or end product while the second-level is defined for key options and
components.
two-way matching
Purchasing performs two-way matching to verify that purchase order and invoice
information match within tolerance.
Glossary-39
UN number
An identifier for a hazardous material. Each Identification number has a description.
Identification numbers are not unique. For instance, the same UN Number may
correspond to 2 closely related but different types of materials.
unit of measure
The unit that the quantity of an item is expressed.
unit of measure class
A group of units of measure and their corresponding base unit of measure. The
standard unit classes are Length, Weight, Volume, Area, Time, and Pack.
unit of measure conversions
Numerical factors that enable you to perform transactions in units other than the
primary unit of the item being transacted.
unordered receipt
A site option that lets you receive an unordered item. You can later batch an unordered
item to an existing purchase order, or add it to a new purchase order.
UOM
See: unit of measure.
value added
See: outside processing.
value basis
An attribute you associate with a line type to indicate whether you order items for this
line type by quantity or amount.
variance
An accounting term used to express the difference between an expected cost and an
actual cost. A variance can be favorable or unfavorable. Variances are usually written
directly to the income statement as a period expense.
vendor
See: supplier.
waybill
A document containing a list of goods and shipping instructions relative to a shipment.
Glossary-40
Workflow Engine
The Oracle Workflow component that implements a workflow process definition. The
Workflow Engine manages the state of all activities, automatically executes functions,
maintains a history of completed activities, and detects error conditions and starts error
processes. The Workflow Engine is implemented in server PL/SQL and activated when
a call to an engine API is made.
See also: Account Generator, activity, function, item type.
X12
ANSI standard for inter-industry electronic interchange of business transactions.
Index-1
Index
A
Address book, 8-7
managing, 8-8
Advance shipment notices, 5-2
creating, 5-2
Agreements
see Supplier agreements, 4-32
ASBN
see Advance shipment notices, 5-2
ASN
see Advance shipment notices, 5-2
B
Business classifications, 8-12
C
Canceling ASNs, 5-9
Capacity information, 6-5
maintaining, 6-5
maintain order modifiers, 6-7
Claiming products and services, 8-14
Complex-work purchase orders, 4-23
Consigned inventory, 6-9
Contact directory, 8-9
managing, 8-9
Creating Advanced Shipment Notices, 5-5
E
electronic kanban
integrating with iSupplier Portal, 10-1
F
Forecast information, 6-2
G
Global buttons, 3-4, 9-2
H
How to use this guide, 1-2
I
Invoices
retrieving, 7-4
submitting, 7-1
viewing, 7-6
iSupplier Portal
integrating with electronic kanban, 10-1
L
Links
quick, 3-2, 9-3
M
Maintaining order modifiers, 6-7
Manage Supplier Broker, 8-19
Managing
address book details, 8-8
Manufacturing orders, 4-32
N
Index-2
Notifications, 3-2, 9-3
Oracle iSupplier Portal home page, 3-2, 9-3
O
Oracle iSupplier Portal home page
global buttons, 3-4, 9-2
navigating, 3-1
notifications, 3-2, 9-3
orders at a glance, 3-3, 9-3
quick links, 3-2, 9-3
shipments at a glance, 3-3
tabs, 9-3
Oracle iSupplier Portal Home page, 3-1, 9-2
Orders at a glance, 3-3, 9-3, 9-3
P
Payment information
viewing, 7-11
Performance
viewing, 5-15
Planning information
forecasts, 6-2
Preferences
setting up, 3-4
Product information, 6-2
consigned inventory, 6-9
supplier item summary, 6-2
viewing item inventory, 6-4
VMI, 6-8
Products and services, 8-13
claiming, 8-14
Prospective suppliers
Reopening rejected registration requests, 2-4
Tracking registration status, 2-4
Purchase orders, 4-2
acknowledging, 4-7
submitting change requests, 4-12
viewing, 4-3
Q
Quality information, 5-16
Quick
links, 3-2, 9-3
R
Receipts
viewing, 5-13
Receiving information, 5-13
on-time delivery performance, 5-15
receipts, 5-13
Registration
supplier user, 2-6
Requests for quotes, 4-36
Returns
viewing, 5-15
S
Searching, 3-5
Shipment information
overdue receipts, 5-12
Shipments at a glance, 3-3
Shipping information
advance shipment billing notices, 5-2
advance shipment notices, 5-2
Submitting
change requests, 4-12
invoices, 7-1
Supplier
registration, 2-2
user registration, 2-6
Supplier item summary
defects, 6-3
inventory, 6-3
orders, 6-3
overdue, 6-3
performance, 6-3
receipt history, 6-3
returns, 6-3
viewing, 6-2
Supplier Profile Management
address book, 8-7
business classifications, 8-12
contact directory, 8-9
products and services, 8-13
Supplier Profile Management flow, 8-2
T
Tabs, 9-3
tax details, 8-5
Tolerance Based Auto-Approval, 9-14
Index-3
U
User preferences, 3-4
V
Vendor Managed Inventory, 6-8
Viewing
item inventory, 6-4
Viewing AP AR Netting Report, 7-9
Viewing invoice information, 7-6
Viewing payment information, 7-11
Viewing Schedules from Supplier Scheduling, 6-
10
Viewing supplier item summary, 6-2
VMI
see Vendor Managed Inventory, 6-8
W
withholding tax, 8-5
Work confirmation for complex-work purchase
orders, 4-23
iSupplier Implementation.pdf

More Related Content

PDF
120posig i spplr implmntn guide
PDF
120posig
PDF
SuiteFlowUserGuide.pdf
PDF
Oracle Fusion Procurement implementation guide
PDF
115chvug
PDF
122gopug.pdf
PDF
Sales userguide121asnug
PDF
Cdh user guider12.2
120posig i spplr implmntn guide
120posig
SuiteFlowUserGuide.pdf
Oracle Fusion Procurement implementation guide
115chvug
122gopug.pdf
Sales userguide121asnug
Cdh user guider12.2

Similar to iSupplier Implementation.pdf (20)

PDF
OPM API reference guide
PDF
R12 opm api
PDF
120oksug
PPTX
MDM-SGG_Business_User_Guide_v2_2_0_2.pptx
PPTX
MDM-SGG_Business_User_Guide_v2_2_0_2.pptx
PDF
Oracle service procurement manual
PDF
Oracle-Service-Procurement - User Guide.pdf
PDF
Oracle@cloud adapter(SFDC integration with SOA Suites12c)
PDF
Orac appl express guide release 4
PDF
Oracle hrms approvals management implementation guide
PDF
oracle easy upgrade to r12 details
PDF
Oracle database 12c 2 day + real application clusters guide
PDF
Oracle database 12c application express end user's guide
PDF
toaz.info-oracle-enterprise-manager-13cpdf-pr_d27a8dfef1d5b8f2ea644bed2462172...
PDF
Oracle database 12c 2 day + java developer's guide
PDF
120cioig
PDF
Engineering user guide
PDF
E business suite concepts
PDF
2.oracle purchasing
PDF
Oracle database 12c 2 day + php developer's guide
OPM API reference guide
R12 opm api
120oksug
MDM-SGG_Business_User_Guide_v2_2_0_2.pptx
MDM-SGG_Business_User_Guide_v2_2_0_2.pptx
Oracle service procurement manual
Oracle-Service-Procurement - User Guide.pdf
Oracle@cloud adapter(SFDC integration with SOA Suites12c)
Orac appl express guide release 4
Oracle hrms approvals management implementation guide
oracle easy upgrade to r12 details
Oracle database 12c 2 day + real application clusters guide
Oracle database 12c application express end user's guide
toaz.info-oracle-enterprise-manager-13cpdf-pr_d27a8dfef1d5b8f2ea644bed2462172...
Oracle database 12c 2 day + java developer's guide
120cioig
Engineering user guide
E business suite concepts
2.oracle purchasing
Oracle database 12c 2 day + php developer's guide
Ad

Recently uploaded (20)

PPTX
Final Presentation General Medicine 03-08-2024.pptx
PPTX
Introduction_to_Human_Anatomy_and_Physiology_for_B.Pharm.pptx
PDF
Supply Chain Operations Speaking Notes -ICLT Program
PPTX
PPH.pptx obstetrics and gynecology in nursing
PPTX
Pharmacology of Heart Failure /Pharmacotherapy of CHF
PDF
Black Hat USA 2025 - Micro ICS Summit - ICS/OT Threat Landscape
PDF
Sports Quiz easy sports quiz sports quiz
PDF
01-Introduction-to-Information-Management.pdf
PDF
O5-L3 Freight Transport Ops (International) V1.pdf
PPTX
Institutional Correction lecture only . . .
PDF
Chapter 2 Heredity, Prenatal Development, and Birth.pdf
PPTX
Cell Types and Its function , kingdom of life
PDF
Module 4: Burden of Disease Tutorial Slides S2 2025
PDF
Pre independence Education in Inndia.pdf
PPTX
Pharma ospi slides which help in ospi learning
PDF
2.FourierTransform-ShortQuestionswithAnswers.pdf
PDF
Microbial disease of the cardiovascular and lymphatic systems
PDF
ANTIBIOTICS.pptx.pdf………………… xxxxxxxxxxxxx
PPTX
GDM (1) (1).pptx small presentation for students
PDF
grade 11-chemistry_fetena_net_5883.pdf teacher guide for all student
Final Presentation General Medicine 03-08-2024.pptx
Introduction_to_Human_Anatomy_and_Physiology_for_B.Pharm.pptx
Supply Chain Operations Speaking Notes -ICLT Program
PPH.pptx obstetrics and gynecology in nursing
Pharmacology of Heart Failure /Pharmacotherapy of CHF
Black Hat USA 2025 - Micro ICS Summit - ICS/OT Threat Landscape
Sports Quiz easy sports quiz sports quiz
01-Introduction-to-Information-Management.pdf
O5-L3 Freight Transport Ops (International) V1.pdf
Institutional Correction lecture only . . .
Chapter 2 Heredity, Prenatal Development, and Birth.pdf
Cell Types and Its function , kingdom of life
Module 4: Burden of Disease Tutorial Slides S2 2025
Pre independence Education in Inndia.pdf
Pharma ospi slides which help in ospi learning
2.FourierTransform-ShortQuestionswithAnswers.pdf
Microbial disease of the cardiovascular and lymphatic systems
ANTIBIOTICS.pptx.pdf………………… xxxxxxxxxxxxx
GDM (1) (1).pptx small presentation for students
grade 11-chemistry_fetena_net_5883.pdf teacher guide for all student
Ad

iSupplier Implementation.pdf

  • 1. Oracle® iSupplier Portal User's Guide Release 12.2 Part No. E48972-10 November 2022
  • 2. Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide , Release 12.2 Part No. E48972-10 Copyright © 2009, 2022, Oracle and/or its affiliates. Primary Author: Chetna Arora Contributing Author: Gowri Arur, Pragya Nair, Smile Nagpal This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is prohibited. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find any errors, please report them to us in writing. If this is software or related documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S. Government, then the following notice is applicable: U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS: Oracle programs, including any operating system, integrated software, any programs installed on the hardware, and/or documentation, delivered to U.S. Government end users are "commercial computer software" pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency- specific supplemental regulations. As such, use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation of the programs, including any operating system, integrated software, any programs installed on the hardware, and/or documentation, shall be subject to license terms and license restrictions applicable to the programs. No other rights are granted to the U.S. Government. This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications that may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications. Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners. Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. AMD, Opteron, the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices. UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group. This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information about content, products, and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services unless otherwise set forth in an applicable agreement between you and Oracle. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content, products, or services, except as set forth in an applicable agreement between you and Oracle. For information about Oracle's commitment to accessibility, visit the Oracle Accessibility Program website at http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=docacc. Oracle customers that have purchased support have access to electronic support through My Oracle Support. For information, visit http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=info or visit http://www.oracle. com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=trs if you are hearing impaired.
  • 3. iii Contents Send Us Your Comments Preface 1 Introduction to Oracle iSupplier Portal Overview................................................................................................................................... 1-1 About Oracle iSupplier Portal.................................................................................................. 1-1 How to Use This Guide............................................................................................................. 1-2 Getting Started Information..................................................................................................... 1-2 Transaction and View-Only Document Information............................................................... 1-2 Profile Information....................................................................................................................1-3 Buying Company View Information........................................................................................ 1-3 Where to Start ........................................................................................................................... 1-3 2 Registration Overview................................................................................................................................... 2-1 Registering Suppliers................................................................................................................ 2-2 Tracking the Registration Status of Prospective Suppliers......................................................2-4 Reopening Rejected Registration Requests from Prospective Suppliers................................ 2-4 Registering Users.......................................................................................................................2-6 3 Navigating and Searching Overview................................................................................................................................... 3-1 Using the Oracle iSupplier Portal Home Page......................................................................... 3-1 Setting Up User Preferences......................................................................................................3-4 Searching................................................................................................................................... 3-5
  • 4. iv 4 Order Information Order Information..................................................................................................................... 4-1 Purchase Orders ........................................................................................................................4-2 Viewing Purchase Orders......................................................................................................... 4-3 Printing Purchase Orders.......................................................................................................... 4-7 Acknowledging Purchase Orders ............................................................................................ 4-7 Submitting Change Requests................................................................................................. 4-12 Splitting Shipments and Pay Items........................................................................................ 4-21 Using Work Confirmations (Complex-Work Purchase Orders Only)................................... 4-23 Canceling Orders or Shipments..............................................................................................4-30 Managing Deliverables........................................................................................................... 4-31 Work Orders............................................................................................................................ 4-32 Agreements.............................................................................................................................. 4-32 Purchase Order Revision History........................................................................................... 4-35 Requests For Quotes (RFQ)..................................................................................................... 4-36 Viewing Time Cards............................................................................................................... 4-37 5 Shipping Information Shipping Overview................................................................................................................... 5-1 Shipping Information............................................................................................................... 5-2 Using Advance Shipment Notices and Advance Shipment Billing Notices........................... 5-2 Creating Advance Shipment Notices and Advance Shipment Billing Notices.......................5-5 Uploading Advance Shipment Notices and Advance Shipment Billing Notices................... 5-8 Canceling Advance Shipment Notices and Advance Shipment Billing Notices.................... 5-9 Uploading Routing Requests.................................................................................................. 5-10 Viewing Routing Responses................................................................................................... 5-11 Viewing Delivery Schedules.................................................................................................. 5-11 Viewing Overdue Receipts..................................................................................................... 5-12 Receiving Information............................................................................................................ 5-13 Viewing Receipts.....................................................................................................................5-13 Viewing Returns......................................................................................................................5-15 Viewing On-Time Delivery Performance...............................................................................5-15 Quality Information................................................................................................................ 5-16 6 Planning and Inventory Information Overview................................................................................................................................... 6-1 Forecast Information................................................................................................................. 6-2 Product Information.................................................................................................................. 6-2 Viewing Supplier Item Summary.............................................................................................6-2
  • 5. v Viewing Item Inventory Information....................................................................................... 6-4 Maintaining Capacity Information........................................................................................... 6-5 Maintaining Order Modifiers................................................................................................... 6-7 Vendor Managed Inventory...................................................................................................... 6-8 Consigned Inventory................................................................................................................. 6-9 Viewing Schedules from Supplier Scheduling...................................................................... 6-10 7 Invoice and Payment Information Overview................................................................................................................................... 7-1 Submitting Invoices.................................................................................................................. 7-1 Viewing Invoice Information................................................................................................... 7-6 Viewing AP AR Netting Report................................................................................................7-9 Viewing Payment Information............................................................................................... 7-11 8 Supplier Profile Management Overview................................................................................................................................... 8-1 Supplier Profile Management Flow..........................................................................................8-2 General Company Information ................................................................................................8-3 Company Profile........................................................................................................................8-4 Tax Details................................................................................................................................. 8-5 Address Book.............................................................................................................................8-7 Contact Directory.......................................................................................................................8-9 Business Classifications.......................................................................................................... 8-12 Products and Services..............................................................................................................8-13 Banking Details....................................................................................................................... 8-16 Creating Banking Details........................................................................................................ 8-16 Responding to Buyer Surveys................................................................................................. 8-19 Manage Supplier Broker......................................................................................................... 8-19 9 Buying Company View Buying Company View............................................................................................................. 9-1 Using the Oracle iSupplier Portal Home Page with the Buying Company View................... 9-2 Order Information..................................................................................................................... 9-3 Purchase Orders.........................................................................................................................9-3 Agreements................................................................................................................................ 9-6 Purchase History........................................................................................................................9-7 Acknowledging Changes.......................................................................................................... 9-8 Shipment Information.............................................................................................................9-10 Shipment Notices.................................................................................................................... 9-10 Receipts.................................................................................................................................... 9-11
  • 6. vi Account Information .............................................................................................................. 9-12 Invoices.................................................................................................................................... 9-12 Payments..................................................................................................................................9-13 Tolerance Based Auto-Approval............................................................................................. 9-14 10 Electronic Kanban iSupplier Portal and Electronic Kanban Integration..............................................................10-1 GLOSSARY Index
  • 7. vii Send Us Your Comments Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide , Release 12.2 Part No. E48972-10 Oracle welcomes customers' comments and suggestions on the quality and usefulness of this document. Your feedback is important, and helps us to best meet your needs as a user of our products. For example: • Are the implementation steps correct and complete? • Did you understand the context of the procedures? • Did you find any errors in the information? • Does the structure of the information help you with your tasks? • Do you need different information or graphics? If so, where, and in what format? • Are the examples correct? Do you need more examples? If you find any errors or have any other suggestions for improvement, then please tell us your name, the name of the company who has licensed our products, the title and part number of the documentation and the chapter, section, and page number (if available). Note: Before sending us your comments, you might like to check that you have the latest version of the document and if any concerns are already addressed. To do this, access the new Oracle E-Business Suite Release Online Documentation CD available on My Oracle Support and www.oracle.com. It contains the most current Documentation Library plus all documents revised or released recently. Send your comments to us using the electronic mail address: appsdoc_us@oracle.com Please give your name, address, electronic mail address, and telephone number (optional). If you need assistance with Oracle software, then please contact your support representative or Oracle Support Services. If you require training or instruction in using Oracle software, then please contact your Oracle local office and inquire about our Oracle University offerings. A list of Oracle offices is available on our Web site at www.oracle.com.
  • 9. ix Preface Intended Audience Welcome to Release 12.2 of the Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide . See Related Information Sources on page x for more Oracle E-Business Suite product information. Documentation Accessibility For information about Oracle's commitment to accessibility, visit the Oracle Accessibility Program website at http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup? ctx=acc&id=docacc. Access to Oracle Support Oracle customers that have purchased support have access to electronic support through My Oracle Support. For information, visit http://www.oracle. com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=info or visit http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup? ctx=acc&id=trs if you are hearing impaired. Structure 1 Introduction to Oracle iSupplier Portal 2 Registration 3 Navigating and Searching 4 Order Information 5 Shipping Information 6 Planning and Inventory Information 7 Invoice and Payment Information 8 Supplier Profile Management 9 Buying Company View 10 Electronic Kanban
  • 10. x GLOSSARY Related Information Sources Integration Repository The Oracle Integration Repository is a compilation of information about the service endpoints exposed by the Oracle E-Business Suite of applications. It provides a complete catalog of Oracle E-Business Suite's business service interfaces. The tool lets users easily discover and deploy the appropriate business service interface for integration with any system, application, or business partner. The Oracle Integration Repository is shipped as part of the Oracle E-Business Suite. As your instance is patched, the repository is automatically updated with content appropriate for the precise revisions of interfaces in your environment. Do Not Use Database Tools to Modify Oracle E-Business Suite Data Oracle STRONGLY RECOMMENDS that you never use SQL*Plus, Oracle Data Browser, database triggers, or any other tool to modify Oracle E-Business Suite data unless otherwise instructed. Oracle provides powerful tools you can use to create, store, change, retrieve, and maintain information in an Oracle database. But if you use Oracle tools such as SQL*Plus to modify Oracle E-Business Suite data, you risk destroying the integrity of your data and you lose the ability to audit changes to your data. Because Oracle E-Business Suite tables are interrelated, any change you make using an Oracle E-Business Suite form can update many tables at once. But when you modify Oracle E-Business Suite data using anything other than Oracle E-Business Suite, you may change a row in one table without making corresponding changes in related tables. If your tables get out of synchronization with each other, you risk retrieving erroneous information and you risk unpredictable results throughout Oracle E-Business Suite. When you use Oracle E-Business Suite to modify your data, Oracle E-Business Suite automatically checks that your changes are valid. Oracle E-Business Suite also keeps track of who changes information. If you enter information into database tables using database tools, you may store invalid information. You also lose the ability to track who has changed your information because SQL*Plus and other database tools do not keep a record of changes.
  • 11. Introduction to Oracle iSupplier Portal 1-1 1 Introduction to Oracle iSupplier Portal Overview Oracle iSupplier Portal enables a buying company to communicate key procure-to-pay information with suppliers. As a supplier using Oracle iSupplier Portal, you can view and acknowledge purchase orders, submit change requests, create advance shipment notices, view receipts, view inventory levels, view invoices and payments, create work confirmation for complex work projects, and acknowledge purchase order change requests. As a buyer using Oracle iSupplier Portal, you can view order, shipment, receipt, invoice, and payment information. This section is an introduction to Oracle iSupplier Portal, and includes the following topics: • About Oracle iSupplier Portal., page 1-1 • How to Use This Guide, page 1-2 About Oracle iSupplier Portal Oracle iSupplier Portal is a collaborative application that enables buying companies and their suppliers to communicate with each other. It enables suppliers to have real-time access to information (such as purchase orders and delivery schedules) and respond to the buying company with order acknowledgments, change requests, shipment notices, and planning details. It also allows buying organizations to search for order, shipment, receipt, invoice, and payment information across all suppliers and all business units, as well as respond to supplier change requests. Note: Oracle iSupplier Portal supports both transaction documents and view-only documents. Using transaction documents, you can submit acknowledgments or change requests on a Purchase Order, or initiate transactions such as advance shipment notices, advanced shipment
  • 12. 1-2 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide billing notices, and invoices. Using view-only documents, you may view forecast schedules and payments. How to Use This Guide This guide is organized to help you learn, use, and understand Oracle iSupplier Portal. Getting Started Information Introduction to Oracle iSupplier Portal Explains how you get started using Oracle iSupplier Portal. This chapter includes details of where you start using the system depending on your current relationship with the buying company. Registration Explains how to register your company with the buying company and how to get Oracle iSupplier Portal user accounts for your employees. If you already have access to Oracle iSupplier Portal, then you do not need to read this chapter. Navigating and Searching Explains how to navigate through the system. The chapter also includes searching tips and techniques. Transaction and View-Only Document Information Order Information Explains how to view and respond to order-related documents such as purchase orders, work orders, and supplier agreements. Shipping Information Explains how to access shipping information and create advance shipment notices (ASNs or ASBNs). The chapter also includes information on viewing receiving and quality transactions. Planning and Inventory Information Explains how to access planning and inventory information, as well as how to maintain item and capacity information. Invoice and Payment Information Explains how to access invoice and payment information. The chapter also includes information on how to submit invoices if the buying company has Oracle Payables installed.
  • 13. Introduction to Oracle iSupplier Portal 1-3 Profile Information Supplier Profile Management Explains how to maintain information about your company using the Supplier Profile Management feature. You must have the proper authorizations to access the profile management pages. Buying Company View Information Buying Company View Explains the buying company view of iSupplier Portal. Where to Start Before you can access Oracle iSupplier Portal: 1. Your company must be registered as a supplier to the buying company that has licensed Oracle iSupplier Portal. 2. You must be registered as an Oracle iSupplier Portal user. Note: If you are already a supplier to the buying company and you can log into Oracle iSupplier Portal, then you and your company have already completed both of the registration tasks. You can skip chapter 2. If you do not have access to Oracle iSupplier Portal, see chapter 2 for registration instructions. After you are registered, you can access Oracle iSupplier Portal. The tasks you perform on Oracle iSupplier Portal are determined by your current supply chain business relationship with the buying company. The tables below list the tasks you will likely perform; where you start depends on what you want to accomplish: If the buying company has ordered goods or services from you, you can Tasks Where Documented View existing orders from your buying company, including any attachments. See Order Information Acknowledge and submit change requests to purchase orders. See Order Information
  • 14. 1-4 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide Tasks Where Documented Submit your electronic signature while acknowledging a purchase order. See Order Information View and print Portable Document Format (PDF) versions of purchasing documents, including blanket agreements, clauses and other contract terms. See Order Information View your current purchase agreements (if any) with the buying company. See Order Information View an audit trail of any revisions for a purchase order. See Order Information Manage deliverables assigned to you (available only if the buying company has implemented Oracle Procurement Contracts). See Order Information Create work confirmations to notify the buying company of expected payment related to a completed unit of work for a complex work project. See Order Information View timecard information (available only if the buying company has implemented Oracle Services Procurement and Oracle Time and Labor). See Order Information Let your buying company know that goods are ready for shipment by uploading a routing request. See Shipping Information View buying company's response to your routing request. See Shipping Information Alert the buying company of any upcoming deliveries by sending advance shipment notices (ASN) or advance shipment billing notices (ASBN). See Shipping Information Upload advance shipment notices (ASN) or advance shipment billing notices (ASBN) to the system using spreadsheet functionality. See Shipping Information
  • 15. Introduction to Oracle iSupplier Portal 1-5 Tasks Where Documented View and enter item quality results and check for correspondence from the buying company (available only if the buying company uses Oracle Quality). See Shipping Information View receipts, returns, and delivery performance. See Shipping Information If you have already made a shipment to the buying company, you can: Tasks Where Documented View invoices and received payments. See Invoice and Payment Information Submit invoices by selecting a purchase order and direct-billing the buying company (available only if the buying company uses Oracle Payables). See Invoice and Payment Information If you require a third-party shipment before you can complete the buying company's order, you can: Task Where Documented View work orders to check the status of third- party (outside processing) orders or shipment plans. See Order Information and Shipping Information If you want to view and update your inventory information, you can: Tasks Where Documented View item inventory levels. See Planning and Inventory Information Maintain item attributes, such as delivery capacity and lead times. See Planning and Inventory Information
  • 16. 1-6 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide Tasks Where Documented Enter capacity information and view on-hand delivery items. See Planning and Inventory Information Define inventory lead times and order modifiers. See Planning and Inventory Information View vendor managed inventory items (if items are set up as a vendor managed items) and generate supply requests to manage reorder points and replenishments See Planning and Inventory Information View consigned inventory stock and view transactions associated with that stock. See Planning and Inventory Information If you want to view forecast demand so you can evaluate your supply plans, you can: Task Where Documented View forecast schedules. See Planning and Inventory Information View a summary of forecast schedules. See Planning and Inventory Information If you want to update your company's profile information, you can: Task Where Documented Enter address book information, contact directory information, business classifications, and products and services you provide. You can also enter and maintain bank account and address information, as well as payment and invoicing methods. You can enter and maintain information on user accounts. See Supplier Profile Management If you want to negotiate to supply goods to the buying company, you can:
  • 17. Introduction to Oracle iSupplier Portal 1-7 Task Where Documented View buyer requests for quotes (RFQs). See RFQs If you are a buyer, you can: Task Where Documented View order, shipment, receipt, invoice, and payment information. See Buyer information Search for order, shipment, receipt, invoice, and payment information across all suppliers and all business units. See Buyer information Respond to supplier change requests. See Buyer information
  • 19. Registration 2-1 2 Registration This chapter covers the following topics: • Overview • Registering Suppliers • Tracking the Registration Status of Prospective Suppliers • Reopening Rejected Registration Requests from Prospective Suppliers • Registering Users Overview You register your company as a prospective supplier in Oracle iSupplier Portal to let the buying company know that you are interested in establishing a business relationship. After you are registered, additional supplier users within your company can be registered to access and use Oracle iSupplier Portal. This enables you to communicate to a buying company real-time information about your procure-to-pay transactions. Note: If you are already a supplier to the buying company and you can log into Oracle iSupplier Portal, then you and your company have already completed both of the registration tasks. You can skip chapter 2. Note: If no one in your company can access Oracle iSupplier Portal, your company is not registered with the buying company, and you need to register your company before you register your supplier users. Note: If other supplier users in your company can access Oracle iSupplier Portal (and you cannot), your company is registered, however, you need to register as a user for access to Oracle iSupplier
  • 20. 2-2 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide Portal. If you are a prospective supplier, you need to read the entire section and complete all of the registration steps. If your company is already registered with the buying company and you only need to add yourself as a user, you only need to read and complete the Registering Users task. This section includes the following topics: • Registering Suppliers, page 2-2 • Registering Users, page 2-6 Registering Suppliers Self-service prospective vendor registration enables you to register your interest in establishing a business relationship with the buying company. Once registered, you can provide details about your company, its addresses, contacts, products and services, and banking and payment information. You must provide contact information so the system can send updates on the registration request. After completing the registration, you receive a confirmation that the request has been submitted for review. The information is reviewed by a buyer administrator, and if approved, you are notified of the decision by e-mail. Using the Guided Navigation Flow for Self-Service Prospective Supplier Registration: Oracle iSupplier Portal provides a navigation model for the self-service prospective supplier registration that streamlines user experience and makes it more intuitive. Using the train navigation prospective suppliers can complete all the steps to successfully register. The train navigation for the prospective supplier registration presents the following steps: • Basic Information • Company Details (which includes the following) • Address Book • Contact Directory • Business Classification • Products and Services
  • 21. Registration 2-3 • Banking Details • Attachments The Create Address and Update Address pages in the Address Book display the Address Purpose region, using which you can assign a purpose (reason) for the address. Select address purposes appropriately to ensure that you receive communication from the buying organization that is relevant to you. The Create Contact and Update Contact pages in the Contact Directory display the Contact Purpose region, using which you can assign a purpose (reason) for the contact. Select contact purposes appropriately to ensure that you receive communication from the buying organization that is relevant to you. For more information about address and contact purposes, refer to the Supplier Profile Management chapter. Prospective suppliers can provide contact information so the system can send updates on the registration request. As a prospective supplier, when you provide company details, you can create a new address and associate with the primary contact. Supplier users can associate address to contacts during prospective supplier registration. To enable suppliers to associate address to a contact during registration, the buyer administrator must enable the Contact Address Association check box in the Oracle Supplier Management, Supplier Onboarding Configuration page. When this check box is enabled, Addresses for the Contact region is available to suppliers to associate address with a contact. As a prospective supplier, after you submit the registration, you can track the status of your registration. Prospective suppliers during registration can add their comments in the Note to Buyer field in the Prospective Supplier Registration Update page. Approving or Rejecting Prospective Supplier Registration Requests: Oracle iSupplier Portal provides actionable notification for prospective supplier registration approval. Using the actionable registration request notification from a prospective supplier, buyers can: • Approve, Forward, Reject, Supplier to Provide Details, Reassign, or Request Information. • View a graphical AME approval flow. • View status history and notification history The supplier administrator can use add comments for the prospective supplier using the Note to Supplier field on the Registration Request Review page.
  • 22. 2-4 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide Tracking the Registration Status of Prospective Suppliers Prospective suppliers can track their registration status using the Prospective Supplier Registration: Current Status page. This page displays summary information of the registration request and the historical activity on the request. The 'Registration Details and Status' and 'Status History' regions displayed in this page are same as the regions displayed in the workflow notification. Note: After receiving a registration request from a prospective supplier, a status link is sent to the prospective supplier to track the status of the registration. The 'Current Status' page is accessible only through this link that is sent to the prospective supplier. Depending on the current status of the registration request, the supplier can perform certain actions: If the registration status is: • Draft, then the supplier can update the request using the new train navigation based registration page. The Update button is enabled on the page. • Pending Approval, Approved, or Rejected, then no action is required from the supplier. • Supplier to Provide Details, then the supplier can click the Respond button on the status page to provide the necessary details. Reopening Rejected Registration Requests from Prospective Suppliers Oracle iSupplier Portal enables buyers the ability to reinstate a rejected supplier by reopening the rejected request. Suppliers can benefit from this feature as there is no need to re-initiate the entire registration process after getting rejected. Example of a business flow of reopening a rejected registration request from a prospective supplier: In this example, a prospective supplier registers, however the registration request is rejected. As there is a business requirement, the supplier administrator must now reopen the rejected registration request. To reopen the rejected request, as a supplier administrator: 1. Log in to the Supplier Profile Administrator responsibility and navigate to the Suppliers Search page. 2. Click the Prospective Supplier Registrations link. The Prospective Supplier Registrations page appears.
  • 23. Registration 2-5 3. Search for registrations with the Rejected status. 4. Click the Review link for the rejected supplier. The New Supplier Request page opens. 5. Select the Reopen action from the Actions drop-down. A Warning page will open to ascertain if you want to continue. Two buttons are available on this page with following meanings: • No: This button will take you back to the Rejected Supplier Profile Page. • Yes: This button will take you to the next page: Reopened Supplier Request. 6. Click Yes in the Warning page. The Reopened Supplier Request page appears. 7. Review the details in the Reopened Supplier Request page. This page has the rejected supplier's profile in edit mode. Whenever a reconsidered request is opened, the page title is displayed as 'Reopened Supplier Request'. Otherwise it is shown as 'New Supplier Request'. Following actions are available from this page: • Supplier to Provide Details: This action is enabled on the registration request as per the business rules. On selecting this action, a notification will be sent to the supplier, for the following purposes: To inform the supplier about the buying organization's decision to reconsider their request. To provide the URL of the 'Registration Request Status' page to the supplier. • Send Status Link: When an action is selected, a notification containing the URL of the 'Registration Request Status' page is sent to the supplier. This action will always be enabled irrespective of the status of the registration request. • Submit: This action will submit the request for approval. • Save: You can save the registration request to work on it later. 8. Update details of the supplier, if required, including details of the primary contact before sending the notification for re-registering. The administrator can perform this action in case the supplier's primary contact has changed. Status of a Reopened Rejected Request In case of a rejected supplier being reconsidered, the application uses the following statuses: • Draft: This will be the status of a previously rejected supplier in the following two scenarios:
  • 24. 2-6 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide • The buyer administrator has decided to reconsider the request and selected the 'Reopen' action for the rejected supplier's registration request. As soon as the 'Reopen' action is select, the status will be change to 'Draft'. • When the 'Save' action is selected, the status will remain as 'Draft'. • Once a rejected supplier's request is 'reopened' the buyer administrator cannot 'Reject' it again. After being reopened the request will follow the approval process and only an approver can reject this request again. To ensure that the administrator does not reopen a rejected request by mistake, the application displays a warning message as soon as the administrator chooses the functionality to reopen the request. Registering Users The buying company initiates the process of adding new suppliers by inviting supplier users to register, or by registering supplier users directly. If you receive an invitation to access Oracle iSupplier Portal, you can respond to the invitation (and provide user profile information, such as name and contact details), or forward the invitation to another user in your company. For example, the buying company may send an invitation to the Vice President of Sales within your organization; he can forward it to the appropriate person in his company. The user who responds can change any of the details except the name of the supplier company for whom he or she is registering. If the buying company has multiple site definitions for your company, or if you have multiple subsidiaries, your buying company may give you access to view information for multiple site definitions. People who wish to register with the system must complete the Supplier User Registration Page and submit it for approval
  • 25. Registration 2-7 Supplier User Registration Page A buyer administrator will approve or reject the your registration request. You receive a notification of the buyer administrator's actions. The notification also includes a URL to reset your password. Use the URL to reset the password; this new password can be used to login to iSupplier Portal. Buyers can designate a supplier user with user account from the Contact Directory to receive the business classification reminder notifications. To designate the supplier users expand the user account information node and select Certification Reminders check box in the User Notification region. Directly Registered Supplier Users If the buying company has enough information about a user at your company, the buyer can chose to register the user directly, in which case the users receives a notification with the URL to reset the password. Use the link provided in the notification to change your password. Supplier Registered Supplier Users If additional people in your company need access to Oracle iSupplier Portal, they should contact the Supplier Profile and User Administrator at your company. This administrator can create new user accounts for your users. Once the account is created, the user will be sent a notification containing system access information, and a URL to change your password. Use the URL to change the password, that you can use for subsequent logins.
  • 27. Navigating and Searching 3-1 3 Navigating and Searching This chapter covers the following topics: • Overview • Using the Oracle iSupplier Portal Home Page • Setting Up User Preferences • Searching Overview This section includes information to help you learn how to navigate and search in Oracle iSupplier Portal. After you learn the basic techniques, you will be able to search for transaction information, and respond accordingly. This section includes the following topics: • Using the Oracle iSupplier Portal Home Page, page 3-1 • Setting Up User Preferences, page 3-4 • Searching, page 3-5 Using the Oracle iSupplier Portal Home Page When you access the Oracle iSupplier Portal application using the username and password provided to you, the Oracle iSupplier Portal Home page displays. Depending on your authorizations, the Admin tab may not be displayed.
  • 28. 3-2 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide Oracle iSupplier Portal Home Page Quick Links This section is displayed on the right and provides a high-level diagram of the procure- to-pay flow through the Oracle iSupplier Portal application. Click any link to go directly to the corresponding page. Notifications Notifications are messages waiting for your review. Some notifications are view-only, while other notifications require action. To view your notifications, click the linked subject to open the Notification Details page. This page provides complete notification details, as well as the appropriate action button.
  • 29. Navigating and Searching 3-3 Notification Details Page On the Notification Details page you can request further information or assign the notification to another user. If you select an action on the Notification Details page and click, you are returned to the Notifications Summary page. On this page you can view all your notifications. You can use the View menu to see • All your notifications • Information only (FYI) notifications • Notifications you have sent • Open notifications • Notifications requiring action by you (To Do Notifications) To process a notification, select the notification and assign it to another user, or open and view/process it. Once you have processed the necessary notification you can: • Continue to respond to any additional notifications you have. • Continue working by clicking any of the tabs. Orders at a Glance This section displays the five most recent purchase orders. Click a purchase order number to view purchase order details. Shipments at a Glance This section displays recent shipments. Click a shipment number to view a list of your recent shipments. To view a complete list of your Notifications, Orders at a Glance, or Shipments at a Glance, click Full List.
  • 30. 3-4 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide Home Page Links The links at the top of the Home page provides the following information: Home Page Links Global Buttons The following buttons display on the home page and all Oracle iSupplier Portal pages: • Home - Returns you to the main portal where you can select another responsibility or application. • Logout - logs you out of the application. • Preferences - Displays the Preferences page. See Setting Up User Preferences , page 3-4 for information on setting your user preferences. • Help - Accesses the help index page. Home Page Tabs In addition to using the Quick Links, you can use the tabs on the home page to quickly access related task areas. Home Page Tabs Setting Up User Preferences You can change your user settings or preferences at any time using the Preferences icon. You can change the following preferences: • General - You can select your language, territory, time zone, client character encoding (the character set that's used in your page display), and accessibility features (such as screen reader use). Note: Date and time values are always displayed to you in the time zone you set in your user preferences, even if your buying company is in a different time zone.
  • 31. Navigating and Searching 3-5 • Notification - You can select how you want to receive your notifications (for example, in HTML or plain text e-mail). • Formatting - You can define your date format and number format. • Password - You can reset or change your password. A valid password must be at least five, but no more than 30, characters. Passwords can be numeric, alphanumeric, or special characters. To change your preferences • Click the Preferences icon. • On the Preferences page, enter your name in the Known As field. Preferences Page • Complete or update the required fields. • Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to return to the system without making any changes. Searching Oracle iSupplier Portal provides extensive search criteria on all pages to help you retrieve information. Once you have your search results displayed, you can sort them by clicking any of the linked column headings. When entering search values, you can use the percent sign (%) as a wildcard to search
  • 32. 3-6 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide for generic items. For example, to search for all orders beginning with 27 and end in a 5 (such as 275, 2715, 27125) enter 27%5. The % wildcard does not control the number of wild characters. Note the search logic attempts to find matches containing values in any position. There are three types of search functions available to you. Quick Search The Quick Search feature is available to you from the Home page. Using Quick Search, you can look for • Purchase orders • Shipments • Invoices • Payments Quick Search To use the Quick Search: 1. Select the search type from the Search menu. 2. Enter a search value. 3. Click Go. SimpleSearch The Simple Search feature occurs on many pages and allows you so specify multiple search fields and enter criteria for each. You can use any or all of the fields available to you. The system displays only those results that match all the criteria you entered.
  • 33. Navigating and Searching 3-7 Simple Search Advanced Search Advanced Search allows you to build complex search queries containing multiple search criteria. You can select which fields you wish to search on and enter search values for each. Such fields include (among others): • PO Number • Receipt Number • Item Number You can use the default search fields that appear for that page's Advanced Search function, or apply additional search fields from the "Add Another" menu for the page. Search operators enable you to specify the matching conditions for a search. Available search operators are: • is - Use this operator for an exact match. • is not - Use this operator to exclude a specific match. • contains - Use this operator to find a partial match. • starts with - Use this operator to find a partial match only at the beginning. • ends with - Use this operator to find a partial match that only ends with your criteria. • greater than - Use this operator to include results greater in value than a value specified. • less than - Use this operator to include results lower in value than a value specified.
  • 34. 3-8 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide • after - Use this operator to include results with a date after the specified date. • before - Use this operator to include results with a date before the specified date. Note that you can use the same search field twice to specify a search range, for example a Ship Date range. Also note that you can choose to require the results to match all search criteria (resulting in a more focused, narrower set of results) by selecting the option "Show table data when all conditions are met," or allow a match of any of the search criteria (resulting in a larger set of results) by selecting the option "Show table date when any condition is met." Advanced Search
  • 35. Order Information 4-1 4 Order Information This chapter covers the following topics: • Order Information • Purchase Orders • Viewing Purchase Orders • Printing Purchase Orders • Acknowledging Purchase Orders • Submitting Change Requests • Splitting Shipments and Pay Items • Using Work Confirmations (Complex-Work Purchase Orders Only) • Canceling Orders or Shipments • Managing Deliverables • Work Orders • Agreements • Purchase Order Revision History • Requests For Quotes (RFQ) • Viewing Time Cards Order Information The real-time data provided in Oracle iSupplier Portal allows you to communicate procure-to-pay information with the buying company while viewing the purchase order flow. Using purchase order information, you can acknowledge purchase orders, make change requests to purchase orders, split shipments, or cancel orders. You can also view supplier agreements and the revision history of a purchasing document.
  • 36. 4-2 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide This section includes the following topics: • Purchase Orders, page 4-2 Managing Deliverables, page 4-31 • Work Orders, page 4-32 • Agreements, page 4-32 • Purchase Order Revision History, page 4-35 • Request for Quotes, page 4-36 • Viewing Time Cards, page 4-37 Purchase Orders When your buying company enters a purchase order in Oracle Purchasing, the purchase order details are available to you in Oracle iSupplier Portal. The View Purchase Orders page display the most recent 25 purchase orders (use the Previous and Next links to view additional purchase orders). Oracle iSupplier Portal enables you to track your purchase orders throughout the entire procure-to-pay flow. The purchase order section includes: • Viewing Purchase Orders, page 4-3 • Printing Purchase Orders, page 4-7 • Acknowledging Purchase Orders, page 4-7 • Submitting Change Requests, page 4-12 • Splitting Shipments, page 4-21 Note: For the pages mentioned in this chapter, you may view details to various attributes by clicking the link associated with that attribute. Accessing purchasing orders: The View Purchase Orders page is the central page from which you access and process your purchase orders. To access a purchase order for further processing: 1. From the iSupplier Portal Home
  • 37. Order Information 4-3 page, click the Orders tab. 2. From the View menu, choose which purchase orders to display: • All Purchase Orders • Purchase Orders to Acknowledge • Purchase Orders Pending Change An advanced search , page 3-7 facility is available to refine your search even further. You also have the option to export the displayed data. On the resulting View Purchase Orders page, select the purchase order you wish to process: • To acknowledge , page 4-7 a purchase order, click Acknowledge • To submit a change request, page 4-12 click Request Changes. • To view purchase order changes,, page 4-18click View Change History. Viewing Purchase Orders Supplier Brokers have access to information about multiple suppliers, therefore a search filter for transaction documents is enabled for all supplier broker logins. This allows supplier brokers to search for, and filter required data only. If you have logged in as a supplier broker, then this page displays the Supplier drop- down, the Supplier Site field, and the View drop-down. Select a supplier from the list. This is a mandatory field. The Supplier Site field is optional. The View drop-down enables you limit your view to all purchase orders, purchase orders to acknowledge, or purchase orders pending supplier change. Viewing Order Details You can view details of a purchase order such as terms and conditions, lines, shipments, and attachments from the Purchase Order Details page. To view the details of a purchase order: 1. Access , page 4-2 the purchase order you want to view by clicking its purchase order number .
  • 38. 4-4 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide The View Order Details page shows you detailed information about the purchase order, including both header and line information. The Order Information section shows general information, terms and conditions, ship-to (non-complex work purchase orders), work location (for complex-work purchase orders) and bill-to information. The Linked Attributes column in the PO Details region has a Linked Attributes link. Click this link to view the attributes associated to the Job - Purchasing Category - Shopping Category combination. External descriptors that are associated to the Job – Purchasing Category – Shopping Category combination are displayed along with the job or item related details. Internal descriptors are not seen by suppliers at all, they are visible to buyers only In the Summary container, you can view the: • Total - amount of the total purchase order. • Received - amount for the items of the purchase order that have been received. • Invoiced amount - amount for the items on the purchase order that have been invoiced. • Payment status - status of the invoices against the PO. By selecting options from the Actions menu, you can: • Request changes. See Submitting Change Requests, page 4-12 for more information. • Cancel the purchase order. • View the change history for this purchase order. See Purchase Order Revision
  • 39. Order Information 4-5 History, page 4-35 for more information. • View work orders. See Work Orders, page 4-32 for more information. • Print the purchase order. See Printing Purchase Orders, page 4-7 for more information. • View related contracts. The View Related Contracts page for a purchase order displays the summary of the approved or signed related contracts associated with the purchase order. Use this action to track or view related contracts such as master agreements and umbrella agreements. You can view only contracts related to the organizations to which you have access. • Create a work confirmation (complex-work purchase orders only). • View work confirmations (complex-work purchase orders only). • View current receipts. • View current invoices. • View current payment status. • View current shipment status. Line Information
  • 40. 4-6 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide Viewing Order Details (Complex Work) The Summary container on the View Details page for a complex work PO displays different information. • Approved amount - total approved amount of work confirmations against the PO. • Financed amount - total pay item amounts financed plus advanced billed. • Advanced billed amount - total advance amounts billed at the line level. • Progress payment - total amount financed or billed of all pay items. • Delivered - amount of the delivery shipment approved through the work confirmation. Delivery shipments are created for orders where progress payments are considered contract financing. This field is hidden by default. • Recouped - amount of advances and pay items recouped to date. This field is hidden by default. • Retained - amount of pay items retained to date. This field is hidden by default. The Actions menu options include: • Request changes. • Cancel the purchase order.
  • 41. Order Information 4-7 • View the change history for this purchase order. • Print the purchase order. • Create a work confirmation. • View work confirmations. • View current receipts. • View current invoices. • View current payment status. The PO Details sections shows line specific information. Click Show to see the receiving, invoicing and payment information for a particular line, or pay item information for a complex work line. Line Information (Complex Work Line) Printing Purchase Orders You can view and print Portable Document Format (PDF) versions of purchasing documents, including blanket agreements. If your buying company has implemented Oracle Procurement Contracts, you can also print the contract terms or clauses that the buying company has defined on the purchasing documents. To print purchase orders: 1. Access , page 4-2 the purchase order. 2. Select View PDF from the Actions menu, and click Go.. 3. On the prompt window, you can choose to open the document immediately, or save it locally for later printing. Acknowledging Purchase Orders When creating a purchase order, buying companies can request acknowledgment of the purchase order. If so, you as a supplier will receive a notification requiring your response. The purchase order may include a date by which you need to acknowledge or
  • 42. 4-8 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide sign it. You acknowledge purchase orders to communicate to the buying company that you have received, reviewed the details of, and accepted or rejected a purchase order. You cannot communicate changes to the purchase order during acknowledgment. To communicate changes, click the Request Changes button in the Purchase Orders Summary page or select the Request Changes action from the Actions dropdown in the Purchase Orders Details page. If you have logged in as a supplier broker, use the actions in the preceding paragraphs (as a supplier would use) to acknowledge purchase orders. The Reject Entire Order action is made available by the buyer using responsibility functions. Using the Reject Entire Order action, you can let the buyer know if you are unable to fulfill any part of the purchase order. If you have logged in as a supplier broker, you can reject the entire order. Use the Reject Entire Order action to communicate the rejection to the buyer. You can either acknowledge the order online, or accept or reject the order using the notification. The notification does not allow shipment level acknowledgment, which must be entered online. When you respond, the purchase order is automatically updated, and a notice is sent to the buyer. You can submit acknowledgments for an entire order, or for individual shipments. For example, if you can fulfill only part of a purchase order, accept the shipments you can fulfill, and reject the others (note that shipment level acknowledgement cannot be performed using the acknowledgement notification). When the supplier clicks the Save button, the order will be saved in an intermittent state and supplier can work on the order later. Suppliers can save orders without needing to select an action from the Actions dropdown for all shipments. Later when a supplier returns to this order, the supplier can modify all the responses that have been entered earlier for the shipments, and also enter responses for those shipments which were not acknowledged in earlier rounds. Please note that the buyer will not be able to take any action on an order that has been saved by the supplier unless the supplier submits it. If the order is set to be acknowledged at the document and shipment levels, you cannot indicate change requests during acknowledgment. For complex work purchase orders, you can acknowledge pay items. Note: The value of the need-by date is defaulted to the promised date field on supplier acceptance in the acknowledgment process. To acknowledge purchase orders: 1. Access the purchase order you wish to acknowledge.
  • 43. Order Information 4-9 Acknowledge Purchase Order Page 2. On the Acknowledge page, you can accept or reject an entire order, or you can accept or reject individual shipments. 3. To accept/reject an individual line's shipment or pay item, click Show for the line. Acknowledging Shipments and Pay Items 1. For the shipment/pay item, select Accept or Reject from the Action menu. If rejecting a shipment or pay item, provide a reason. 2. Click Submit. Acknowledging pay items If the terms for a complex-work purchase order terms require "document or shipment" acknowledgement, you can accept/reject at the pay item level. To accept/reject an individual pay item, click Show for that line. Select Accept or Reject from the Action menu at the end of the line (if you reject the pay item, you must also provide a reason).
  • 44. 4-10 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide If you either accept or reject all the pay items, the purchase order status changes to "acknowledged." Pay item changes are immediately submitted to the buyer for acknowledgement even if the rest of the order is only partially acknowledged. If the buyer rejects the change, the purchase order status reverts back to "Requires Acknowledgement." Suppliers can: • Accept or reject the purchase order at document level that has lines with pay items as well as with shipments. • Accept or reject an individual pay item or schedule in a purchase order document. • Acknowledge pay items and schedules. Signing Purchase Orders If your buying company has implemented Oracle Procurement Contracts, your buyer may ask that you electronically sign a purchasing document while acknowledging it. Legally binding purchasing documents must be signed by both the buyer and supplier. After you sign the document, your buyer will be notified. The purchase order will be ready for execution after both the buyer and supplier have electronically signed the purchasing document. Note: If your buyer asks that you electronically sign a purchasing document, you cannot respond at a specific shipment level, you have to accept or reject the entire order. To sign a purchase order: 1. Click the Orders tab, and then click Purchase Orders in the task bar below the tabs. 2. Search for and select the purchase order with a status of Requires Signature, and then click Acknowledge.
  • 45. Order Information 4-11 Purchase Order Signature Page 3. On the Acknowledge page, click Sign Document. Sign Document Page 4. Click any attachments you would like to view to review the attachments for terms and conditions. 5. Click Accept or Reject. Sign Document Page 6. On the Notification Signing page, enter your username and password and click Submit. 7. You will receive confirmation that your purchase order has been acknowledged.
  • 46. 4-12 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide Submitting Change Requests Oracle iSupplier Portal enables you to request changes to purchase orders when modifications are needed to fulfill an order. You can make changes before and after acknowledgment. You can change a single purchase order, or, depending on the change you need to make, you can update multiple change orders at the same time. If you have logged in as a supplier broker, you can submit a single change request only. Use the steps in the following paragraphs to submit a single change request. To submit a single change request: 1. Click the Orders tab, and then click Purchase Orders in the task bar below the tabs. 2. On the View Purchase Orders page, search for and select the purchase order for which you wish to request changes. 3. Select the purchase order and Click Request Changes. 4. On the Request Changes page, enter your changes. Request Changes for Standard Purchase Order
  • 47. Order Information 4-13 5. You may request changes to the following values : • Price/Price Breaks on Blanket Agreements • Supplier Item • Supplier Order Reference Number 6. In the reason text box, enter a reason for your change request. 7. If you wish to request changes to shipments or pay items, click Show. You can request changes to • Price/Price Breaks on Blanket Agreements • Quantity Ordered • Promised Date • Supplier Order Line • Note that you can also enter change request information in the Additional Change Request text box. 8. Enter the changed values as appropriate. 9. Enter a reason for your change. 10. Select the appropriate action. 11. Click Submit. The supplier can submit an order without selecting an action (or providing acknowledgement) for all the shipments. In such a case the supplier is supposed to
  • 48. 4-14 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide provide acknowledgement for all the shipments for which he either requested change or did not select any value for, once the buyer has provided his response on the change request. Example: An order that consists of a line and four shipments was sent to a supplier for acknowledgement. The supplier performs the following action before submitting the change request: • 1st shipment – Accepted • 2nd shipment – Change • 3rd shipment – Rejected • 4th shipment – No value selected On receiving this request, the buyer approved all the changes. The purchase order was sent again to the supplier for acknowledgement. The supplier acknowledged shipment numbers 2 and 4. The supplier could not change the shipment number 1 and 3 because his decision (Accepted and Rejected) were final for those shipments. The shipments 1 and 3 were displayed to the supplier in read-only mode. When the supplier provided his acknowledgement (Accept/Reject) for all the shipments and submitted the order, only then the order was considered to be completely acknowledged. When the supplier clicks the Save button, the order is saved in an intermittent state and supplier is allowed to work on it later. The supplier can save an order without selecting a value in the Actions dropdown for all the shipments. Later when the supplier returns to this order to work on it, he can modify all the responses that he has entered earlier for the shipments, and also to enter the response for those shipments which he didn't acknowledge/change the previous time. Please note that buyer cannot take any action on an order that has been saved by the supplier, until the supplier submits the order. Submitting change requests for complex-work purchase orders
  • 49. Order Information 4-15 Request Changes for Complex-Work Purchase Order If Oracle Services Procurement is licensed and implemented, then a supplier can submit the following change requests for order documents for which Progress Payments and Schedules are enabled: • Request changes to goods with milestones for the order document that has lines with pay items. • Request changes to services with milestones or lump sum for the order document that has lines with pay items. • Request changes to services with rate based milestone for the order document that has lines with pay items. • Request changes to Ordered Quantity for the Order document that has lines with schedules. • Request changes to Need By date for the Order document that has lines with schedules. • Cancelling purchase order lines that have both pay item lines and shipment lines. • Canceling pay items and schedules. • Splitting of payment schedule.
  • 50. 4-16 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide • Splitting shipment schedule. • View the changes and Change history. Once the supplier submits the changes, the supplier user can view the latest approved revision of the purchase order. In addition, the supplier user can view details of the changes and the history of changes requested and the corresponding responses from both the supplier user and the buyer. Changing complex-work purchase orders If this is a complex-work purchase order you can only change the supplier item at the line level. If progress payments are treated as delivery, price updates are only allowed at the pay item level (any changes roll up to the line level). If pay items are considered contract financing, then price updates at both the line level and pay item level are allowed. • Price changes - For milestone and rate, price changes are not allowed if the pay item has been partially received or invoiced (that is, retroactive price changes are not allowed). For a lump sum, if the pay item has been partially received or invoiced, the new price should equal or greater than the amount received or invoiced to date. Changes in price are prorated to the distributions if the shipment has multiple distributions. The buyer can change the distribution amounts during response. • Quantity changes - Quantity changes are only allowed for Rate pay items. If the pay item has been partially received or invoiced, the new quantity should be greater than or equal to the larger of either the quantity received or the quantity invoiced. A change in quantity is prorated to distributions, if the pay item has multiple distributions. The buyer can enter new quantities when responding. Note: After submitting your changes, the purchase order status changes to Supplier Changes Pending until the buyer approves the changes. To update multiple purchase orders simultaneously: Many times, you may need to make the same change to a group of purchase orders. Depending on the type of change you need to make, you may be able to update multiple purchase orders simultaneously. You can perform multiple changes to standard purchase orders, agreements, and releases. For purchase order lines, you can change: • Unit Price (only for goods lines) • Supplier Part Number For purchase order shipments, you can change:
  • 51. Order Information 4-17 • Promised Date • Quantity Ordered (only for goods shipments) • Price (only for shipments with lines where value basis is fixed price). To update multiple purchase orders: 1. On the Purchase Orders page, click Multiple PO Change. Multiple Purchase Order Changes 2. You can search for shipments to acknowledge or change by selecting • Overdue Shipments • Shipments Dues in One Week • Shipments Requiring Acknowledgments • All Shipments from the View menu and clicking Go. 3. You search for a group of purchase orders, click the Lines tab and use the advanced search option to identify the group of purchase orders you wish to change.
  • 52. 4-18 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide Multiple Purchase Order Change Page 4. If you wish to change the same attribute for multiple purchase orders to the same value, 1. Enter the new value in the Default Value field. 2. Select the appropriate purchase orders. 3. Click Apply Default Values. 5. If you wish to update multiple purchase order attributes to different values, enter the new values directly into the fields in the Lines table. 6. Enter a short text explanation for the change in the Reason field. 7. Click Apply. Change Requests for Services Suppliers can request changes to the price for service lines and create new service schedules by splitting an existing schedule. To view change order history: This view enables you to view the history of change requests submitted on a document, and the corresponding buyer response. 1. Click the Orders tab, and then click Purchase Orders in the task bar below the tabs. 2. Search for and select a purchase order, and then click View Change History.
  • 53. Order Information 4-19 3. View the change order history details on the PO Change Order History page. Note: If Oracle Services Procurement is licensed and implemented, then when the order document has both "Schedules" and "Progress Payments" enabled, the column name "Pay item" in the multiline changes to "Schedule/Pay item". PO Change History Page 4. Click OK to return to the Purchase Orders page. Statuses for Acknowledgment and Change Request processes The following table outlines the statuses for the Acknowledgement and Change Request processes for both the buyer and the supplier: Action Taken Supplier Status Supplier Change Request Status Buyer Status Buyer Acknowledgme nt Status PO Submitted (Supplier Acknowledgeme nt required) Requires Acknowledgeme nt - Approved Requires Acknowledgeme nt Supplier Saves Order Requires Acknowledgeme nt Draft Approved Supplier Locked Supplier Requests Change Requires Acknowledgeme nt Changes Submitted In Process Requires Acknowledgeme nt
  • 54. 4-20 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide Action Taken Supplier Status Supplier Change Request Status Buyer Status Buyer Acknowledgme nt Status Buyer Accepts All Changes Requires Acknowledgeme nt - Approved Requires Acknowledgeme nt Buyer Rejects All Changes Requires Acknowledgeme nt Changes Rejected Approved Requires Acknowledgeme nt Buyer Approves Few Changes Requires Acknowledgeme nt - Approved Requires Acknowledgeme nt Supplier Accepts Entire Order Accepted - Approved Accepted Supplier Rejects Entire Order Rejected - Approved Rejected Supplier Acknowledges Complete Order (Accepts few shipments and Rejects others Accepted - Approved Acknowledged Changes to Shipments that have linked Drop Ship Lines When you submit a change request for a drop ship purchase order shipment, where you need to update or change the Promised Date, the following validations occur in the system. A drop ship purchase order integrates with Oracle Order Management, thus the following validations take place: 1. When you make a change to the Promised Date and the change is within the Buyer Auto-Acceptance Tolerances set for Supplier Change Order, an Oracle Order Management API is called to validate if the requested changes can be allowed on the sales order. If the validations are successful, the change order request by the supplier is automatically approved and the modified Promised Date is updated as Scheduled Ship Date in the sales order. If the validations are not successful, the error message from the Oracle Order Management API is displayed in the Change Request page for the supplier to take corrective action.
  • 55. Order Information 4-21 2. When you make a change to the Promised Date, and the change is not within the Buyer Auto-Acceptance Tolerances set for Supplier Change Order (Setup > Tolerances and Routings > Supplier Change Order), an Oracle Order Management API is called to validate if the requested changes can be allowed on a sales order. If the validations are successful, the change order request by the supplier is routed to the buyer/requester for approval. When the buyer/requester accepts/rejects the changes from the workflow notification the following scenarios occur during the submission check of the purchase order: • An Oracle Order Management API is called and if all the validations are successful, the value of the updated Promised Date is carried over to the Scheduled Ship Date of the sales order. • If the call to the Oracle Order Management API is not successful, the error message from the Oracle Order Management API is displayed at the top of the notification. 3. When you make a change to the Promised Date, and the change is not within the Buyer Auto-Acceptance Tolerances set for Supplier Change Order, an Oracle Order Management API is called to validate if the requested changes can be allowed on a sales order. If the validations are successful, the change order request by the supplier is routed to the buyer for approval. When the buyer accepts/rejects the changes from the "Respond to Supplier changes" page the following scenarios occur during the submission check of the purchase order: • An Oracle Order Management API is called and if all the validations are successful, the value of the updated Promised Date is carried over to the Scheduled Ship Date of the sales order. • If the call to the Oracle Order Management API is not successful, the error message from the Oracle Order Management API is displayed in the page for the buyer to take corrective action. Splitting Shipments and Pay Items You can request to split a shipment. For example, if you can only partially ship the quantity ordered for the given date, you can enter a split shipment change request. This request will let the buyer know the number of items you can deliver and what date you will deliver them. To request to split a shipment: 1. Click the Orders tab, and then click Purchase Orders in the task bar below the tabs. 2. Search for and select a purchase order, and then click Request Changes. 3. On the Request Changes page, click Show to display shipment details.
  • 56. 4-22 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide 4. Click the split icon on the desired shipment line. (Another row is added for your split shipment). Split Shipments Page 5. In the Quantity Ordered field of the first shipment line, enter a new quantity. 6. In the Quantity Ordered field of the second shipment line, enter the new quantity. 7. Change the Promised Date. 8. Enter the Supplier Order Line. 9. Enter a reason for splitting. 10. Select an action for change. 11. Click Submit. Note: You can split a shipment as many times as needed. To create more shipment lines, click the split icon. Splitting Pay Items for Complex Work Purchase Orders The pay items for a complex-work purchase order are stored at the line details level the same way as shipment information. Therefore, you can use the instructions above to split an existing pay item to create a new payment schedule. A new pay item is created with a price of 0 and quantity or 0. You can modify the following fields: • Description • Price (if lump sum, the price on the original pay item should be greater than the larger of either the amount received or the amount invoiced). • Promised date.
  • 57. Order Information 4-23 Using Work Confirmations (Complex-Work Purchase Orders Only) Over the course of a complex work project, various pay items defined for the contract come due. To notify a buyer that a pay item needs to be processed for a completed unit of work, you can create a work confirmation. Note: If there are any pay items linked to receipt of materials, then you cannot create work confirmations for those as long as the material is not fully received. Work confirmation can be created for the pay items only if the schedules mapped to the pay item are fully received. You can select a pay item only when all the schedules mapped to the Pay item are in the Closed for Receiving or Cancelled status. You cannot create a work confirmation if any of the mapped schedules to the pay item are in the Frozen, Open, or Finally Closed status. To search for existing work confirmations: 1. From the home page, click the Orders tab, and then click the Work Confirmation subtab. The Work Confirmations page displays with the views listed. You can search for your work confirmations by using the View drop-down and clicking Go. 2. Alternatively, you can search for your work confirmations by using the Advanced Search button. When you click the Advanced Search button, the Work Confirmations Advanced Search region displays. You could use the standard search criteria, or use the Add Another drop-down to search using additional search criteria, such as PO Number, Order Line Number, Work Confirmation, etc. 3. Supplier Brokers have access to information about multiple suppliers, therefore a search filter for transaction documents is enabled for all supplier broker logins. This allows supplier brokers to search for, and filter required data only. If you have logged in as a supplier broker, this page displays Supplier drop-down, Supplier Site field, and the View drop-down. Select a Supplier from the drop-down, this is a mandatory field. The Supplier Site field is optional. The View drop-down enables you to select Last 25 Work Confirmations, Draft Work Confirmations, Rejected Work Confirmations, All Work Confirmations. This enables you to search for specific supplier information. To create a work confirmation: 1. Access the purchase order. 2. On the PO Details page, select Create Work Confirmation from the Actions menu and click Go. 3. From the View menu, select either
  • 58. 4-24 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide • Pay Items Due This Week • Pay Items Due This Month • All Pay Items 4. You can also enter and track the progress of the complex work using the following fields: • Previously Requested / Delivered • Previous Progress % • Current Requested / Delivered • Material Stored Note: The Material Stored field allows the supplier to request a payment for material which has been purchased and stored on site for use. Using the work confirmation, the supplier can enter the requested amount based on work actually completed, and has an option for requesting payment for material purchased but not yet consumed in work. • Current Progress % • Total Requested / Delivered • Total Progress % You can enter / update the values of the Current Progress % and Total Progress % fields, they will be recalculated. 5. Click Go. 6. On the Create Work Confirmation page, select one or more pay items and click Next.
  • 59. Order Information 4-25 Create Work Confirmation page 7. Enter a work confirmation ID. 8. Enter a request date for the work confirmation in the Date field. You can specify the request date as the current date or a past date, however, the date cannot be a future date. Important: Your system administrator can define the POS: Use Approval Date for Work Confirmation Processing profile option to use the approval date for work confirmation processing instead of the submission date. For more information, see Oracle iSupplier Portal Implementation Guide. 9. If this work confirmation reflects a particular span of time, optionally enter performance period dates. 10. Accept the default or enter a value for Requested/Delivered. . 11. Update the Progress Percentage column, if appropriate. 12. Enter comments in the Comments text area. The comments specified at this header level are displayed as part of the notification to the approver. You can enter comments for the work confirmation as a buyer, as a supplier or using the iSupplier Portal - Internal View responsibility. 13. Attachments added to the Complex Purchase Order at the pay item level are displayed to the buyer when work confirmations are created.
  • 60. 4-26 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide 14. Click Save to keep a draft work confirmation in the system. You can return to the draft later for make further updates or submit it. When you have finished defining your work confirmation, click Submit. Once you click Submit, the approver is notified of the work confirmation and must approve it. 15. Internal users, buyers, or contractors can create work confirmation even if the complex purchase order transaction has a status Frozen, however suppliers cannot. To view or update an existing work confirmation: You can view existing work confirmations. 1. From the Orders tab, click the Work Confirmations subtab. 2. From the View menu, select either • Last 25 Work Confirmations • Draft Work Confirmations • Rejected Work Confirmations • All Work Confirmations 3. The search results show the progress of the complex work order using the following columns: • Previous Requested • Previous Delivered • Current Requested • Current Delivered • Total Progress % 4. Click the work confirmation number to access and view the work confirmation. You can select the work confirmation and click Update if you need to make changes to confirmation or address any issues with a rejected confirmation. You can modify details of a rejected work confirmation as well as add additional items. If the confirmation has a status of Processing, Rejected, or Pending Approval, then you can select the confirmation and delete it. 5. The supplier submits a work confirmation for approval, and the buyer rejects the work confirmation and adds header level comments stating the reason for rejection; these comments are visible to the supplier when the supplier updates the rejected work confirmation.
  • 61. Order Information 4-27 6. Buyers or other users using the iSupplier Portal – Internal View responsibility can use the action View Work Confirmation. The View Work Confirmation page displays the Approval History column. The Approval History icon, when clicked, displays the Approval History page that shows you the current and pending approvers. The Approval History icon does not display if the transaction has an error, or has a status of Draft or Processing. The Approval History icon is shown to users only if the status of the work confirmation document is: Pending Approval, Error, Rejected, Approved, Processed, Processing Error, Cancelled and Corrected. This icon is not visible if the status of the work confirmation document is Draft or Processing. The Approval History page has two regions: The first region displays the Approvers sequenced in order according to the date and timestamp of when they took action regarding the notification. This section also displays the approved person and the date of approval along with comments. The second region displays the current/pending approvers, the type of approvers and the approver with whom the document is pending. 7. Buyers or other users using the iSupplier Portal – Internal View responsibility can view the status column of the work confirmation documents. The status column is displayed as a link only for Error and Processing Error statuses. The link opens the View Errors page (if the system captures any errors). For all other status of the work confirmation document, the status column does not have a link. The View Errors page displays all the validation failures that are identified when running the Receiving Transaction Processor concurrent program. Internal users cannot perform any action, or take corrective actions using this page. To correct an existing work confirmation: You can correct existing work confirmations that are in the Processed or Approved status. 1. From the Orders tab, click the Work Confirmations subtab. 2. From the View menu, select the Work Confirmations I Have Approved option or the All my Work Confirmations option. 3. Click Go. 4. The search results show a list of work confirmations as per the option you select in step 2. Click the work confirmation number link of a work confirmation, with the status as processed or approved, to access the required work confirmation details. 5. Click the Correct button.
  • 62. 4-28 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide Work Confirmations page 6. Enter the required correction. You can correct details such as the requested/delivered amount/quantity, Date, and the percentage of progress, under the Current and Total headers of the work confirmation. • Ensure that the value you enter in the Requested/Delivered or the Progress (%) field is lesser than the approved value. • Ensure that you enter appropriate comments in the Comments field for each pay item submitted for correction. • Ensure that you select the pay items for which you want to submit a correction by selecting the appropriate check box. • You can update or correct the request date as the current date or a past date, however, the date cannot be a future date or earlier than the receipt creation date. The system validates the date to ensure that it is in an open GL period and in open accounting / receiving periods if the date is updated.
  • 63. Order Information 4-29 Work Confirmation Correction Details page 7. Click the Submit button. 8. You can verify the work confirmation correction after the status of the work confirmation changes to Corrected. You can view the correction details in the Work Confirmation Correction History region on the Work Confirmation Details window. Using the Response Page for Complex Work Purchase Orders For complex work purchase orders: • When the document style has both "Schedules" and "Progress Payments" enabled and if all the lines in the order document has "Schedule" related details then the header region caption displays "Ship-To Address" and "Bill To Address" • When the document style has both "Schedules" and "Progress Payments" enabled and if any of the lines in the order document has "Pay items" details then the header region caption displays "Work Location" instead of "Ship to Address" and "Bill To Location" instead of "Bill To Address" • When the Order document has both "Schedules" and "Progress Payments" enabled, then the column name "Pay item" in the changes to "Schedule/Pay item". Using AME for approving Work Confirmations Depending on business requirements, administrators can set up approvers and reviewers in AME for work confirmation approval. Organizations can use the predefined AME transaction type (WCAPPROVE) and Work
  • 64. 4-30 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide Confirmation Approval workflow process on the supplied components and their business requirements. Based on the setup, the Approvers region displays approvers, reviewers, and signers. Creators of the work confirmation have the flexibility to send Work Confirmation documents to approvers based on the AME setup. Approvers can edit Work Confirmation when they receive the approval notification. Approvers can approve, approve and forward, reject, or reassign the Work Confirmation approval notification. They can add their comments to the notification page. For information about AME, refer to the Oracle Approvals Management Implementation Guide. Canceling Orders or Shipments You can submit cancellation requests for an entire order or a particular shipment. You can also submit changes and cancellations at the same time. 1. Click the Orders tab, and then click Purchase Orders in the task bar below the tabs. 2. Search for and select a purchase order, and then click Request Cancellation. 3. On the Request Cancellation page, click Submit. Note: To cancel a few shipments, but not the entire order, click Show in the PO Details section, and then select Cancel from the Action list of values (on the shipment line you want to cancel). Enter a cancellation reason, and then click Submit.
  • 65. Order Information 4-31 Request Cancellation Page Canceling an order by a buyer or supplier If a buyer or supplier cancels a shipment and enters a reason for the cancellation, then the Reason column is populated in the Shipments table in the Order Details page. If a shipment is cancelled by a buyer or a supplier, the status of such a shipment is Cancelled. Managing Deliverables If your buying company has implemented Oracle Procurement Contracts, you may have deliverables assigned to you. Deliverables include both repository deliverables and purchase order deliverables. Deliverables are also tasks to be completed in order to achieve a certain outcome or business objective, and may be used to track projects for compliance reasons and risk reduction. For example, your buyer may ask that you send a monthly status report detailing the status of a certain shipment. In this case, your buyer will create a deliverable called "Send Status Report," and assign the deliverable to you. You will see the "Send Status Report" deliverable in the notifications section of the iSupplier Portal home page, and can manage the deliverable from there, or through the View Order Details page. You may attach your status report to the deliverable and change the status of the deliverable. To manage deliverables: Use the Manage Deliverables page to search for a specific deliverable and update it. To view repository contracts deliverables, select the appropriate contract document type. To manage deliverables, you can also search for deliverables for a specific purchase order in the Purchase Orders tab. 1. Click the Orders tab, and then click Purchase Orders.
  • 66. 4-32 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide 2. Select the PO number of the purchase order that includes deliverables that you want to manage. 3. On the View Order Details page, select Manage Deliverables from the Actions menu, and click Go. 4. On the Deliverables page, click the deliverable that you want to update. 5. Update and add attachments to the deliverable as necessary, and then change its status to Submitted. 6. Click Apply. You will receive confirmation that your deliverable has been updated. Your buyer will also receive notification that the status of the deliverable has been updated. Work Orders Using work orders, buyers and suppliers can monitor outside processing from third parties whose Work In Process (WIP) status and delivery tracking information is critical to their supply chain process flow. Outside processing activities are the activities of the third-party suppliers who provide services needed to complete the final product or maintenance activity. To view work orders, click the Orders tab, and then click Work Orders in the task bar directly below the tabs. Using the search criteria, you can view details of the orders, schedules, WIP details, operations instructions, components, and component instructions by selecting the links provided. You can also reschedule an order. Work Orders Page Agreements Supplier agreements are purchase agreements you have made with the buying company. On the Supplier Agreements page, you can review the details of those
  • 67. Order Information 4-33 agreements, and the corresponding releases (orders) that have been created for a particular agreement. To view agreements, click the Orders tab, and then Agreements in the task bar directly below the tabs. Use the search criteria to get a summarized list of agreements. For each agreement, you can select to view the releases created to date for that agreement. You can export details from any page. Blanket Agreement page Supplier Brokers have access to information about multiple suppliers, therefore a search filter for transaction documents is enabled for all supplier broker logins. This allows supplier brokers to search for, and filter required data only. If you have logged in as a supplier broker, this page displays the Supplier dropdown and Supplier Site field. Select a Supplier from the dropdown, this is a mandatory field. The Supplier Site field is optional. Blanket Purchase Agreements External descriptors that are associated to the Job – Purchasing Category – Shopping Category combination are displayed along with the job/item related details. You can see the external descriptors in the line details page. Internal descriptors are not seen by suppliers at all, they are visible to buyers only. Suppliers cannot access, download, or edit internal descriptors. Descriptors are external by default, unless they are defined as Internal. The Linked Attributes column in the PO Details region has a Linked Attributes hyperlink. If you click the hyperlink, a popup displays, showing you the attributes associated to the Job - Purchasing Category - Shopping Category combination. Editing Agreements Buying organizations can provide suppliers with the ability to author their own content online, either via bulk file upload or on-line authoring. The industry standard formats
  • 68. 4-34 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide supported in the upload mode include OAG XML, cXML, CIF and text file. Suppliers can upload and modify their catalog and buyers only need to approve the upload or change requests. Content provided by the supplier is subject to the buyer's approval before it is made available to the requesters. To edit catalog information: 1. Access the blanket purchase agreement. 2. On the Blanket Purchase Agreement page, click the purchase number link in the header. 3. On the View Order Details page, select Edit Agreement from the Actions menu, then the Go button, you will be brought to the catalog authoring page and start creating or modifying a catalog. Update Agreement page 4. After you submit the change, the buyer will receive a notification. The buyer can now approve the change through a notification or through the pending change page. Downloading Blanket Agreement Lines You can download agreement lines along with base and user defined descriptors in the format expected by Upload Catalog process. Use the following steps: • As a buyer, create a Global Blanket Purchase Agreement and enable Supplier Authoring in the agreement. • Login as supplier and search for the agreement. • Click the Edit Agreement icon in the search results. • Click Download Lines, this will run a concurrent program and the concurrent request ID shows in the page. • Click the View Requests link, the request details will show. Click View Output, and
  • 69. Order Information 4-35 save the output file. Note: Internal Descriptors cannot be downloaded. When suppliers upload agreement lines, the internal descriptors are unaffected by suppliers. Purchase Order Revision History The PO Revision History page enables you to search for details on the revision history of a purchase order. If Oracle Services Procurement is licensed and implemented, users can see changes to the Linked Schedules and Payment terms, which includes Advance and Retention for the lines for which Enable Schedules check box is selected. The Enable Schedules check box is available for a complex PO in Oracle Purchasing Buyer Work Center. For more information, refer to the Entering Purchase Order topic in the Oracle Purchasing User's Guide. You can see changes to the Linked Attributes (Descriptors) for Rate based Temp Labor lines in the Purchase Order Revision History page. If there are any changes made to the descriptors associated to a Job – Purchasing Category – Shopping Category combination, the system shows the changes to the attributes in this page. Note that any changes to the descriptor value results in the purchase order revision number being incremented. Using the search criteria, you can get a summarized list of purchase orders that have been revised. You may choose to compare each revised PO to the original PO, the previous PO, or last signed PO (if the revised PO has been signed). You can also view all changes made to the PO. 1. From the iSupplier Portal Home page, click the Orders tab, then click the Purchase History subtab. 2. Enter search criteria to identify the purchase order(s) you wish to inspect. Click Go. Supplier Brokers have access to information about multiple suppliers, therefore a search filter for transaction documents is enabled for all supplier broker logins. This allows supplier brokers to search for, and filter required data only. If you have logged in as a supplier broker, this page displays Supplier dropdown, and the Supplier Site dropdown. Select a Supplier from the dropdown, this is a mandatory field. The Supplier Site dropdown is optional. This enables you to search for specific supplier information.
  • 70. 4-36 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide Purchase Order Change History Page 3. From the PO Revision History page, for any particular version, you can compare it to its previous version, compare it to the original purchase order, or you can generate a detailed listing of all changes to the purchase order. Requests For Quotes (RFQ) Viewing requests for quotes (RFQs) enables you to select possible negotiations to participate in with the buying company. To view RFQs, click the Orders tab, and then click RFQ in the task bar directly below the tabs. Enter search criteria in the search fields and click Go. The RFQ Summary page provides the details of all RFQs created by the buying company in its ERP application. Click any of the links on the RFQ Summary page to get more details about the RFQ.
  • 71. Order Information 4-37 RFQ Summary Results Page Viewing Time Cards To be paid for services rendered, contractors can record hours worked using timecards. You may access these time cards if the Timecards task appears under the Orders Tab. You will be able to view timecard information and check the amount of time confirmed by the hiring manager. To view timecards, click the Orders tab, and then click Timecards in the task bar directly below the tabs. Use the search criteria to get a summarized list of timecards. Click View Timecard to get more details about the timecard. You can export details from any page.
  • 73. Shipping Information 5-1 5 Shipping Information This chapter covers the following topics: • Shipping Overview • Shipping Information • Using Advance Shipment Notices and Advance Shipment Billing Notices • Creating Advance Shipment Notices and Advance Shipment Billing Notices • Uploading Advance Shipment Notices and Advance Shipment Billing Notices • Canceling Advance Shipment Notices and Advance Shipment Billing Notices • Uploading Routing Requests • Viewing Routing Responses • Viewing Delivery Schedules • Viewing Overdue Receipts • Receiving Information • Viewing Receipts • Viewing Returns • Viewing On-Time Delivery Performance • Quality Information Shipping Overview This section includes the following topics: • Shipping Information, page 5-2 • Receiving Information, page 5-13 • Quality Information, page 5-16
  • 74. 5-2 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide Shipping Information Oracle iSupplier Portal enables you to view your existing shipments. Using your shipments you can create or cancel advance shipment notices. The system enables you to view other shipment information such as delivery schedules. Using shipping features, you can alert the buyer to upcoming shipments and expedite receipts and payments for the buying company. Shipping information details all of your shipping transactions on Oracle iSupplier Portal. You can create or cancel shipment notices as well as view shipment delivery schedules and overdue shipment receipts. Supplier Brokers have access to information about multiple suppliers, therefore a search filter for transaction documents is enabled for all supplier broker logins. This allows supplier brokers to search for, and filter required data only. If you have logged in as a supplier broker, this page displays Supplier dropdown, Supplier Site dropdown, along with other search fields. Select a Supplier from the dropdown, this is a mandatory field. The Supplier Site dropdown is optional. This enables you to search for specific supplier information. Supplier Brokers can filter their search using the following pages: Create Advanced Shipment Notice, Create Advanced Shipment Billing Notice, View/Cancel Advanced Shipment Notice, Returns, and Receipts. The shipping information section includes: • Using Advance Shipment Notices and Advance Shipment Billing Notices, page 5- 5 • Uploading Routing Requests, page 5-10 • Viewing Routing Responses, page 5-11 • Viewing Delivery Schedules, page 5-11 • Viewing Overdue Receipts, page 5-12 Using Advance Shipment Notices and Advance Shipment Billing Notices When you enter an Advance Shipment Notice (ASN) or Advance Shipment Billing Notice (ASBN), you alert the buying company of upcoming shipment deliveries. To create an ASN or ASBN, select the purchase order shipments being shipped and provide the appropriate shipment details. Note: If Oracle Services Procurement is licensed and implemented, you can create ASN or ASBN for shipments on a complex purchase order
  • 75. Shipping Information 5-3 having lines with shipment details. The purchase order styles that dictate which of the complex work procurement attributes are available are created in Oracle Purchasing. See: Defining Document Styles, Oracle Purchasing Users Guide The details that can be specified on an ASN/ASBN include: Shipment Lines • Shipment Line Defaults: • Packing Slip • Country of Origin • Bar Code Label • Container Number • Truck Number • Comments • Shipments in Advance Shipment Notices Note: In the Shipments in Advance Shipment Notices section, to view Details, click Show. To hide details, click Hide. Shipment Headers • Shipment Information (Required fields are marked with *) • Shipment Number* • Shipment Date* • Expected Receipt Date* • Freight Information • Freight Terms • Number of Containers • Freight Carrier • Waybill/Airbill Number
  • 76. 5-4 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide • Bill of Lading • Packaging Code • Packing Slip • Tar Weight • Special Handling Code • Net Weight • Tar Weight UOM • Comments • Net Weight UOM You can enter billing information on a shipment notice to create an ASBN. An ASBN creates an invoice in the buyer's payables system. To create an ASBN, in addition to the above details, the following billing details should be provided (Required fields are marked with *): • Invoice Number* • Invoice Amount* • Invoice Date* • Payment Terms • Freight Amount • Currency • Tax Amount • Remit To Site The Advance Shipment Notices section includes: • Creating Advance Shipment Notices and Advance Shipment Billing Notices, page 5-5 • Uploading Advance Shipment Notices and Advance Shipment Billing Notices, page 5-8 • Canceling Advance Shipment Notices and Advance Shipment Billing Notices, page 5-9
  • 77. Shipping Information 5-5 Creating Advance Shipment Notices and Advance Shipment Billing Notices You can create advance shipment notices and advance shipment billing notices using PO shipment lines. To create advance shipment notices and advance shipment billing notices: 1. Click the Shipments tab, and then click Shipment Notices in the task bar directly below the tabs. 2. On the Shipment Notices page, click Create Advance Shipment Notices for an ASN or Create Advance Shipment Billing Notice for an ASBN. Note: If you are creating an ASBN, all selected shipments must belong to the same operating unit. Create ASN Page 3. Select either View Shipments Due This Week or View Shipments Due Any Time, and then click Go. Click Advanced Search to enter additional search criteria to perform a more restrictive search . 4. Select one or multiple purchase order shipments, and then click Add to Shipment Notice.
  • 78. 5-6 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide Add to Shipment Notice Page 5. On the Create Advance Shipment Notice or Create Advance Shipment Billing Notice page, enter the appropriate shipment line defaults. Note: Note:You can always add more shipments by clicking Add Shipments on the Shipments Line page. 6. You can enter the line details once for all shipment lines if the details are common to all lines. To copy all default shipment lines, click Default to All Lines. 7. To split a shipment line, click the split icon in the Shipments in Advance Shipment Notice section, and enter Shipping Quantity for the original and new lines. 8. To remove a shipment, click the remove icon in the Shipments in Advance Shipment Notice section. Note: To display shipment details, click Show in the Shipment and Advance Shipment Notice section. To hide shipment details, click Hide in the Shipment and Advance Shipment Notice section. 9. If you would like to enter Licence Plate Number (LPN), Lot, or Serial Information, click the LPN/LOT/serial icon. You will be able to enter lot and serial information for shipment lines only when the item has been defined as a lot or serial controlled item. You will only be able to enter lot
  • 79. Shipping Information 5-7 information if the item is lot controlled, serial information if the item is serial controlled, and both lot and serial information if your item is a lot and serial controlled. LPN Details page To enter details for a lot and serial controlled item: 1. Enter lot information. If you would like to add additional lot attributes, click the lot attributes icon. 2. If you would like to enter serial details for the lot, click Show, and then enter serial information. If you would like to add additional serial attributes, click the serial attributes icon. 3. If you have more than one lot or serial controlled item, click Add Another Row. 4. If you have LPNs nested within each other, enter nesting details in the License Plate Configuration Details section. Note: You may change the total shipment quantity on the LPN/Lot/Serial Detail page. The total shipment quantity entered should be equal to the total lot/serial quantity. 5. When you are finished entering your LPN/Lot/Serial details, click OK. 6. Click Shipment Headers. Enter the required ASN or ASBN information. You can also enter other information. The information you enter at the header level is transferred to the line level. (However, changes you make at the line level override information at the header level). If you are entering an ASBN, you must enter the following billing information:
  • 80. 5-8 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide • Invoice number • Invoice date • Invoice amount In the Remit-To site section, verify that the Remit To Site details are correct. If the Remit to Site details need to be changed, click Change, select the correct Remit To Site details, and then click Apply. 7. To preview the ASN or ASBN, click Preview. 8. Review the ASN or ASBN and click Submit. Barcode Printing for ASN Shipment Number The ASN details page has a Print button, which, when clicked, generates the barcode for the Shipment Number. Additionally, the ASN details are also printed along with the barcode. Whether the Shipment Number is a numeric value or an alphanumeric value, the system converts the Shipment Number to a barcode automatically when you click Print. For more information on setting up the barcode printing for ASN Shipment Number, see:Oracle iSupplier Portal Implementation Guide. Uploading Advance Shipment Notices and Advance Shipment Billing Notices If you have a large volume of ASNs or ASBNs, you may create a spreadsheet containing shipment details and upload it into your buying company's system. Using the spreadsheet template in iSupplier Portal, you can create shipment notices offline, and then upload the file. To download instructions on how to upload ASN and ASBNs: 1. Click the Shipments tab, and then click Shipment Notices in the task bar directly below the tabs. 2. Click Upload Advanced Shipment and Billing Notice 3. On the Upload Shipment Notices page, click Download Templates for instructions on uploading an ASN or ASBN.
  • 81. Shipping Information 5-9 Download Templates Page 4. On the Download Templates page, choose the file you want to download and click Download. You may choose from the following files to download: • ASN Template and Instructions - Contains instructions for uploading ASNs, a sample ASN spreadsheet file, and the template to use when entering ASN information offline. • ASBN Template and Instructions - Contains instructions for uploading ASBNs, a sample ASBN spreadsheet file, and the template to use when entering ASBN information offline. • Valid List of UOM, freight terms, etc.... - A list of values including country of origin, UOM, freight, carriers, payments terms, etc. is provided. You should use these values when creating your ASN/ASBN file. • Zip, All Files - Contains instructions for uploading ASNs, ASBNs, samples of ASN and ASBN spreadsheet files, templates to use while entering ASN and ASBN information offline, and lists of values. 5. Complete the templates according to the instructions. Save your completed file locally. 6. To upload your template, return to the Upload Shipment Notices page, browse for your completed template and upload it. Canceling Advance Shipment Notices and Advance Shipment Billing Notices When you cancel an ASN or ASBN, the system sends a notification to the buyer. You can always reenter an ASN for the same purchase order shipments at a later time. When you cancel an ASBN, both the shipment notice and corresponding invoice that was issued in the buyer's payable system are canceled. To cancel a submitted advance shipment notice or advance shipment billing notice:
  • 82. 5-10 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide 1. Click the Shipments tab, and then click Shipment Notices in the task bar directly below the tabs. 2. On the Shipment Notices page, click View/Cancel Advance Shipment Notices. 3. On the View/Cancel Advance Shipment Notices page, search for and select the advance shipment notice you would like to cancel. Note: You can use the advanced search feature to narrow your search. 4. Click Cancel Shipment Notice. A notification of your cancellation is sent to the buyer. Note: Canceling a shipment notice cannot be undone. An ASN can be canceled if any of the lines have been received by the buying company. You can cancel an ASBN if the lines have been received and the invoice has not been paid by the buying company. Alternatively, you can cancel an ASN or ASBN line using the Advance Shipment Notices page. The Shipments in the Advance Shipment Notice region has a Cancel button that you can use to cancel ASN or ASBN lines after receiving and/or invoicing are complete. Select the ASN or ASBN line or multiple lines, and click Cancel. This will remove the lines from the ASN / ASBN. After the supplier has cancelled a shipment in the submitted shipment notice, the shipment goes back to the purchase order and is available to be taken up in the next shipment notice. The supplier can edit a shipment in the shipment notice after the buyer has partially received that shipment. Uploading Routing Requests If your buying company is responsible for arranging the packing and shipping of materials, you may need to submit a routing request. A routing request notifies your buyer when goods are ready for shipment. You may upload a routing request using a spreadsheet template. To download instructions on how to upload a routing request: 1. Click the Shipments tab, and then click Shipment Notices in the task bar directly below the tabs. 2. On the Shipment Notices page, click Create Routing Requests.
  • 83. Shipping Information 5-11 3. On the Upload Routing Requests page, click Download Template. The Readme file included in the download will provide instructions on how to upload your routing request. Viewing Routing Responses You may view buyer responses to your routing requests. From the Shipment Notices page, click View Routing Responses. On the Routing Response page, you may search for routing responses (after your buyer has responded to them). You may search using the following search criteria: • Response Number • Routing Number • PO Number • Ship-From • Ship-To • Pick Up Time When you have found the routing response you would like to view, click the response number for details. Viewing Delivery Schedules You can use the Delivery Schedules Results page to quickly determine deliveries that need to be scheduled and deliveries that are past due. Click the purchase order number, receipt quantity, and ship-to location links to view further detail. Supplier Brokers have access to information about multiple suppliers, therefore a search filter for transaction documents is enabled for all supplier broker logins. This allows supplier brokers to search for, and filter required data only. If you have logged in as a supplier broker, this page displays Supplier dropdown, Supplier Site dropdown, along with other search fields. Select a Supplier from the dropdown, this is a mandatory field. The Supplier Site field is optional. This enables you to search for specific supplier information.
  • 84. 5-12 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide Delivery Schedules Results Page Viewing Overdue Receipts The Overdue Receipts Results page enables you to view the details of past due purchase order shipments. Click the PO number, Ship-To Location, and Buyer to view further detail.
  • 85. Shipping Information 5-13 Overdue Receipts Results Page Receiving Information Receiving information enables you to view your receipts, returns, and delivery performance. The receiving information section includes: • Viewing Receipts, page 5-13 • Viewing Returns, page 5-15 • Viewing On-Time Delivery Performance, page 5-15 Viewing Receipts The View Receipts page enables you to explore a historical view of all receipts that have been recorded for your shipped goods.
  • 86. 5-14 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide View Receipts page 1. On the View Receipts page, enter a value in one of the search fields to retrieve the receipt information. Optionally use the Advanced Search , page 3-7 function to specify more complex search criteria. 2. Supplier Brokers have access to information about multiple suppliers, therefore a search filter for transaction documents is enabled for all supplier broker logins. This allows supplier brokers to search for, and filter required data only. If you have logged in as a supplier broker, this page displays Supplier dropdown, Supplier Site field, along with other search fields. Select a Supplier from the dropdown, this is a mandatory field. The Supplier Site dropdown is optional. . This enables you to search for specific supplier information. 3. The View Receipts redisplays, listing the receipts who matched your search criteria. 4. To view the information on a particular receipt, click the receipt number link. 5. The Receipt: details page displays information on that particular receipt. From this page, there are links to display • ASN/ASBN • PO information • Invoice information
  • 87. Shipping Information 5-15 • Return information • On Time Performance information • Defect information Viewing Returns The Returns Summary page enables you to view the return history, the causes for goods returned by the buying company, and inspection results of a shipment. The search summary results include basic information along with details about the return, such as quantities and a reason for return. Click Receipt Number, and PO Number to view further detail. Supplier Brokers have access to information about multiple suppliers, therefore a search filter for transaction documents is enabled for all supplier broker logins. This allows supplier brokers to search for, and filter required data only. If you have logged in as a supplier broker, this page displays the Supplier dropdown, Supplier Site field, along with other search fields. Select a Supplier from the dropdown, this is a mandatory field. The Supplier Site dropdown is optional. This enables you to search for specific supplier information. Returns Summary page Viewing On-Time Delivery Performance The On-Time Performance page provides the delivery status of shipments you made
  • 88. 5-16 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide against purchase orders. You can view your performance for timeliness of deliveries. Click the PO Number and Receipt Number to view further details. On-Time Performance Page Quality Information Entering quality information online enables paperless transactions for required quality standards. You can only enter quality information if the buying company has Oracle Quality and you have permission. You first create a Quality Collection Plan in Oracle Quality and associate the plan with the Self-Service Quality for outside processing transactions. You enter quality information to communicate to your buyer if your item meets the quality standards required. For example, an electrical motor supplier performs a detailed electrical test on each motor. That supplier can enter the quality data gathered from each test and enter that information online in Oracle iSupplier Portal prior to shipping the motor. Quality engineers can evaluate the results and stop the shipment of any motors that do not meet the requirements. The system displays an available link in the Quality Plans column. Clicking this link displays a list of collection plans associated with your purchase order. You can enter quality results, view quality results submitted, or view attachments for any purchase order listed. You can associate ERES enabled transaction events such as Quality Result Creation or Quality Result Update to iSupplier quality collection transactions. You can then enable signature flows when you add and update quality results for the iSupplier collection plans and parent and child collection plans in the Quality Workbench. For a list of Oracle Quality events predefined in Oracle E-Records, see E-records and E- signatures for Oracle Quality, Oracle Quality User's Guide.
  • 89. Shipping Information 5-17 The Quality Shipments page displays purchase order and shipping information for any purchased item being shipped, but only for open jobs that also have at least one collection plan assigned to them. You can obtain the shipment number, ship-to location, and ship-to organization. You can also download quality collection plans, and collect and submit quality data regarding your shipments. 1. On the Shipments tab, click Quality in the task bar directly below the tabs. Search - Quality Shipments Page 2. On the Search - Quality Shipments page, search for a shipment. 3. Click Available in the Quality Plans column for the appropriate shipment. 4. On the Quality Plans page, click the enter quality results icon. To view existing quality results, click the view quality results icon. To view attachments, click the attachment icon. Quality Plans Page 1. On the Enter Test Results page, enter a number and click Continue. (You can only complete this task if you have permission).
  • 90. 5-18 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide Enter Quality Results Page 2. On the Enter Quality Results page, enter your quality information (the fields available to enter data vary depending on the type of information you need to enter) and click Submit. You can enter up to 25 rows of quality data at a time. 3. Once you have submitted all of the quality results, a notification is sent to the buyer. To send quality notifications to the buyer or recipient: After you have saved and submitted all of your quality results, click Notification to notify the buyer or recipient that you have submitted results (if you have permission). You can only submit 25 rows of results at a time. If you are submitting more than 25 rows of results, for example 100 rows of results, you must submit your results four times. Note: To avoid sending duplicate notifications, click Notification only after you complete and submit all of your rows of data.
  • 91. Planning and Inventory Information 6-1 6 Planning and Inventory Information This chapter covers the following topics: • Overview • Forecast Information • Product Information • Viewing Supplier Item Summary • Viewing Item Inventory Information • Maintaining Capacity Information • Maintaining Order Modifiers • Vendor Managed Inventory • Consigned Inventory • Viewing Schedules from Supplier Scheduling Overview Oracle iSupplier Portal enables you to view demand forecasts from the buying company. Using your item number, you can view different transactions. You can also maintain certain item information such as manufacturing and order modifiers. Oracle iSupplier Portal enables you to perform vendor managed inventory or track consigned inventory stock. You also can maintain your orders and capacity information on the system. You can view planning and shipping schedules from Supplier Scheduling too. This chapter includes the following: • Forecast Information, page 6-2 • Product Information, page 6-2 • Vendor Managed Inventory, page 6-8
  • 92. 6-2 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide • Consigned Inventory, page 6-9 • Viewing Schedules from Supplier Scheduling, page 6-10 Forecast Information Forecast information enables you to view real-time forecasts from the buying company. You can view plans, arranged by schedules, that communicate expected demand over different time horizons. You can see all available schedules and select the schedule number to view further details. The Planning tab allows you to view plans that communicate forecast information. You can also view forecast schedules. A summary of schedules is displayed and you can select each schedule to view details. Click the Schedule Number for further information. The Planning Schedule Summary page displays forecast information for all items. To view forecast information for all items on a single page, click the summarized view icon. Product Information Using the Product tab, you can easily access and view information about the products you provide sorted by item. The product information section includes: • Viewing Supplier Item Summary, page 6-2 • Viewing Item Inventory Information, page 6-4 • Maintaining Capacity Information, page 6-5 • Maintaining Order Modifiers, page 6-7 Viewing Supplier Item Summary The Supplier Items page enables you to view all of the details of the products that you supply. You can view your search results in a summary format with links on each line for:
  • 93. Planning and Inventory Information 6-3 Supplier Items Page Orders A summary of order lines placed with you for this item. This summary includes quantity ordered, quantity received, and price break information. Click PO Number, Ship-To Location, and Buyer for further information. Overdue A summary of overdue receipts for the selected item. Click PO Number and Receipt Number for further information. Receipt History A summary of receipts for the selected item. Click PO Number and Receipt Number for further information. Defects A summary view of failed inspection items. Returns A summary view of returns for an item that includes shipment information, RMA number, and quantities. Click PO Number and Receipt Number for further information. On-Time Performance A summary of receipts for an item that includes due dates, receipt dates, and shipping information. Click PO Number and Receipt Number for further information. Inventory The On-Hand page provides more details about the item, on-hand quantity, and links to both. Revision history and sub-inventory breakdown of the on-hand quantity (with locator, lot, and serial).
  • 94. 6-4 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide Vendor Managed Inventory A summary view of vendor managed items that includes supplier, item shipment notice, and buyer information. Consigned Inventory A summary view of consigned items including item, shipment, and transaction information. Click the appropriate icon for further information. Most of the summaries are available to export. Viewing Item Inventory Information The On-Hand Items page enables you to view your item inventory information. Viewing your item inventories enables you to view on-hand inventories, item locations, lots, and serials. To view item inventory information: 1. Click the Product tab, click Supplier Item in the task bar directly below the tabs. 2. Search for an item. 3. On the Supplier Items Result page, select your item and click the inventory icon. 4. Click Revision to view any revisions made to an item. On-Hand Items Page 5. Click the Subinventory icon to view subinventory information for an item. 6. Click the Locator, Lot, or Serial icon to view any specific item information. On-Hand items Subinventories Page 7. Click Export to download your inventory information.
  • 95. Planning and Inventory Information 6-5 Maintaining Capacity Information You can accurately maintain your delivery capacity online. Your buying company can allocate planned orders taking into account your changes to the capacity constraints. This provides more accuracy and flexibility in making sourcing allocations during the organization's planning, scheduling, and procurement processes. You can update your capacity abilities for various items for which you are an approved supplier. You can use the Order Modifiers page to define processing lead times, fixed lot multiples, and minimum order quantities. You can also define tolerance fences by Days in Advance and Tolerance on the Maintain Capacity page. Once your updates are submitted, the company's buyer is notified and their approved supplier list is updated with your information. The company can then better allocate planned orders taking allocation and current capacities into account. You can update the following capacity constraints for each item that has been sourced to you: • Processing lead time • Order modifiers: minimum order quantity and fixed lot multiple • Capacity per day for a range of effective date • Tolerance fences: tolerance percentage and days in advance After you change capacity information, a notification is sent to the planner and the buyer. Based on the preference set by the buying company, the information may go through an approval from a buyer or planner. You will be notified of the status of the request. To maintain capacity information: 1. Click the Product tab, click Maintain Capacity in the task bar directly below the tabs. 2. On the Maintain Capacity page, enter search criteria information.
  • 96. 6-6 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide Maintain Capacity Page 3. Click Search. (You can perform a blind search by clicking Search without entering any criteria. This results in all items assigned to you being displayed). 4. Select your item and click Maintain Capacity. Capacity of Item Page Note: The Maintain Capacity page displays information from today's date forward. You can modify the current defined capacity or create new entries by clicking Add Another Row. 5. You can also add or modify the Over Capacity Tolerance by changing existing Days in Advance and Tolerance values. Note: To add additional Over Capacity Tolerance information, click Add Another Row. 6. When you have completed your update, click Update Capacity. An Update Capacity Confirmation message is displayed.
  • 97. Planning and Inventory Information 6-7 Maintaining Order Modifiers Maintaining order modifiers enables you to view and make changes to the details of your ability to fulfill purchase orders scheduled for delivery. You can view shipment processing lead times, minimum order quantities, and fixed lot multiples. You can then adjust these to fit your delivery ability. To maintain order modifiers: 1. Click the Product tab, click Order Modifiers in the task bar directly below the tabs. 2. On the Order Modifiers page, enter search criteria information and click Go. Order Modifiers Page 3. Select your item and click Maintain Order Modifiers. Maintain Order Modifiers Page 4. On the Order Modifiers for Item page, you can add or modify the following item attribute values: • Processing Lead Time (in days) • Minimum Order Quantity • Fixed Lot Multiple
  • 98. 6-8 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide 5. Click Submit. The item is immediately updated with the changes and an information notification is sent to the planning manager or buyer of the item. They can verify your changes in their approved supplier list. Note: You can erase any changes before submitting your request by clicking Cancel. Vendor Managed Inventory Vendor Managed Inventory enables you to manage the inventory at the customer's location. Customers can set up the minimum and maximum stock levels required for an item enabled for maintenance by a supplier. Using Oracle iSupplier Portal, you can view these minimum and maximum levels and also view the current on-hand quantities for that item at the customer location. You have the option of triggering the replenishment requests from this page to ensure that the stock quantity is maintained at the customer location. On the Product tab, on the Supplier Item Results page, click the VMI icon. From the Vendor Managed Inventory Status page, your search results are displayed with detailed information about the status of each item you included in your search and links to enter replenishment information. You then initiate replenishment requests for the item. Note: You can save searches that you use frequently by clicking Personalize, entering your search criteria, and then saving by clicking Apply. Personalize also enables you to customize the information that is displayed when you view the VMI Search page. To generate supply requests: 1. Search for the items you are responsible for. 2. Review the replenishment method for the item. 3. If the method for the item is Buyer or Supplier Initiates Release; you then select the item, enter the quantity, and click Release. 4. If the method for the item is Manual Requisition; you click the enter requisition icon in the Create Requisition column. On the Enter Order Details page, enter a quantity, need-by date, and other details of the order as required by the customer. Once you have completed and submitted the replenishment request, you will receive a confirmation message that contains the request identifier. You can use the request identifier to monitor the progress of your request.
  • 99. Planning and Inventory Information 6-9 You can override the quantity with either of the manual types of replenishment methods. For Automatic Release method items, you can click the enter replenishment icon in the Create Requisition column and enter a quantity. Consigned Inventory Oracle Procurement along with Discrete Manufacturing supports maintaining consigned inventory for an item. Buying companies can enable items to have consigned inventory. This enables you to maintain the stock at the buying company location. Buying companies do not incur financial liabilities until they start consuming the stock. Oracle iSupplier Portal enables you to view on-hand stock for consigned items and also associated procure-to-pay transactions. To view consigned items: 1. Click the Product tab, and then click Consigned Inventory in the task bar directly below the tabs. 2. On the Consigned Inventory page, search and select your item. 3. For a given item, suppliers can view the following information: • Supplier Item • Item • Item Description • Consigned On-Hand - Displays the on-hand stock levels for the item at the buying company. • Consigned Shipments - Displays the purchase order shipment details that enable the item to be shipped from you to the buying company location. • Consumption Orders - Displays the purchase orders/blanket releases that are created when consigned stock is consumed by the buying company. These are the orders against which you can submit invoices to the buying company. • Consigned Receipts - Displays the history of receipts for consigned stock. • Consigned Returns - Displays the history of return transactions created for the consigned stock. • Material Transactions - Displays the material transactions that occurred for the consigned item. It includes transactions to procure the item, which is the consigned stock, and then the transactions to move the stock to regular inventory for consumption.
  • 100. 6-10 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide If the consigned item is also enabled for Vendor Managed Inventory, suppliers can initiate replenishment requests online. To view consigned inventory aging items: 1. Click the Product tab, and then click Consigned Inventory Aging in the task bar directly below the tabs. 2. On the Consigned Inventory Aging page, you may search for items that are past due, or items that are due in the next 7, 15, or 30 days. Select the appropriate search criteria for your item and click Go. 3. For a given item, suppliers can view the following information: • Supplier Site • Organization • Supplier Item • Item • Item Revision • Item Description • Subinventory • UOM • Quantity • Receipt Date • Consume Before - Date the item must be consumed. • Days Before Consumption is Due - Displays the number of days before the ownership of the item is transferred. Viewing Schedules from Supplier Scheduling You must be logged in as a supplier to view the schedules that have been confirmed by the buyer. Click the Planning tab. Click Go (with or without any search criteria) and the plans display in the search results. Drill down to view the schedule and see the demand.
  • 101. Invoice and Payment Information 7-1 7 Invoice and Payment Information This chapter covers the following topics: • Overview • Submitting Invoices • Viewing Invoice Information • Viewing AP AR Netting Report • Viewing Payment Information Overview You can access invoice and payment information as well as review invoice status online using Oracle iSupplier Portal. If the buying company uses Oracle Payables, you can also submit invoices online. This section includes the following topics: • Submitting Invoices, page 7-1 • Viewing Invoice Information, page 7-6 • Viewing Payment Information, page 7-11 • Viewing AP AR Netting Report, page 7-9 Submitting Invoices If your buying company has implemented Oracle Payables, you may submit invoices online. You can submit an invoice online to the buying company based on the purchase order lines you have fulfilled. You need to only identify those items shipped and enter a quantity. You can invoice against open, approved, standard, or blanket purchase orders
  • 102. 7-2 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide that are not fully billed. You can enter a credit memo against a fully billed purchase order (use negative quantity amounts to enter a credit memo), as well as invoice against multiple purchase orders. However, the currency and organization of all items on an invoice must be the same. The organization is the entity within the buyer's company that you are invoicing. You can also partially complete an invoice, save it, and submit it later. After you submit an invoice, you cannot change the invoice. If you need to make adjustments to a submitted invoice, you can create a credit memo against the same purchase order items to net out the invoice charges. The purchase order will then be available for a new invoice. In some cases, there will be no matching purchase order. If you have provided a service, to the buying company, for example, landscape services, the buying company may not have submitted a formal purchase order. You can submit invoices in these cases as well. To submit an invoice with a matching purchase order: 1. Click the Finance tab, and then click Create Invoices in the task bar directly below the tabs. 2. On the Invoice Actions page, select either With a PO from the Create Invoice Menu and click Go. Create Invoices Select PO 3. On the Create Invoice: Purchase Orders page, enter search criteria to identify the purchase order, and click Go. 4. Select items of the PO to be invoiced and click Add to Invoice. Add as many items as you need (items on your invoice display at the bottom of the page). If you mistakenly add an item to the invoice, you can select it and click Remove from invoice. 5. When finished adding items, click Next.
  • 103. Invoice and Payment Information 7-3 Create Invoice: Details Page 6. On the Create Invoice: Details page, enter an invoice number and remit to address. You can also update the quantity and/or price. Enter and any additional information, and then click Next. Create Invoice: Manage Tax Page 7. On the Create Invoice: Manage Tax page, you can view the tax information generated. 8. When finished, click Next.
  • 104. 7-4 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide Review/Submit Invoice Page 9. On the Create Invoice: Review and Submit page, review your invoice and click Submit. You also have the option to return to this invoice later by clicking Save for Later. 10. A Confirmation page is generated informing you of successful invoice creation. . Creating an Invoice Without a Purchase Order The process of creating invoices that do not have matching purchase orders is similar, although some information is not required, and some must be entered. The contact information for invoices with purchase orders is restricted to the sites for the users, but for invoices without purchase orders, the system will display all contacts for the supplier sites to which the user has access. iSupplier users can enter an invoice without a PO, but if the approval workflow for their customer (Oracle Applications user) is not implemented, the status of that invoice request will remain IN PROCESS and will not change. Note: You need work with the customers to ensure these type of invoices are accepted. To create an invoice without a purchase order: 1. From the iSupplier Portal Home page, click the Finance tab. 2. On the Create Invoices page, select Without PO from the Create Invoice menu, and click Go.
  • 105. Invoice and Payment Information 7-5 3. Enter information as needed. The following fields are required. • Invoice number • Remit to name • Currency • Customer tax payer ID Enter any other appropriate information. Use the Items fields to identify and describe the item or service for which you are invoicing. When you are finished, click Next.
  • 106. 7-6 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide 4. The Review and Submit page shows the tax information generated by the tax system. If the invoice information is correct, click Submit. Viewing Invoice Information The View Invoices page enables you to search for and view details of an invoice you have submitted. You can search using various any or all of the search criteria on the page such as: • Invoice Number • Invoice date • Due date • Payment status • Invoice Amount To view invoice information: 1. On the iSupplier Portal Home page, click the Finance tab, then click the View Invoices subtab. 2. On the View Invoices page, enter search values into one or more of the search fields,
  • 107. Invoice and Payment Information 7-7 and click Go. Or use the Advanced Search option. Invoice Summary Results Page 3. Supplier Brokers have access to information about multiple suppliers, therefore a search filter for transaction documents is enabled for all supplier broker logins. This allows supplier brokers to search for, and filter required data only. If you have logged in as a supplier broker, this page displays Supplier dropdown, Supplier Site dropdown, along with other search fields. Select a Supplier from the dropdown, this is a mandatory field. The Supplier Site dropdown is optional. This enables you to search for specific supplier information. 4. When the search results display, click the Invoice Number link to view details of the invoice. (You can also view any associated purchase order(s), payments, scheduled payments, or netting report by clicking their respective links, or icons).
  • 108. 7-8 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide Invoice Details page 5. On the Invoice Details page, you can see the header level information. 6. To view invoice line information, click the Invoice Lines tab. You can also view any scheduled payments and any hold information. Note: If you submitted your invoice online, there may be a delay before you can review it because the Accounts Payable department needs to process it first. 7. In the Payment Information region of Invoice Header, you can view the following dispute information for an Invoice: • Original Invoice Amount • Dispute Reason Note: Oracle Transportation Management (OTM) will pass the disputed invoice to Oracle Payables with the original invoice amount of the invoice and disputed reasons. Refer the Oracle Payables Users Guide for more information on dispute resolution setup. 8. You can view the following Netting Information attributes at the header level under Netting Information: • Netting Amount • Reckoning Currency • Netting Report
  • 109. Invoice and Payment Information 7-9 Note: You can view the netting attributes only when the profile POS: AP AR Netting Information is set as Yes at the User level, or the Site level. Viewing AP AR Netting Report Netting functionality of Oracle Payables is integrated with the iSupplier Portal to enable you to view the netting information for an invoice. Please refer to the Payables and Receivables Netting section in the Oracle Payables User's Guide for more information on the AP AR Netting set up. Oracle Payables enables you to offset supplier payables (AP invoice payments) against the customer receivables or claims with the netting functionality. To view the AP AR Netting Report: 1. Navigate to the iSupplier Portal Full Access > Finance> View Invoices. The View Invoices page displays. 2. Enter the search criteria for an invoice number and Click Go. 3. Search result displays the invoices matching to your search criteria.
  • 110. 7-10 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide View Invoices Note: The Netting Report icon is enabled when the invoice is netted off and netting batch is completed, otherwise it is disabled. Please refer to the Payables and Receivables Netting section in the Oracle Payables User's Guide to know how the invoice is netted off and netting batch is completed. 4. Click the Netting Report icon. The View Netting Report page displays. View Netting Report 5. Select the Final Netting Report item from the Template list. 6. Select the Language from the Locale list. For Example: English: United States (*) 7. Select the Format from the list. You can select the format as Excel, HTML, PDF, and RTF from the list. 8. Click Run. The Oracle Netting Report page displays.
  • 111. Invoice and Payment Information 7-11 9. You can view the following netting information on this page along with invoice details: • Netting Agreement • Netting Bank Account • Reckoning Currency • Final Netting Amount Note: You can view the netting information at the Invoice Header level, only when the POS: AP AR Netting Information profile is set as Yes at the User level, or the Site level. 10. Click Export to save the netting report. Viewing Payment Information Payment inquiry enables you to view the history of all the payments to your invoices completed by the buying company. You can use the View Payments page to search using various search criteria, including: • Payment number • Invoice number • Payment date • Purchase order number
  • 112. 7-12 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide To view payment information: 1. On the iSupplier Portal Home page, click the Finance tab, then click the View Payments subtab. 2. On the View Payments page, enter search values into one or more of the search fields, and click Go. Or use the Advanced Search option. Payment Summary Results Page 3. Supplier Brokers have access to information about multiple suppliers, therefore a search filter for transaction documents is enabled for all supplier broker logins. This allows supplier brokers to search for, and filter required data only. If you have logged in as a supplier broker, this page displays Supplier dropdown, Supplier Site dropdown, along with other search fields. Select a Supplier from the dropdown, this is a mandatory field. The Supplier Site dropdown is optional. This enables you to search for specific supplier information. 4. When the search results display, click the payment number link to view details of the payment. (You can also view any associated purchase order(s), or invoices by clicking their links).
  • 113. Invoice and Payment Information 7-13 Payment Details page 5. On the Payments details page, you can see the payment details including the invoices addressed by the payment.
  • 115. Supplier Profile Management 8-1 8 Supplier Profile Management This chapter covers the following topics: • Overview • Supplier Profile Management Flow • General Company Information • Company Profile • Tax Details • Address Book • Contact Directory • Business Classifications • Products and Services • Banking Details • Creating Banking Details • Responding to Buyer Surveys • Manage Supplier Broker Overview Supplier Profile Management enables you to manage key profile details used to establish or maintain a business relationship with the buying company. This profile information includes address information, names of main contacts, user accounts (if you have the Supplier Profile and User Management responsibility), business classifications, banking details, and category information about the goods and services you are able to provide to the buyer. Buyer administrators will review the details you provide and use them to update the appropriate records in the buyer's purchasing transaction system. You benefit from managing your profile yourself. Supplier Profile Management enables you to effectively represent yourself to the buying company and update your profiles
  • 116. 8-2 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide details as necessary, making important information accurate. Notifications for Change Requests You receive notifications when buyers approve or reject requests for changes to: • Address book. • Contact directory. • Business classifications. • Product and services. Approval notifications are for your information only. Rejection notifications include a link to enable you to view the reasons for the rejection and to make any necessary updates. The chapter includes the following sections: • Supplier Profile Management Flow, page 8-2 • General Company Information, page 8-3 • Company Profile, page 8-4 • Tax Details, page 8-5 • Address Book, page 8-7 • Contact Directory, page 8-9 • Business Classifications, page 8-12 • Products and Services, page 8-13 • Banking Details, page 8-16 • Creating Banking Details, page 8-16 • Responding to Buyer Surveys, page 8-19 • Managing Supplier Broker, page 8-19 Supplier Profile Management Flow To have the information you enter in Supplier Profile Management processed in the system, log into the Oracle iSupplier Portal and access your profile. You can then enter information for your address book, contact directory, business classifications, products and services, or user accounts. The buyer administrator will review any changes to your
  • 117. Supplier Profile Management 8-3 profile and use this information to update their purchasing system. General Company Information Management of your company's profile information involves the use of two high-level pages. The General information page provides a quick, high-level display of information at the company level. You can use the General information page to add an attachment to your profile. Adding attachments allows you to upload documents pertinent to your relationship with the buying company or upload documents that may have been specifically requested by the buying company (for example, tax documents). The Company Organization page allows you to navigate to other pages where you can add or update your actual profile information. To access the General page, on the iSupplier Portal Home page, click the Admin tab. General Information page To upload a local attachment: 1. Click Add Attachment. 2. To upload an attachment stored locally, accept the default Desktop File/Text/URL from the Add menu. 3. Give the attachment a title, description, and select a Category value to indicate its original source 4. Browse to the location of the attachment and select it.
  • 118. 8-4 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide 5. Click Apply. To upload an attachment from the buyer's document catalog: 1. Click Add Attachment. 2. Select From Document Catalog from the Add menu. 3. Search on the document title, or expand the search options to use additional search fields. 4. Select the document(s), and click Apply. Company Profile Use the Company Profile pages to define the detailed information about your company. Use the navigation bar on the left to access the different pages of the Company Profile. The Organization page defines high-level details about your company. To access the Organization page, click Organization in the Company Profile navigation tree.
  • 119. Supplier Profile Management 8-5 Organization Page Once you have entered appropriate information, click Save. Tax Details Using the Payables responsibility ((N) Setup > Options > Payables Options) you can use the option to apply the withholding tax at Invoice Validation and Payment or both the Invoice Validation and Payment.
  • 120. 8-6 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide Withholding Tax window in Payables The option At Invoice Validation and Payment time has been included. This option can be selected only if the Use Withholding Tax box is selected in the Withholding Tax region of Payables Options and the option in Apply Withholding Tax is selected as At Invoice Validation and Payment Time. Another option called At Withholding Application is added to the Create Withholding Invoice region. In the Supplier/Supplier Site pages, there are two Lists of Values to display Invoice Withholding Tax Group and Payment Withholding Tax Group. At the Supplier level, the Allow withholding tax box in tax details tab of the supplier is editable at the irrespective of the payables option selected. At the supplier site level the Allow withholding tax box is displayed at the supplier site level but is editable only if Use Withholding tax box is enabled in the Payables Options of the operating unit to which the supplier site is attached and Allow Withholding tax box is selected at the supplier level.
  • 121. Supplier Profile Management 8-7 Tax Details Page with Withholding Tax Tax Details Page with Withholding Tax (contd.) Address Book Use the Address Book page to enter information on your company sites. You can create and modify the multiple addresses used in transactions with the buying company (for example, purchasing locations, payment sites, and addresses for RFQs). You can provide a comment for each address entry to describe how it is used. For example, you
  • 122. 8-8 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide can enter an address record and indicate that this is an address for a location from which goods or services may be purchased. The Create Address and Update Address pages in the Address Book display the Address Purpose region, using which you can assign a purpose (reason) for the address. Add a new Address Purpose row by clicking the Add Another Row icon. Select an Address Purpose such as Bill To, Acknowledgment, or Install At from the Purpose drop-down. Select multiple address purposes for an address. Remove an address purpose by clicking the Delete icon. Address Book Page After you enter address information, buyer administrators are notified of the changes. Buyer administrators must review the updates and decide how to use the details to update the purchasing system. Therefore, any changes you make may not be promoted to the application for a few days. Use the Status column in the Address Book page to track the status of the address that you create or update and submit for approval. The status is Pending when the address information is pending approval and changes to Current after the buyer approves the address information. To manage address book details: 1. To access the Address Book page, click Address Book in the Company Profile navigation tree. 2. The Address Book page displays the current addresses defined for your company. From this page you can: • Delete an address. • Update an address. • Add a new address by clicking Create.
  • 123. Supplier Profile Management 8-9 Create Address Page 1. On the Create Address page, enter the appropriate information for the new address (required fields are marked with an asterisk). Note that entering the address purpose is optional. 2. When finished, click Save. Contact Directory The Contact Directory lists the employees at your company who function as contacts between you and your buyer. After entering the contact details, you can link the contacts to the appropriate address (described below). As people move within your organization, you can also revise the address details for a contact. You can create multiple contacts and link each one to as many addresses as needed. Each contact must be unique based on first name, last name, and phone number. Contacts that are obsolete can be removed. After you enter the information, buyer administrators are notified so they can review the details and use then to update their purchasing system. Therefore, your changes may not be promoted to the purchasing system for a few days. Viewing contact information: 1. Click Contact Directory under the Company Profile navigation tree. The system displays your current list of contacts.
  • 124. 8-10 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide Contact Directory Details Page 2. On the Contact Directory page, you can • Delete a contact by clicking the trash can icon. • Update contact information by clicking the pencil icon. • View the inactive contacts by expanding the Contact Directory : Inactive Contacts region. • Manage address information for a contact by clicking the Addresses icon. Address Associations for Contact Page Use the Address Associations for Contact page to manage the addresses for a particular contact: • To remove an address for a contact, click the trashcan icon. • To add an address to a contact, click Add Another Row, search for the
  • 125. Supplier Profile Management 8-11 address, and click Save. To create a new contact 1. On the Contact Directory Details page, click Create. Create Contact Page 2. Enter appropriate information such as Contact Title, First Name, Middle Name, Last Name, Alternate Contact Name, Job Title, Email Address, URL, Phone Area Code, Phone Number, Phone Extension, Alternate Phone Area Code, Alternate Phone Number, Fax Area Code, Fax Number, and Inactive Date for the contact. To create a temporary contact, use the pop-up calendar to identify and expiration date. 3. If you have the authority to create user accounts, the Create User Account for This Contact checkbox appears on this page. Clicking this checkbox displays additional fields for creating and authorizing users with access to iSupplier Portal.. Note: The Supplier Onboarding Configuration page provides the Create User Account check box, which determines if user account must be created by default for a primary contact. Based on their
  • 126. 8-12 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide business requirements, buyer administrators can select the check box either at the Global or the Operating Unit level. To create a user account, grant the appropriate responsibilities and specify the appropriate user access restrictions to the new user. See the Oracle iSupplier Portal Implementation guide for details about defining user accounts. 4. The Create Contact page (and the Update Contact page) in the Contact Directory display the Contact Purpose region, using which the user can assign a purpose (reason) for the contact, such as Administrative Contact, or Technical Contact. Add a new Contact Purpose row by clicking the Add Another Row icon. Select a contact purpose from the Purpose dropdown list. You can select multiple purposes for a contact. Remove a contact purpose by clicking the Delete icon. Entering the Contact Purpose is optional. The purpose the user selects determines the type of communication that will be received from the buying organization. Thus the buying organization sends out various types of communication to the supplier contacts, based on the specific purpose(s) assigned to them. 5. When you have specified your contact (and user account, if applicable) information, click Save. Business Classifications Buying companies establish a list of business classifications they want to use to classify their supply base. In some regions, these classifications are required by government regulations. You can claim classifications that are appropriate to your business and add any required classification details. Buyers can then audit your qualifications. Once you claim the appropriate classifications, buyer administrators are notified so they can review the details. Designated supplier users will be notified when the re-certification date for supplier's business classification is due. This is for the re-certification of the business classification and is based on the Business Classification Re-Certification Notification Reminder Days profile option set by the system administrator. To claim / re-certify business classifications: 1. On the Admin information page, click Business Classifications. 2. On the Business Classifications page, check Applicable check box for all classifications that apply to your company.
  • 127. Supplier Profile Management 8-13 Business Classifications page 3. Select the "I certify, that I have reviewed the classification below and they are current and accurate" check box. Note: Even if this check box is not selected the business classification is recertified when you click Save. 4. Complete the remaining fields. 5. Click Save. The Business Classification is updated. Products and Services Buying companies define product and service category sets that they use to categorize their supply base. You can browse the list of goods and services and select all those that apply to your business. Buying companies can then use this information; some may use it to help generate supplier invitation lists for RFQs or for reporting. You can browse the hierarchy tree and select a parent category or child categories. When a parent is selected, the buying company assumes that you can provide all the products or services in that category. After you select the product and services categories that apply to your business, buyer administrators are notified so they can review the details. You can update your selections at any time. A supplier or supplier profile management administrator can search for a specific product or service from the Product & Services hierarchy. Supplier administrator can view the validation code corresponding to the respective product or service on the Add
  • 128. 8-14 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide Products and Services page. Suppliers can view the search results with: • Products and Services codes along with Description. • List of Product and Services ordered by Description. You can search for the products and services in the Prospective Supplier Registration: Additional Details page, Prospective Supplier Registration: Add Product and Services page, Supplier Profile Change Request page, and Product and Services Subcategories page. To claim, or search for products and services: 1. On the Admin information page, click Product and Services. Product and Services page 2. On the Products and Services page, the system displays the list of categories with their codes, and approval status that have already been claimed by your company. (To browse child category details for any parent, click the view sub-category icon.) 3. Click Add. The Add Products and Services page displays.
  • 129. Supplier Profile Management 8-15 Add Products and Services page 4. In the Add Products and Service page, the supplier user can search for products and services with the Browse All Products & Services default option, or select the Search for Specific Product & Services option to enter the search criteria for code, description, or a combination of both and click Go. 5. You can view the search results for products and services ordered by description. 6. Select the Applicable check box. (Applicable check box is greyed out for products or services which are already selected as Applicable.) 7. Click Apply. 8. To view sub-category information about a product or service, click the view sub-
  • 130. 8-16 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide categories icon. On the Add Products and Services page, click Applicable to apply a particular sub-category, and then click Apply. View Products and Services Subcategories To remove products or services: 1. On the Products and Services page, select a product or service. 2. Click Remove. If you, as the supplier user, remove any associated products or services categories, the system sends an FYI notification to the buyer about the deletion. However, please note that the removal / deletion of product and services or categories does not require approvals from the buyer. Banking Details To simplify the process of capturing bank account related details and to improve data quality, you can create and maintain your own bank account details and assign these accounts to multiple addresses within your company. Buying companies can then access and approve these details for propagation into their payables systems. You can create and maintain bank account details that you want the buying company to use when they make payments to you. The system captures all relevant information. Since bank accounts are defined for a particular bank, branch and account number, you have the ability to enter all this information when creating your account entries. When you enter your account information, the system validates for duplicate entries. Creating Banking Details To view existing bank accounts: 1. From the Company Profile navigation tree, click Banking Details. The Banking Details page displays information on any bank accounts already defined for your company. Use the View menu entries to control which bank accounts are displayed.
  • 131. Supplier Profile Management 8-17 Banking Details Page • General Accounts displays accounts that are used company-wide (as opposed to accounts assigned to a particular address). • All Accounts displays general accounts as well as accounts assigned to an address. Use this view to update account information. • All Assignments displays which accounts are assigned to which sites. 2. To add an additional existing account to the list of general accounts, click Add, select the account, and click Save. To create a new account: 1. On the Banking Details page, click Create. 2. On the Create Bank Account page, enter the appropriate values. Note that you can expand the Bank, Branch, and Bank Account sections to enter additional details.
  • 132. 8-18 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide Create Bank Accounts Page 3. When creating a bank account, you can create a new account at an existing bank/branch, or a new bank and/or branch. 1. To create an account at a new bank: 1. Identify the country where the bank is located. 2. Click Create New Bank. 3. Enter the bank name and number. 4. Click "Show Bank Details" and enter details about the new bank as needed. 2. To use an existing bank 1. Click the magnifying glass icon. 2. Use the Search and Select page to identify the bank. 3. To create a new branch 1. Click Create New Branch. 2. Enter the branch name and number. 3. Click "Show Branch Details" link and enter details about the new branch as needed. .
  • 133. Supplier Profile Management 8-19 4. Enter the detail information about the new branch. 4. To use and existing branch: 1. Click the magnifying glass icon. 2. Use the Search and Select page to identify the branch. 4. Provide any additional account details by clicking "Show Account Details." 5. When you have finished entering bank account details, click Save. Note: For suppliers in European Union countries, International Bank Account Number (IBAN) information is part of compliance with the European Union requirement. To derive the IBAN or validate the number entered by the user, the supplier administrator should implement a custom code-hook. The application displays an error message, if the number is incorrect. For information on the custom code-hook, refer to the Oracle iSupplier Portal Implementation Guide Responding to Buyer Surveys From time to time, buyers may request you respond to surveys. Surveys are used by the buying organizations to solicit information and input for use in improving relationships with suppliers. To respond to a buyer survey: 1. From the iSupplier Portal Home page, click the Admin tab. 2. On the General page, click Surveys in the navigation tree on the left. 3. All surveys appropriate for you are listed in the table. To respond to a survey, click the pencil icon. The instructions on completing surveys vary from one to another. Manage Supplier Broker Log in to Oracle iSupplier Portal as a supplier and select the Supplier Profile & User Manager responsibility. Open the Manage Supplier Broker subtab. Click Manage Supplier Broker. Select a supplier broker name, and click Apply to give the supplier broker access to your organization's transactions. A confirmation message indicates that the supplier broker is associated with your organization. The supplier broker can then access and manage supplier transactions.
  • 135. Buying Company View 9-1 9 Buying Company View This chapter covers the following topics: • Buying Company View • Using the Oracle iSupplier Portal Home Page with the Buying Company View • Order Information • Purchase Orders • Agreements • Purchase History • Acknowledging Changes • Shipment Information • Shipment Notices • Receipts • Account Information • Invoices • Payments • Tolerance Based Auto-Approval Buying Company View The buying company view provides the same easy to use view of procure-to-pay transactions as the supplier view. Using the Internal User View responsibility in Oracle iSupplier Portal, your buying company can view order, shipment, receipt, invoice, and payment information. They can also search for information across all suppliers, as well as respond to supplier change requests. When buyers select the Reset Password checkbox in the User Profile page, and save the changes, a Reset Password notification is sent to suppliers. The notification contains a
  • 136. 9-2 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide link, that suppliers can use to change their password. This section includes information for buying companies using Oracle iSupplier Portal, and includes the following: • Using the Oracle iSupplier Portal Home Page with the Buying Company View, page 9-2 • Order Information, page 9-3 • Shipment Information, page 9-10 • Account Information, page 9-12 Using the Oracle iSupplier Portal Home Page with the Buying Company View When you access the Oracle iSupplier Portal application using the Internal User View responsibility, the Oracle iSupplier Portal home page displays. Oracle iSupplier Portal Home Page This page provides the following information: Global buttons The following buttons display on the home page and all Oracle iSupplier Portal pages: Home - Returns you to the main portal where you can select another responsibility or
  • 137. Buying Company View 9-3 application Logout Preferences - Displays the Preferences page Tabs Oracle iSupplier Portal provides tabs for easy navigation. For example, if you want to view of a purchase order, start by clicking the Orders tab, and then click an order type in the task bar directly below the tabs. Quick Links This section displays direct links to various functionality in the Oracle iSupplier Portal application. Click any link to go directly to the corresponding page. Notifications To view notifications, click the linked subject. Notifications are messages that you may respond to. For example, a supplier may have submitted a change request and is waiting for you to respond to (accept) it. Orders at a Glance To view your most recent orders, click a purchase order number. Pending Change Requests To respond to supplier change requests, click a purchase order number. Order Information For more information, please refer to the iSupplier Portal Implementation Guide. Purchase Orders The Purchase Orders page enables you to view and search for purchase orders.
  • 138. 9-4 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide Purchase Orders Page Some examples of fields for you to enter search criteria include: • Operating Unit • PO Number • Order Date • Supplier • Supplier Site • Buyer You must enter a minimum search criteria to display search results. Minimum search criteria for purchase orders include operating unit and PO number or supplier. Using advanced search, you can build and narrow searches with the available search operators. Search operators enable you to specify the matching conditions for a search. Available search operators include: • is - Use this operator for an exact match. After you have entered you search criteria, click Go. Once your search criteria is displayed, you may view details of purchase orders in the purchase orders list.
  • 139. Buying Company View 9-5 Purchase Order Search Results page If you would like to export data regarding purchase orders, click Export. To view the details of a purchase order, click the purchase order number link. Purchase Order Details page The View Order Details displays the details of the purchase order. Use the Actions menu options to view further details for the purchase order. Note also that you can create a work confirmation for this purchase order by selecting Create Work Confirmation from the Actions menu.
  • 140. 9-6 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide The Linked Attributes column in the PO Details region has a Linked Attributes hyperlink. If you click the hyperlink, a popup displays, showing you the attributes associated to the Job - Purchasing Category - Shopping Category combination. External and Internal descriptors that are associated to the Job – Purchasing Category – Shopping Category combination are displayed along with the job/item related details. Agreements The Supplier Agreements page enables you to view and search for supplier agreement details. You may search for details on supplier agreements using the following search criteria: • Operating Unit • PO Number • Supplier • Supplier Site • Global • Effective From Date • Effective To Date • Status You must enter a minimum search criteria to display search results. Minimum search criteria for agreements include operating unit and PO number or supplier. You may view details of supplier agreements in the search results list. If you would like to export data regarding supplier agreements, click Export.
  • 141. Buying Company View 9-7 Supplier Agreements Page Purchase History The Purchase Order Revision History page enables you to view and search for purchase history details. You may search for details on purchase order revision histories using the following search criteria: • Business Unit • PO Number • Release Number • Supplier • Revision • Supplier Site • Document Type • Creation Date • Revised Date
  • 142. 9-8 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide You must enter a minimum search criteria to display search results. Minimum search criteria for purchase history includes business unit and PO number or supplier. You may view details of purchase order revision histories in the search results list. If you would like to export data regarding purchase order revision histories, click Export. Purchase Order Revision History Page Acknowledging Changes Over the lifecycle of a purchase order, the supplier may communicate changes to values on the purchase order. These changes could be changes to the purchase order values themselves. If the purchase order represents a complex work project, the supplies may need to bill you at interim points during the life of the contract. In these cases, the supplier will create a work confirmation to notify you that a certain milestone has been reached, or a certain completion percentage has been performed. In either case, you need to acknowledge the change. Route Change Requests to Requester Buying organizations can route supplier change requests to the requester for approval. A routing rule may be created based on any combination of these attributes: promised date, shipment quantity, and price for non-catalog items. Using a Purchasing responsibility, navigate to Setup > Tolerance and Routing > Supplier Change Order. Supplier change requests that meet the predefined rule are be routed to the requester
  • 143. Buying Company View 9-9 for approval. When the requester does not have the appropriate approval authorization, the approval of the requester's approval hierarchy will be needed. To acknowledge purchase order change requests: The Change Requests page enables you to view purchase orders with outstanding change requests as well as purchase orders which have been rejected by suppliers. . To view a list of purchase orders which suppliers have rejected, select Supplier Acknowledgement Rejections from the View menu and click Go. To respond to supplier change requests: 1. From the iSupplier Portal Home page, click the Orders tab, and then click the Pending Changes subtab. 2. Select Change Requests Pending Response from the View menu and click Go. 3. Select the purchase order whose changes you wish to approve/reject, and click Respond to Changes. Respond to Changes Page 4. On the Respond to Supplier Changes page, the values for the purchase order lines that have been changed by the supplier are displayed in the PO Details section. For any value that has changed, you can see the previous value and the new value, flagged with a green star. 5. To accept all the changes, click Accept All. To reject all changes, click Reject All. 6. Otherwise, for any changes you wish to address, select Accept or Reject from the Response menu. You can also enter text documentation in the Reason column. When finished, click Submit.
  • 144. 9-10 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide 7. You will receive confirmation that your response to changes has been submitted. To acknowledge a work confirmation: 1. On the Orders tab, click the Work Confirmations subtab. Work Confirmation Summary page 2. On the Work Confirmations page, select Work Confirmations to Approve from the View menu and click Go. 3. Select the work confirmation you wish to view and click Respond. 4. The work confirmation may include one or more pay items for approval. Select the appropriate action from the Response menu. You can enter a note to the supplier (if you reject a pay item, a reason is required). 5. When finished replying to the pay items on the work confirmation, click Submit. Shipment Information Shipment Notices On the View Advance Shipment Notices page, you may search for details on advance shipment notices using the following search criteria: • Shipment Number • Supplier
  • 145. Buying Company View 9-11 • Supplier Site You must enter a minimum search criteria to display search results. Minimum search criteria for shipment notices include shipment number or supplier. You may view details of shipment notices in the search results list. If you would like to export data regarding shipment notices, click Export. View Advance Shipment Notices Page Receipts On the Receipt Transactions page, you may search for details on receipt transactions using the following search criteria: • Organization • Supplier • Supplier Site • Receipt Number • Receipt Date • PO Number • Item • Supplier Item
  • 146. 9-12 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide • Receipt Location You must enter a minimum search criteria to display search results. Minimum search criteria for receipts include receipt or supplier. You may view details of receipt transactions in the search results list. If you would like to export data regarding receipt transactions, click Export. Receipt Transactions Page Account Information Invoices On the View Invoices page, you may search for details on invoices using the following search criteria: • Invoice • Supplier • Supplier Site • Invoice Date • PO Number • Payment
  • 147. Buying Company View 9-13 • Packing Slip • Payment Status • Operating Unit • Gross Amount • Invoice Date • Amount Due • Due Date You must enter a minimum search criteria to display search results. Minimum search criteria for invoices include invoice number or supplier. You may view details of invoices in the search results list. If you would like to export data regarding invoices, click Export. View Invoices Page Payments On the View Payments page, you may search for payment summaries using the following search criteria:
  • 148. 9-14 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide • Payment • Supplier • Supplier Site • Payment Date • PO Number • Packing Slip • Operating Unit • Payment Amount • Payment Date You must enter a minimum search criteria to display search results. Minimum search criteria for payments include payment number or supplier. You may view payment details in the search results list. If you would like to export data regarding payments, click Export. View Payments Page Tolerance Based Auto-Approval Buying organizations can filter supplier change order requests and auto-approve them based on predefined supplier change order tolerances. These tolerances can be set at Operating Unit level.
  • 149. Buying Company View 9-15 Supplier change order requests that fall within tolerance limits are automatically approved. The buyer is notified when a change request is auto-approved but does not need to take any action. Use a Purchasing responsibility where you can use the Setup option. Navigate to Setup > Tolerance and Routing > Supplier Change Order. Note: Tolerance limits and routing rules apply to services procurement complex purchase orders. The tolerance limits are retrieved from the data entered for both pay items and schedules. Supplier Change Order Select an operating unit and click the Go button. • In the Buyer Auto-Acceptance Tolerance table, you can find that each attribute has both Maximum Increment and Maximum Decrement entries. By default, all are set to 0. • You can find the table has more attributes than the ones suppliers can change, like Document, line, and shipment amounts. These attributes will be altered if supplier initiates changes to shipment qty or line price. The system will check against not only the values directly changed by the supplier, but also the values altered by the changes. • For some attributes, like Document Amount or Line Amount, tolerance can be set up for both % and dollar values, If only one, say %, is set up, the system will check against the % value. If both % and dollar value are set up, the system will take the more restrictive attribute that is applicable to the change order.
  • 150. 9-16 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide Click the Save button to complete the tolerance setup.
  • 151. Electronic Kanban 10-1 10 Electronic Kanban iSupplier Portal and Electronic Kanban Integration If your organization has installed both Electronic Kanban and iSupplier Portal, you can integrate the two products to display an Electronic Kanban tabbed region in iSupplier Portal. The tabbed region in iSupplier Portal displays the Summary and Actions tabs of the Electronic Kanban Workbench. This enables your supplier to view relevant data and change the status of their kanban cards. Kanban Tab If you have integrated Electronic Kanban and iSupplier Portal, you can use the Kanban tab that displays in iSupplier Portal. This tab displays the Summary and Actions sub- tabs of the Electronic Kanban Workbench. Summary Sub-Tab Use the Summary tabbed region of the Electronic Kanban Workbench to search and view kanban cards for specific items. In the Summary region, your supplier can only view kanban card summary and detail data relevant only to that supplier. It contains the following regions: • Search – This region provides advanced search and save search capabilities. See: Searching for Kanban Cards, Oracle Electronic Kanban User's Guide • Kanban Cards Summary – This region contains listing values such as destination, card number, inventory health, and source data. This region also contains configurable columns that can be detached from the workbench. You can also export the data to a spreadsheet. See: Viewing Kanban Card Summary Information, Oracle Electronic Kanban User's Guide • Kanban Cards – This region enables you to view details for the selected pull
  • 152. 10-2 Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide sequence. This region also contains configurable columns and can be detached from the workbench. This region also enables you to export data to a spreadsheet and print kanban cards. See: Viewing Kanban Card Summary Information, Oracle Electronic Kanban User's Guide See: Viewing and Updating Kanban Card Details, Oracle Electronic Kanban User's Guide Note: Cancelled kanban cards do not display in the iSupplier Portal Kanban tab. Use the Setup tabbed region in Electronic Kanban Workbench to view and perform transactions for cancelled cards See: Kanban Pull Sequence, Card, and Parameter Setup, Oracle Electronic Kanban User's Guide Actions Sub-Tab In the Actions region, your supplier can only view and create actions for electronic kanban cards relevant to them. Predefined supply statuses cannot be changed. The supplier can change the status to In Process, or a custom status that is attached to the predefined status of In Process. See: Changing Status Action for Kanban Cards, Oracle Electronic Kanban User's Guide
  • 153. Glossary-1 Glossary accept An action to indicate that you accept the previous approver's authorization. acceptance Supplier acknowledgement of a purchase order that indicates that the supplier agreed to and accepted the terms of the purchase order. account See: accounting flexfield account alias An easily recognized name or label representing an account charged on miscellaneous transactions. You may view, report, and reserve against an account alias. Account Generator A feature that uses Oracle Workflow to provide various Oracle Applications with the ability to construct Accounting Flexfield combinations automatically using custom construction criteria. You define a group of steps that determine how to fill in your Accounting Flexfield segments. You can define additional processes and/or modify the default process(es), depending on the application. See also: activity (Workflow), function, item type, lookup type, node, process, protection level, result type, transition, Workflow Engine accounting flexfield A feature used to define your account coding for accounting distributions. For example, this structure can correspond to your company, budget account, and project account numbers. For simplicity, Inventory and Oracle Manufacturing use the term account to refer to the accounting flexfield. accounting flexfield limit The maximum amount you authorize an employee to approve for a particular range of accounting flexfields.
  • 154. Glossary-2 accounting period The fiscal period a company uses to report financial results, such as a calendar month or fiscal period. accounts payable accrual account The account used to accrue payable liabilities when you receive your items. Always used for inventory and outside processing purchases. You can also accrue expenses at the time of receipt. Used by Purchasing and Inventory, the accounts payable account represents your non-invoiced receipts, and is included in your month end accounts payable liability balance. This account balance is cleared when the invoice is matched in Payables. accrual accounting Recognition of revenue when you sell goods and recognition of expenses when a supplier provides services or goods. Accrual based accounting matches expenses with associated revenues when you receive the benefit of the good and services rather than when cash is paid or received. acquisition cost The cost necessary to obtain inventory and prepare it for its intended use. It includes material costs and various costs associated with procurement and shipping of items, such as duty, freight, drayage, customs charges, storage charges, other supplier's charges, and so on. activity (Workflow) An Oracle Workflow unit of work performed during a business process. See also: activity attribute, function activity activity attribute A parameter for an Oracle Workflow function activity that controls how the function activity operates. You define an activity attribute by displaying the activity's Attributes properties page in the Activities window of Oracle Workflow Builder. You assign a value to an activity attribute by displaying the activity node's Attribute Values properties page in the Process window. alert A specific condition defined in Oracle Alert that checks your database and performs actions based on the information it finds there. alert action In Oracle Quality, an electronic mail message, operating system script, SQL script, or concurrent program request that is invoked when specified action rule conditions are met.
  • 155. Glossary-3 alphanumeric number type An option for numbering documents, employees, and suppliers where assigned numbers can contain letters as well as numbers. amount based order An order you place, receive, and pay based solely on the amount of service you purchase. approve An action you take to indicate that you consider the contents of the purchasing document to be correct. If the document passes the submission tests and you have sufficient authority, Purchasing approves the document. approved A purchase order or requisition status that indicates a user with appropriate authorization approved the purchase or requisition. Purchasing verifies that the purchase order or requisition is complete during the approval process. archiving The process of recording all historical versions of approved purchase orders. Purchasing automatically archives a purchase order when you approve it for the first time. Purchasing subsequently archives your purchase orders during the approval process if you have increased the revision number since the last time you approved the purchase order. ASC X12 Accredited Standards Committee X12 group. This group is accredited by ANSI and maintains and develops the EDI standards for the United States and Canada. ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange. A standard file format used for transmission and storage. ASCII is a seven-bit code with an eighth bit used for parity. ASL Approved Suppliers List. A list where you can set up your Approved Suppliers, Sites, and Items. ASN (Advanced Shipping Notice) asset item Anything you make, purchase, or sell including components, subassemblies, finished
  • 156. Glossary-4 products, or supplies which carries a cost and is valued in your asset subinventories. asset subinventory Subdivision of an organization, representing either a physical area or a logical grouping of items, such as a storeroom where quantity balances are maintained for all items and values are maintained for asset items. assigned units The number of resource units assigned to work at an operation in a routing. For example, if you have 10 units of machine resource available at a department, you can assign up to 10 of these units to an operation in a routing. The more units you assign, the less elapsed time Work in Process schedules for the operation. assignment hierarchy You can assign sourcing rules and bills of distribution to a single item in an inventory organization, all items in an inventory organization, categories of items in an inventory organization, a site, and an organization. These assignments have an order of precedence relative to one another. assignment set A group of sourcing rules and/or bills of distribution and a description of the items and/or organizations whose replenishment they control. attribute See: activity attribute, item type attribute authorization check A set of tests on a purchasing document to determine if the document approver has sufficient authority to perform the approval action. automatic numbering A numbering option Purchasing uses to assign numbers to your documents, employees, or suppliers automatically. automatic sourcing A Purchasing feature which allows you to specify for predefined items a list of approved suppliers and to associate source documents for these suppliers. When you create a requisition or purchase order line for the item, Purchasing automatically provides appropriate pricing for the specified quantity based on the top-ranked open source document for the supplier with the highest percentage allocation. autoschedule You can set up a supplier/site/item to have the schedules built by the concurrent
  • 157. Glossary-5 program autoschedule. The schedules are not built by the Scheduler's Workbench. balancing entity An organization for which you prepare a balance sheet, represented as a balancing segment value in your accounting flexfield. This is the equivalent of a fund in government organizations. Examples include companies, strategic business units, and divisions. balancing segment An Accounting Flexfield segment you define so that Oracle General Ledger automatically balances all journal entries for each value of this segment. For example, if your company segment is a balancing segment, General Ledger ensures that within every journal entry, the total debits to company 01 equal the total credits to company 01. base unit The unit of measure to which you convert all units of measure within one class. The base unit is the smallest or most commonly used unit of measure in the class. For example, millimeter is the base unit in the Length class. You define your base unit of measure when you create your unit class. bill of distribution Specifies a mutilevel replenishment network of warehouses, distribution centers, and manufacturing centers (plants). bill-to address The customer's billing address. It is also known as invoice-to address. blanket purchase agreement A type of purchase order you issue before you request actual delivery of goods or services. You normally create a blanket purchase agreement to document a long-term supplier agreement. A blanket purchase agreement may contain an effective date and an expiration date, a committed amount, or quantity. You use a blanket purchase agreement as a tool for specifying agreed prices and delivery dates for goods and services before ordering them. blanket purchase order See: blanket purchase agreement blanket release An actual order of goods and services against a blanket purchase agreement. The blanket purchase agreement determines the characteristics and prices of the items. The blanket release specifies actual quantities and dates ordered for the items. You identify
  • 158. Glossary-6 a blanket release by the combination of the blanket purchase agreement number and the release number. blind receiving A site option that requires your receiving staff to count all items on a receipt line. Blind receiving prevents display of expected receipt quantities in receiving windows. budget organization An entity, such as a department, division, or activity responsible for entering and maintaining budget data. You define budget organizations for your agency, then assign appropriate accounting flexfields to each budget organization. bucket patterns Bucket patterns can be defined to include daily, weekly, monthly, or quarterly buckets. Bucket patterns are used to bucket quantity requirements on Planning or Shipping Schedules. budgetary account An account segment value (such as 6110) that is assigned one of the two budgetary account types. You use budgetary accounts to record the movement of funds through the budget process from appropriation to expended appropriation. business document A document used for conducting business between two trading partners - a purchase order or invoice, for example. business group An organization which represents the consolidated enterprise, a major division, or an operation company. This entity partitions Human Resources information. buyer Person responsible for placing item resupply orders with suppliers and negotiating supplier contracts. cancel You can cancel a purchase order after approving it. When you cancel a purchase order, you prevent anyone from adding new lines to the purchase order or receiving additional goods. Purchasing still allows billing for goods you received before cancelling the purchase order. Purchasing releases any unfilled requisition lines for reassignment to another purchase order.
  • 159. Glossary-7 candidate A record Purchasing selects to purge based on the last activity date you specify. Purchasing selects only records that you have not updated since the last activity date. Purchasing does not purge a candidate until you confirm it. carrier See: freight carrier category Code used to group items with similar characteristics, such as plastics, metals, or glass items. category set A feature in Inventory where users may define their own group of categories. Typical category sets include purchasing, materials, costing, and planning. check funds To certify whether you have funds available to complete your requisition or purchase order. The difference between the amount you are authorized to spend and the amount of your expenditures plus encumbrances equals your funds available. You can certify funds available at any time when you enter a requisition or a purchase order. You can track funds availability at different authority levels on-line. close A purchase order is automatically closed once it is received (if you require a receipt) and is billed for all purchase order shipments. Since you do not require or expect any further activity, Purchasing closes the purchase order. You can also manually close the purchase order early if you do not expect further activity. Adding lines to it or receiving against it, reopens the purchase order. Purchasing does not consider closed purchase orders for accruals. close for invoicing A purchase order control that you can assign manually or that Purchasing can assign automatically when the amount invoiced reaches a defined percentage of the order quantity. close for receiving A purchase order control you can assign manually or that Purchasing can assign automatically when the amount received reaches a defined percentage of the order quantity. column headings Descriptions of the contents of each column in the report.
  • 160. Glossary-8 combination of segment values A combination of segment values uniquely describes the information stored in a field made up of segments. A different combination of segment values results when you change the value of one or more segments. When you alter the combination of segment values, you alter the description of the information stored in the field. commitment A contractual guarantee with a customer for future purchases, usually with deposits or prepayments. You can then create invoices against the commitment to absorb the deposit or prepayment. Receivables automatically records all necessary accounting entries for your commitments. Oracle Order Entry allows you to enter order lines against commitments. A journal entry you make to record an anticipated expenditure as indicated by approval of a requisition. Also known as pre-commitment, pre-encumbrance or pre- lien. committed amount The amount you agree to spend with a supplier. concurrent manager Components of your applications concurrent processing facility that monitor and run time-consuming tasks for you without tying up your terminal. Whenever you submit a request, such as running a report, a concurrent manager does the work for you, letting you perform many tasks simultaneously. concurrent process A task in the process of completing. Each time you submit a task, you create a new concurrent process. A concurrent process runs simultaneously with other concurrent processes (and other activities on your computer) to help you complete multiple tasks at once with no interruptions to your terminal. concurrent queue A list of concurrent requests awaiting completion by a concurrent manager. Each concurrent manager has a queue of requests waiting in line. If your system administrator sets up simultaneous queuing, your request can wait to run in more than one queue. concurrent request A request to complete a task for you. You issue a request whenever you submit a task, such as running a report. Once you submit a task, the concurrent manager automatically takes over for you, completing your request without further involvement from you, or interruption to your work. Concurrent managers process your request
  • 161. Glossary-9 according to when you submit the request and the priority you assign to your request. If you do not assign a priority to your request, your application prioritizes the request for you. configuration A product a customer orders by choosing a base model and a list of options. It can be shipped as individual pieces as a set (kit) or as an assembly (configuration item). consigned location The physical location of inventories which resides on the property of buyers and sellers through a consigned agreement with the manufacturer. context element A collection element associated with a quality collection transaction. Values for context elements are automatically transferred to Oracle Quality as their parent collection transaction are entered. context field prompt A question or prompt to which a user enters a response, called a context field value. When Oracle Applications displays a descriptive flexfield pop-up window, it displays your context field prompt after it displays any global segments you have defined. Each descriptive flexfield can have up to one context prompt. context field value A response to your context field prompt. Your response is composed of a series of characters and a description. The response and description together provide a unique value for your context prompt, such as 1500, Journal Batch ID, or 2000, Budget Formula Batch ID. The context field value determines which additional descriptive flexfield segments appear. context segment value A response to your context-sensitive segment. The response is composed of a series of characters and a description. The response and description together provide a unique value for your context-sensitive segment, such as Redwood Shores, Oracle Headquarters, or Minneapolis, Merrill Aviation's Hub. context-sensitive segment A descriptive flexfield segment that appears in a second pop-up window when you enter a response to your context field prompt. For each context response, you can define multiple context segments, and you control the sequence of the context segments in the second pop-up window. Each context-sensitive segment typically prompts you for one item of information related to your context response.
  • 162. Glossary-10 contract An agreement between you and a supplier for unspecified goods or services. This agreement may include terms and conditions, committed amount, and an effective and expiration date. You reference contract purchase agreements directly on standard purchase order lines. Purchasing monitors the amount you have spent against contract purchase agreements. conversion Converts foreign currency transactions to your functional currency. See also: foreign currency conversion conversion formula The number that, when multiplied by the quantity of one unit of the source base unit, gives you the quantity of one unit of the destination base units in the interclass conversion. The number is also the conversion between units for standard unit conversion or item-specific conversion. copy An AutoCreate option that lets a buyer designate a specific requisition line as the source of information that Purchasing copies to the purchase order or RFQ line. corporate exchange rate An exchange rate you can optionally use to perform foreign currency conversion. The corporate exchange rate is usually a standard market rate determined by senior financial management for use throughout the organization. cost element A classification for the cost of an item. Oracle Manufacturing supports five cost elements: material, material overhead, resource, outside processing, and overhead. cost variance The difference between the actual and expected cost. Oracle Manufacturing and Payables supports the following cost variances: invoice price, resource rate, and standard cost variances. credit memo A document that partially or fully reverses an original invoice. CUM Total received for a supplier site, item, and organization within a CUM Period.
  • 163. Glossary-11 CUM Period The Period you are going to use to track the quantity received to date for a particular organization. In the Automotive industry this may be a model year. current on-hand quantity Total quantity of the item on-hand before a transaction is processed. default value Information Oracle Applications automatically enters depending on other information you enter. Also referred to as defaults or a defaulted value. deliver-to location A location where you deliver goods previously received from a supplier to individual requestors. delivery Internal delivery of items to requestors within your organization. demand Projected inventory issue transactions against an item. For Order Management, it is an action you take to communicate current or future product needs to manufacturing. depot repair A process used to track items returned by a customer for repair or replacement. descriptive flexfield An Oracle Applications feature used to collect information unique to your business. You determine the additional information you need and descriptive flexfield lets you customize your application to your needs without additional programming. descriptor Descriptors are the attributes of an item or service that help describe it to the requester. Base descriptors apply to all items or services in the catalog. Some base descriptors, such as Description, are required. Local descriptors apply only to items within a specific shopping category and could also be thought of as category attributes. destination base unit The unit of measure to which you are converting when you define interclass conversions. Your destination base unit is the base unit of a unit class.
  • 164. Glossary-12 destination organization An inventory organization that receives item shipments from a given organization. detailed message action A message representing one exception. Oracle Alert inserts the exception values into the text of the message. direct receipt The receipt of an item directly to its final destination (either directly to the person who requested the item or directly to the final inventory location). It differs from a standard receipt in that it is received into a receiving location and delivered in one transaction, rather than received and delivered in two separate transactions. discrete manufacturing A manufacturing environment where you build assemblies in discrete jobs or batches. Different from a repetitive production environment where you build assemblies on production or assembly lines at a daily rate. distribution account An account where you record material, material overhead, resource, outside processing, and overhead charges incurred by a discrete job or repetitive assembly. In a standard costing system, this is where you record your standard costs. distribution list A predefined list of electronic mail IDs that you can use rather than entering individual mail IDs (To, Cc, and Bcc) when defining mail message alert actions in Oracle Quality. Distribution Resource Planning (DRP) Application of replenishmnent inventory calculations to assist in planning of key resources contained in a distribution system, such as sourcing and transport. DRP is an extension of distribution requirements planning, which applies MRP logic to inventory replenishment at branch warehouses. document reference A message that precisely identifies the document or part of document you want to describe using standard or one-time notes. drop shipment A method of fulfilling sales orders by selling products without handling, stocking, or delivering them. The selling company buys a product from a supplier and has the supplier ship the product directly to customers.
  • 165. Glossary-13 due date The date when scheduled receipts are currently expected to be received into inventory and become available for use. duplicate An exception Oracle Alert located for the same action set during a previous alert check. Oracle Alert does not consider a detail action to contain a duplicate exception until Oracle Alert sends the final action level to a specific action set, and then locates the same exception for the same action set again. For example, if on Monday Oracle Alert notifies a buyer that a supplier shipment is overdue, then on Tuesday Oracle Alert finds the shipment is still overdue, you can choose whether Oracle Alert should re-notify the buyer or suppress the message. dynamic distribution You can use output variables to represent electronic mail IDs. When you define mail message alert actions in Oracle Quality, the message is sent to all defined mail IDs. dynamic insertion Automatically creates new accounting flexfield combinations as you enter them. If you do not use dynamic insertion, you create new accounting flexfield combinations with a separate window. EDI See: Electronic Data Interchange (EDI) EDIFACT Electronic Data Interchange for Administration, Commerce, and Trade is the current acronym for standards developed within Working Party 4. See also WP4 electronic commerce Conducting business via an electronic medium. This includes methods of exchanging business information electronically, such as Electronic Data Interchange (EDI), FAX, email, and eforms. Electronic Data Interchange (EDI) Exchanging business documents electronically between trading partners. EDI subscribes to standard formats for conducting these electronic transactions as stated by various standards. electronic funds transfer A method of payment in which your bank transfers funds electronically from your bank account into another bank account. In Oracle Payables, funds are transferred from your
  • 166. Glossary-14 account into that of a supplier. This information is sent to the bank in a file. employee supervisor hierarchy An approval routing structure based on employee/supervisor relationships. See position hierarchy encumbrance See: purchase order encumbrance. encumbrance type An encumbrance category that allows you to track your expenditures according to your purchase approval process and better control your planned expenditures. You can set up separate encumbrance types for each stage in your purchasing cycle to track your spending at each level. Examples of encumbrance types are commitments (requisition encumbrances) and obligations (purchase order encumbrances). event alert An alert that runs when a specific event occurs that you define. For example, you can define an event alert to immediately send a message to the buyer if an item is rejected on inspection. exception An occurrence of the specified condition found during an alert check. For example, an alert testing for invoices on hold may find five invoices on hold, or none. Each invoice on hold is an exception. exception message A message received indicating a situation that meets your predefined exception set for an item, such as Items that are overcommitted, Items with excess inventory, and Orders to be rescheduled out. exception reporting An integrated system of alerts and action sets that focuses attention on time-sensitive or critical information, shortens your reaction time, and provides faster exception distribution. Exception reporting communicates information by either electronic mail messages or paper reports. expected receipts report A printed report of all expected receipts for a time period and location you specify. expense item Anything you make, purchase, or sell including components, subassemblies, finished products, or supplies and that does not carry a cost. Also known as a non-asset item.
  • 167. Glossary-15 expense subinventory Subdivision of an organization, representing either a physical area or a logical grouping of items, such as a storeroom where no value exists but the quantities may be tracked. exchange rate A rate that represents the amount of one currency you can exchange for another at some point in time. Oracle Applications use the daily, periodic, and historical exchange rates you maintain to perform foreign currency conversion, re-evaluation, and translation. You can enter and maintain daily exchange rates for Oracle Purchasing to use to perform foreign currency conversion. Oracle Purchasing multiplies the exchange rate times the foreign currency to calculate functional currency. exchange rate type A specification of the source of an exchange rate. For example, a user exchange rate or a corporate exchange rate. See also: corporate exchange rate, spot exchange rate explode An AutoCreate option that lets a buyer split a single requisition line for an item into one or more requisition lines for different items. Use this option to expand a requisition line for an item that your company purchases in component parts. express delivery An option that lets you deliver the entire quantity of a receipt without entering quantities for each shipment or distribution. express receipt A site option that lets you receive an entire purchase order or blanket purchase agreement release with one keystroke. express requisitions To create requisitions quickly from predefined requisition templates. You only need to provide an accounting flexfield and quantities to create a requisition for commonly purchased items. FIFO (first-in-first-out) costing method A cost flow methodused for inventory valuation. Inventory balances and values are updated perpetually after each transaction is sequentially costed. It assumes that the earliest inventory units received or produced are the first units used or shipped. The ending inventory therefore consists of the most recently acquired goods. FIFO cost flow does not have to match the physical flow of inventory.
  • 168. Glossary-16 final close A purchase order control you can assign to prevent modifications to or actions against completed documents, lines, and shipments by final closing them. Final-closed documents are not accessible in the corresponding entry windows, and you cannot perform the following actions against final-closed entities: receive, transfer, inspect, deliver, correct receipt quantities, invoice, return to supplier, or return to receiving. firm A purchase order control. When you firm an order, Master Scheduling/MRP uses the firm date to create a time fence within which it does not suggest new planned purchase orders, cancellations, or reschedule-in actions. It continues to suggest reschedule-out actions for orders within the time fence. If several shipments with different promised or need-by dates reference the same item, Master Scheduling/MRP sets the time fence at the latest of all scheduled dates. flexfield A field made up of segments. Each segment has a name you assign and a set of valid values. See also: descriptive flexfield, key flexfield flexfield segment One of the parts of your key flexfield, separated from the other parts by a symbol you choose (such as -, /, or ). Each segment typically represents a cost center, company, item family, or color code. FOB See: freight on board. foreign currency A currency you define for your ledger for recording and conducting accounting transactions in a currency other than your functional currency. When you enter and pay an invoice in a foreign currency, Oracle Payables automatically converts the foreign currency into your functional currency based on the exchange rate you define. See also: exchange rate, functional currency forward An action you take to send a document to another employee without attempting to approve it yourself. four-way matching Purchasing performs four-way matching to verify that purchase order, receipt, inspection and invoice quantities match within tolerance.
  • 169. Glossary-17 freight on board (FOB) The point or location where the ownership title of goods is transferred from the seller to the buyer. freeze You can freeze a purchase order after printing. By freezing a purchase order, you prevent anyone from adding new lines or changing the purchase order. You can continue to receive goods and be billed on already existing purchase order lines. The ability to continue receiving against the purchase order is the difference between freezing and cancelling. freight carrier A commercial company used to send item shipments from one address to another. function A PL/SQL stored procedure referenced by an Oracle Workflow function activity that can enforce business rules, perform automated tasks within an application, or retrieve application information. The stored procedure accepts standard arguments and returns a completion result. See also function activity An automated Oracle Workflow unit of work that is defined by a PL/SQL stored procedure. See also: function functional currency Currency you use to record transactions and maintain your accounting information. The functional currency is generally the currency used to perform most of your company's business transactions. You determine the functional currency for the ledger you use in your organization. Also called base currency. funds available The difference between your budget, less encumbrances of all types and actual expenditures. funds checking The process of certifying funds available. When you check funds, the transaction amount is compared with your funds available, and you are notified whether funds are available for your transaction. Checking funds does not reserve funds for your transaction. You can check funds when you enter a requisition, purchase order, or invoice.
  • 170. Glossary-18 funds reservation The creation of requisition, purchase order, or invoice encumbrance journal entries. Purchasing immediately updates your funds available balances and creates an encumbrance journal entry in which you can post in your general ledger. This is also the process of reserving funds available. You can reserve funds when you enter actual, budget, or encumbrance journals. When you reserve funds, the amount of your transaction is compared with your funds available and you are notified on-line whether funds are available. general ledger transfer The process of creating a postable batch for the general ledger from summarized activity for a given period. Using Journal Import in General Ledger, you can create a postable batch in your general ledger. After running Journal Import, you can post your journal using the General Ledger posting process. inspection A procedure you perform to ensure that items received conform to your quality standards. You can use inspections to prevent payment for goods and services that fail to meet your quality standards. inter-organization transfer Transfer of items from one inventory organization to another You can have freight charges and transfer credits associated with inter-organization transfer. You can choose to ship items directly or have them go through intransit inventory. interclass conversion The conversion formula you define between base units from the different unit classes. intercompany invoice An automatically generated statement that eliminates intercompany profit. This transaction may occur between organizations in the same or different legal entities. internal requisition See: internal sales order, purchase requisition. internal sales order A request within your company for goods or services. An internal sales order originates from an employee or from another process as a requisition, such as inventory or manufacturing, and becomes an internal sales order when the information is transferred from Purchasing to Order Management. Also known asinternal requisition or purchase requisition.
  • 171. Glossary-19 intransit inventory Items being shipped from one inventory organization to another. While items are intransit you can view and update arrival date, freight charges, and so on. inventory item Items you stock in inventory. You control inventory for inventory items by quantity and value. Typically, the inventory item remains an asset until you consume it. You recognize the cost of an inventory item as an expense when you consume it or sell it. You generally value the inventory for an item by multiplying the item standard cost by the quantity on hand. inventory organization An organization that tracks inventory transactions and balances, and/or that manufactures or distributes products. inventory transaction A record of material movement. The basic information for a transaction includes the item number, the quantity moved, the transaction amount, the accounting flexfields, and the date. See material transaction invoice A summarized list of charges, including payment terms, invoice item information, and other information that is sent to a customer by a supplier for payment. invoice price variance The difference between the purchase order price for an item and the actual invoice price multiplied by the quantity invoiced. Payables records this variance after matching the invoice to the purchase order. Typically, the price variance is small since the price the supplier charges you for an item should be the one you negotiated on your purchase order. item Anything you make, purchase, or sell, including components, subassemblies, finished products, or supplies. Oracle Manufacturing also uses items to represent planning items that you can forecast, standard lines that you can include on invoices, and option classes you can use to group options in model and option class bills. item attributes Specific characteristics of an item, such as order cost, item status, revision control, COGS account, etc. item category See: category.
  • 172. Glossary-20 item-specific conversion The conversion formula you define between the primary unit of measure for an item and another unit of measure from the same unit class. If you define a conversion rate for a specific item, Purchasing uses the item-specific conversion rate instead of the standard conversion rate for converting between units for that item. item type A term used by Oracle Workflow to refer to a grouping of all items of a particular category that share the same set of item attributes, used as a high level grouping for processes. For example, each Account Generator item type (e.g. FA Account Generator) contains a group of processes for determining how an Accounting Flexfield code combination is created. See also item type attribute. item type attribute A feature of a particular Oracle Workflow item type, also known as an item attribute. An item type attribute is defined as a variable whose value can be looked up and set by the application that maintains the item. An item type attribute and its value is available to all activities in a process. Item Validation Organization The inventory organization that contains your master list of items. You define it in the Financials Options window. See also organization. job A category of personnel in your organization. Examples of a typical job include Vice President, Buyer, and Manager. See also position. key flexfield A set of segments. You choose the number of segments you want, the length of each segment, the order of your segments and more. You can then define the list of acceptable values for each segment. key flexfield segment One of up to 30 different sections of your key flexfield. You separate segments from each other by a symbol you choose (such as -, / or .). Each segment can be up to 25 characters long. Each key flexfield segment typically captures one element of your business or operations structure, such as company, division, region, or product for the accounting flexfield and item, version number, or color code for the item flexfield. key flexfield segment value A series of characters and a description that provide a unique value for this element, such as 0100, Eastern region, V20, or Version 2.0.
  • 173. Glossary-21 LIFO (last-in-first-out) costing method A cost flow methodused for inventory valuation. Inventory balances and values are updated perpetually after each transaction is sequentially costed. It assumes that the most recent inventory units received or produced are the first units used or shipped. The ending inventory consists of old goods acquired in the earliest purchases or completions. legal entity An organization that represents a legal company for which you prepare fiscal or tax reports. You assign tax identifiers and other relevant information to this entity. license plate number (LPN) LPNs are unique identifiers used to store and transact inventory throughout the supply chain. They store a container's contents, including item, revision, lot and serial numbers, and quantity. line type Determines whether a purchasing document line is for goods, services, or any other type that you define. The line type also determines whether the document line is based on price and quantity or on amount. location A shorthand name for an address. Location appears in address lists of values to let you select the correct address based on an intuitive name. For example, you may want to give the location name of 'Receiving Dock' to the Ship To business purpose of 100 Main Street. locator Physical area within a subinventory where you store material, such as a row, aisle, bin, or shelf. lockbox A service commercial banks offer corporate customers to enable them to outsource their accounts receivable payment processing. Lockbox processors set up special postal codes to receive payments, deposit funds and provide electronic account receivable input to corporate customers. A lockbox operation can process millions of transactions a month. logical organization A business unit that tracks items for accounting purposes but does not physically exist. See organization.
  • 174. Glossary-22 lookup code The internal name of a value defined in an Oracle Workflow lookup type. See also lookup type. lookup type An Oracle Workflow predefined list of values. Each value in a lookup type has an internal and a display name. See alsolookup code. long notes A Purchasing feature that lets you provide up to 64K characters per note. You can add long notes to your headers and lines. Purchasing automatically wraps the note while you are typing. You can also format the note by providing extra lines or indenting parts of your message. You can provide as many long notes as you want wherever the long notes capability is available. lot A specific batch of an item identified by a number. manual numbering A numbering option to let someone assign numbers manually to documents, employees, and suppliers. Make or Buy An item attribute the Planner Workbench uses to default an appropriate value for implementation type when implementing planned orders for the item. A value Make means the item is usually manufactured. The Planner Workbench defaults the implementation type for planned orders for the item to Discrete job. The planning process passes demand down from manufactured items to lower level components. A value of Buy means the item is usually purchased. The Planner Workbench defaults the implementation type for planned orders for the item to Purchase requisition. The planning process does not pass demand down from purchased items to lower level components. material release For a Planning Schedule, indicates that the schedule forecast requirements include unimplemented Planned Orders and Approved Requisitions. The schedule released quantities include Approved Releases. material requirements planning (MRP) A process that utilizes bill of material information, a master schedule, and current inventory information to calculate net requirements for materials.
  • 175. Glossary-23 message The text or data Oracle Alert sends when it finds an exception while checking an alert. min-max planning An inventory planning method used to determine when and how much to order based on a fixed user-entered minimum and maximum inventory levels. modal window Certain actions that you perform may cause a modal window to display. A modal window requires you to act on its contents before you can continue, usually by choosing OK or Cancel. move transaction A transaction to move assemblies from operation to operation or within an operation on a discrete job or repetitive schedule. MPS Plan A set of planned orders and suggestions to release or reschedule existing schedule receipts for material to satisfy a given master schedule for MPS-planned items or MRP- planned items that have an MPS-planned component. Stated in discrete quantities and order dates. MRP plan A set of planned orders and suggestions to release or reschedule existing schedule receipts for material to satisfy a given master schedule for dependent demand items. Stated in discrete quantities and order dates. multi-source An AutoCreate option that lets a buyer distribute the quantity of a single requisition line to several suppliers whenever the buyer wants to purchase the requisition line item from more than one supplier. multiple sets of books A General Ledger concept for having separate entities for which chart of accounts, calendar, or functional currency differs. node An instance of an activity in an Oracle Workflow process diagram as shown in the Process window of Oracle Workflow Builder. See also process.
  • 176. Glossary-24 note name A name that uniquely identifies a standard or one-time note. You use note names to locate a note you want to use or copy on a document. numeric number type An option for numbering documents, employees, and suppliers where assigned numbers contain only numbers. offsetting account The source or opposite side of an accounting entry. omit An AutoCreate option that lets a buyer prevent Purchasing from including certain displayed requisition lines when creating a purchase order or RFQ. If you omit a requisition line, Purchasing returns it to the available pool of requisition lines. on-hand quantity The physical quantity of an item existing in inventory. one-time item An item you want to order but do not want to maintain in the Items window. You define a one-time item when you create a requisition or purchase order. You can report or query on a one-time item by specifying the corresponding item class. one-time note A unique message you can attack to an order, return, order line, or return line to convey important information. open An open purchase order exists if the purchase order has any lines that have not been fully invoiced and are not cancelled. If you require receipt for items you order, an open purchase order exists if any lines have not been fully received and fully invoiced and are not cancelled. open interface A Manufacturing function that lets you import or export data from other systems through an open interface. An example is a bar code reader device accumulating data you later import into your manufacturing system for further processing. operating unit An organization that partitions data for subledger products (AP, AR, PO, OE). It is
  • 177. Glossary-25 roughly equivalent to a single pre-Multi-Org installation. order cycle A sequence of actions you or Oracle Management perform on an order to complete the order. An order cycle lets you define the activity an order follows from initial entry through closing. Order cycles are assigned to order types. organization A business unit such as a plant, warehouse, division, department, and so on. outside operation An operation that contains outside resources and possibly internal resources as well. outside processing Performing work on a discrete job or repetitive schedule using resources provided by a supplier. outside processing operation Any operation that has an outside processing resource. See outside resource outside processing item An item you include on a purchase order line to purchase supplier services as part of your assembly build process. This item can be the assembly itself or a non-stocked item which represents the service performed on the assembly. outside resource A resource provided by a supplier that you include in your routings, such as supplier sourced labor or services. This includes both PO move and PO receipt resources. parameter A variable used to restrict information in a report, or determine the form of a report. For example, you may want to limit your report to the current month, or display information by supplier number instead of supplier name. payment batch A group of invoices selected for automatic payment processing via Oracle Payables AutoSelect function. payment terms The due date and discount date for payment of an invoice. For example, the payment term '2% 10, Net 30' lets a customer take a two percent discount if payment is received within 10 days, with the balance due within 30 days of the invoice date.
  • 178. Glossary-26 pending A status where a process or transaction is waiting to be completed. period See: accounting period. period expense An expense you record in the period it occurs. An expense is typically a debit. periodic alert An alert that checks your database for the presence of a specific condition according to a schedule you define. planned purchase order A type of purchase order you issue before you order actual delivery of goods and services for specific dates and locations. You normally enter a planned purchase order to specify items you want to order and when you want delivery of the items. You later enter a shipment release against the planned purchase order when you actually want to order the items. PO See: purchase order PO move resource An outside resource that is automatically charged upon receipt of a purchase order. PO move resources also automatically initiate shop floor move transactions upon receipt. PO receipt resource An outside resource that is automatically charged upon receipt of a purchase order. position A specific function within a job category. Examples of typical positions associated with the Vice President job include: Vice President of Manufacturing, Vice President of Engineering, and Vice President of Sales. See job. position hierarchy A structure of positions used to define management line reporting and control access to employee information. pre-approved A document that has been approved by someone with final approval authority, but then forwarded to yet another approver for additional approval; or a document that has
  • 179. Glossary-27 been authorized for approval but for which funds have not yet been reserved (if your organization uses encumbrance). A document with a status of Pre-Approved does not show up as supply until its status changes to Approved. price break line Supplier pricing information for an item or purchasing category on a quotation. The price you enter on a price break line depends on the quantity you order from your supplier. Usually, suppliers provide you with price break line structures to indicate the price you would pay for an item depending on the quantity you order. Generally, the more you order, the less expensive your unit price. Also, depending on the quantity you order, a supplier may provide you with different purchase conditions, such as advantageous payment or freight terms when you buy in large quantities. process A set of Oracle Workflow activities that need to be performed to accomplish a business goal. See also Account Generator, process activity, process definition. process activity An Oracle Workflow process modelled as an activity so that it can be referenced by other processes; also known as a subprocess. See also . processing status The processing state of a row (record) in an open interface table. Common statuses include, but are not restricted to, Pending, Running, and Error. profile option A set of changeable options that affect the way your applications run. In general, profile options can be set at one or more of the following levels: site, application, responsibility, and user. project A unit of work broken down into one or more tasks, for which you specify revenue and billing methods, invoice formats, a managing organization, and project manager and bill rates schedules. You can charge costs to a project, as well as generate and maintain revenue, invoice, unbilled receivable and unearned revenue information for a project. Project Manufacturing A type of manufacturing environment where production requirements are driven by large projects. You can plan, schedule, process, and cost against a specific project or a group of projects. If Oracle Project Manufacturing is installed and the Project References Enabled and Project Control Level parameters are set in the Organization Parameters window in Oracle Inventory, you can assign project and, if required, task references to sales orders, planned orders, jobs, requisitions, purchase orders, and other entities
  • 180. Glossary-28 within Oracle Manufacturing. If the Project Cost Collection Enabled parameter is also set, you can collect and transfer manufacturing cost to Oracle Projects. project purchase order A purchase order with a project and task reference. project requisition A requisition with a project and task reference. promise date The date on which your supplier agrees to ship the products to you, or the date that you will receive the products. proprietary accounty An account segment value (such as 3500) that is assigned one of the five proprietary account types. protection level In Oracle Workflow, a numeric value ranging from 0 to 1000 that represents who the data is protected from for modification. When workflow data is defined, it can either be set to customizable (1000), meaning anyone can modify it, or it can be assigned a protection level that is equal to the access level of the user defining the data. In the latter case, only users operating at an access level equal to or lower than the data's protection level can modify the data. See also Account Generator. purchase order A type of purchase order you issue when you request delivery of goods or services for specific dates and locations. You can order multiple items for each planned or standard purchase order. Each purchase order line can have multiple shipments and you can distribute each shipment across multiple accounts. See standard purchase orderand planned purchase order. purchase order encumbrance A transaction representing a legally binding purchase. Purchasing subtracts purchase order encumbrances from funds available when you approve a purchase order. If you cancel a purchase order, Purchasing creates appropriate reversing entries in your general ledger. Purchase order encumbrance is also known as obligation, encumbrance, or lien. purchase order receipt See: receipt.
  • 181. Glossary-29 purchase order revision A number that distinguishes printed purchase order versions. Purchasing automatically sets the revision to 0 when you initially create a purchase order. Each purchase order you print displays the current revision number. purchase order shipment A schedule for each purchase order line composed of the quantity you want to ship to each location. You can also provide delivery dates for each shipment line. You can create an unlimited number of shipments for each purchase order line. You receive goods and services against each shipment line. purchase price variance The variance that you record at the time you receive an item in inventory or supplier services into work in process. This variance is the difference between the standard unit cost for the item or service and the purchase unit price multiplied by the quantity received. You record purchase price variances in a purchase price variance account for your organization. Since standard cost is a planned cost, you may incur variances between the standard cost and the purchase order price. purchase requisition An internal request for goods or services. A requisition can originate from an employee or from another process, such as inventory or manufacturing. Each requisition can include many lines, generally with a distinct item on each requisition line. Each requisition line includes at least a description of the item, the unit of measure, the quantity needed, the price per item, and the Accounting Flexfield you are charging for the item. See also internal sales order. purchased item An item that you buy and receive. If an item is also an inventory item, you may also be able to stock it. See also inventory item. purchasing documents Any document you use in the purchasing life cycle, including requisitions, RFQs, quotations, purchase orders, and purchase agreements. purchasing open interface A Purchasing function that lets you import price/sales catalog information from your suppliers. It receives the catalog data electronically, verifies and processes the data, and imports the data directly into Purchasing as blanket purchase agreements or quotations. purge A technique for deleting data in Oracle Manufacturing that you no longer need to run your business.
  • 182. Glossary-30 purge category A Purchasing feature you use to purge a particular group of records from the database. Purchasing lets you choose from the following separate categories: Simple Requisitions, Simple Purchase Orders, Suppliers, Simple Invoices (only if you installed Payables), and Matched Invoices and POs (only if you installed Payables). The last category is the most comprehensive category you can choose. You should purge all appropriate documents before purging your supplier information, because Purchasing does not purge suppliers that you referenced on existing documents. purge status A Purchasing method of reporting the progress of a purge you initiate. The Status field lets you take an action on your purge process (Initiate, Confirm, Abort), or reports on the current status of the purge (Printed, Deleting, Completed-Aborted, Completed- Purged). quantity accepted The number of items you accept after inspection. quantity-based order An order you place, receive, and pay based on the quantity, unit of measure, and price of the goods or services that you purchase. quantity received tolerance The percentage by which you allow quantity received to exceed quantity ordered. quantity rejected The number of items you reject after inspection. quotation A statement of the price, terms, and conditions of sale a supplier offers you for an item or items. A quotation usually includes a detailed description (specifications) of goods or services the supplier offers. Suppliers consider quotations as an offer to sell when given in response to an inquiry. A quotation may be verbal or written. You often get verbal quotations for minor purchases by telephone. You usually send a request for quotation if you want a written quotation from a supplier. Written quotations often have an effective date and an expiration date. quotation type A QuickCode you define to categorize your quotation information. Purchasing provides you with the following set of predefined quotation types: Catalog, Verbal, Telephone, or From RFQ. You can define other quotation types that better fit your business.
  • 183. Glossary-31 receipt A shipment from one supplier that can include many items ordered on many purchase orders. receipt line An individual receipt transaction that identifies receipt of an item against a purchase order shipment. receipt routing A method of simplifying transaction entry by specifying routing steps for receipts. receipt traveler An internal routing ticket you place on received goods to show their final destination. receiving open interface A set of interface tables in Purchasing that lets you import information from outside of Purchasing, from Oracle or non-Oracle applications. Some examples of information imported into the receiving open interface are Advance Shipment Notices (ASNs). The receiving open interface validates the information before importing it into the Purchasing application. receiving organization For drop-ship orders, the purchasing organization that records receipt of a drop- shipped item. reject For Oracle Automotive, Oracle Service and Oracle Work in Process, reject is an intraoperation step in an operation where you can record assemblies that require rework or need to be scrapped. For Oracle Purchasing and Oracle Quality, reject is an option you use to indicate that you do not want to approve a document. Purchasing returns the document to its owner for modification and resubmission if appropriate. reject over quantity tolerance An option you use to disallow receipts that exceed the tolerance level. release An actual order of goods and services you issue against a blanket purchase agreement. The blanket purchase agreement determines the characteristics and the prices of the items. The release specifies the actual quantities and dates ordered for the items. You identify a release by the combination of blanket purchase agreement number and release number.
  • 184. Glossary-32 reorder point planning An inventory planning method used to determine when and how much to order based on customer service level, safety stock, carrying cost, order setup cost, lead time and average demand. report An organized display of Oracle Applications information. A report can be viewed on- line or sent to a printer. The content of information in a report can range from a summary to a complete listing of values. report headings General information about the contents of the report. report options Options for sorting, formatting, selecting, and summarizing the information in the report. This section describes the options available for each report. requisition template A feature that lets you define a list of commonly purchased items from which a requestor can create a requisition. You can define the list of items by referencing an existing purchase order. Requestors use the requisition template to create simple, pre- sourced requisitions. request for quotation (RFQ) A document you use to solicit supplier quotations for goods or services you need. You usually send a request for quotation to many suppliers to ensure that you get the best price and terms possible. Depending on the way you do business, you can use two general types of RFQs: specific and generic. requisition See: purchase requisition and internal sales order. requisition approval The act of approving the purchases of the items on a requisition. A requisition must receive the required approvals before a buyer can create purchase orders from this requisition. The approvals can come from any employee, but a requisition is fully approved only when an employee who has enough authority approves it. If you require encumbrance or budgetary control for requisitions, a requisition is fully approved only when an employee with sufficient approval authority approves and reserves funds for the requisition. requisition encumbrance A transaction representing an intent to purchase goods and services as indicated by the
  • 185. Glossary-33 reservation of funds for a requisition. Purchasing subtracts requisition encumbrances from funds available when you reserve funds for a requisition. If you cancel a requisition, Purchasing creates appropriate reversing entries in your general ledger. requisition pool Requisition lines that are approved, not cancelled, and not yet on a purchase order. reserve An action you take in Purchasing to reserve funds for a purchasing document or an action in Order Entry to allocate products for a sales order. If the document passes the submission tests and if you have sufficient authority, Purchasing reserves funds for the document. Reserve for Encumbrance account The account you use to record your encumbrance liability. You define a Reserve for Encumbrance account when you define your ledger. When you create encumbrances automatically in Purchasing or Payables, General Ledger automatically creates a balancing entry to your Reserve for Encumbrance account when you post your encumbrance journal entries. And General Ledger overwrites the balancing segment for your Reserve for Encumbrance account, so you automatically create the reserve for encumbrance journal entry to the correct company. responsibility Determines the data, forms, menus, reports, and concurrent programs you can access in Oracle Applications. It is linked directly to a data group. Several users can share the same responsibility, and a single user can have multiple responsibilities. result code In Oracle Workflow, the internal name of a result value, as defined by the result type. See also: result type, result value. result type In Oracle Workflow, the name of the lookup type that contains an activity's possible result values. result value In Oracle Workflow, the value returned by a completed activity, such as Approved. See also: result code, result type. return In Purchasing, an AutoCreate option that lets a buyer return a requisition line and all other unpurchased requisition lines on the same requisition to the requisition preparer. In Order Entry, it is the opposite of a sales order. It involves receipt of goods previously
  • 186. Glossary-34 sold to a customer, credit to a customer, and possibly replacement with an identical or similar product. return material authorization (RMA) Permission for a customer to return items. return to supplier A transaction that allows you to return to the supplier items from a fully or partially received purchase order and receive credit for them. revision A particular version of an item, bill of material, or routing. revision quantity control A condition placed on an item that ensures that you always identify an item by its number and its revision. Certain items require tighter controls than other. For instance, you may want to control the quantities you have in inventory for an item by revision. For another item, you may just want to know the quantities you have on hand across all revisions. You keep track of inventory quantities by revision when an item is under revision quantity control. You keep track of inventory quantities by item when an item is not under revision quantity control. RFQ See also: request for quotation. RMA See also: Return Material Authorization. serial number A number assigned to each unit of an item and used to track the item. ledger A financial reporting entity that partitions General Ledger information and uses a particular chart of accounts, functional currency, and accounting calendar. This concept is the same whether or not the Multi-organization support feature is implemented. ship-to address A location where items are to be shipped. ship via See: freight carrier
  • 187. Glossary-35 shipment release An actual order of goods and services against a planned purchase order. The planned purchase order determines the characteristics of the items on the order. The planned purchase order also has the expected quantities, prices, and ship-to locations, and delivery dates for the items on the order. You identify a shipment release by the combination of the planned purchase order number and the release number. Each planned purchase order line can have multiple shipments and you can distribute the quantity of each shipment across multiple accounts. shipment relief The process of relieving the master demand schedule when a sales order ships. This decrements the demand schedule to represent an actual statement of demand. short notes A Purchasing feature that lets you provide up to 240 characters on your documents. Typically, these notes are for your supplier, approver, buyer, or receiver. simulation schedule Unofficial schedules for personal use that contain the most current scheduled item information. You can print simulation schedules, however you cannot confirm or send them via EDI. source base unit The unit of measure from which you are converting when you define your interclass conversions. You define the destination base unit in terms of the source base unit. Your source base unit is the base unit of a unit class. sourcing The action of identifying a purchasing source or supplier for goods or services. To identify the best sources for your purchases, you can create RFQs that you send to your suppliers, enter quotations from your supplier, and evaluate these quotations for each item you purchase. sourcing rule Specifies how to replenish items in an organization, such as purchased items in plants. You can also use sourcing rules to override sourcing that is specified in the bill of distribution assigned to an item. sourcing rule assignment See: assignment hierarchy spot buy Indirect spend for items that are not sourced, business critical and the requester needs
  • 188. Glossary-36 it. These are typically low Spend items, project based purchase with high volume transactions and too costly to involve sourcing and procurement organizations. Spot Buy is also defined as non-budgeted spend and are mostly non-catalog requests. SQL validation statement A statement written in SQL to customize action details. standard note A long note you define and can later reference on as many documents as you want. standard purchase order A type of purchase order you issue when you order delivery of goods or services for specific dates and locations for your company. Each standard purchase order line can have multiple shipments and you can distribute the quantity of each shipment across multiple accounts. See purchase order. standard receipt A receipt routing in which shipments are received into a receiving location and then delivered in a separate transaction. Standard receipts can be inspected or transferred before delivery. standard unit conversion The conversion formula you define between different units from the same unit class. You define your own standard conversion. status check A set of tests Purchasing performs on a purchasing document to ensure it is in a valid state before performing an approval action. submission check A set of tests on a purchasing document to ensure it is ready to be submitted for approval processing. submit To send a document to another employee without attempting to approve or reserve funds for it yourself. substitute receipt An option that lets you receive predefined acceptable substitutes for any item. supply chain planning The development and maintenance of multi-organizational distribution and
  • 189. Glossary-37 manufacturing plans across a global supply chain. summary message action A message representing one or more exceptions. The message may include introductory and closing paragraphs separated by the exceptions listed in a columnar report format. supplier Provider of goods or services. supplier product number The number your supplier assigns to an item. You and your supplier can have different item naming conventions. You can identify the item with one number (Item) while your supplier identifies this item using another number (Supplier Product Number). Using and referencing supplier product numbers helps you speed up your purchasing cycle. By referencing a number your supplier knows, you can help your suppliers understand your purchase orders and RFQs better. supplier purchasing hold A hold condition you place on a supplier to prevent new purchasing activity on the supplier. You cannot approve purchase orders for suppliers you placed on hold. supplier quotation list A list of suppliers who can provide goods or services you need. You often define a supplier quotation list for an item or class of items. You can use a supplier quotation list to generate multiple copies of a RFQ automatically and to manage supplier responses. supplier sourced component A component item on a bill of material supplied to work in process directly by a supplier. supply A quantity of materials available for use. Supply is replenished in response to demand or anticipated demand. supply agreement blanket purchase order A type of purchase order you issue before you request actual delivery of goods or services. You normally create a blanket purchase agreement to document a long-term supplier agreement. A blanket purchase agreement may contain an effective date and an expiration date, a committed amount, or quantity. You use a blanket purchase agreement as a tool for specifying agreed prices and delivery dates for goods and services before actually ordering them. Blanket agreement in Oracle Purchasing with the Supply Agreement flag set on the Blanket Agreement header. Only Supply Agreement Releases are picked up by Supplier Scheduling.
  • 190. Glossary-38 task A subdivision of project work. Each project can have a set of top level tasks and a hierarchy of subtasks below each top level task. See also: work breakdown structure. tax codes Codes to which you assign sales tax or value-added tax rates. three-way matching Purchasing performs three-way matching to verify the purchase order, receipt, and invoice information match within tolerance. total quantity accepted The total number of accepted items for the receipt line. total requisition limit The maximum amount you authorize an employee to approve for a specific requisition. trading partner Any company that sends and receives documents via EDI. transaction interface An open interface table through which you can import transactions. See open interface. transition In Oracle Workflow, the relationship that defines the completion of one activity and the activation of another activity within a process. In a process diagram, the arrow drawn between two activities represents a transition. See also: activity, Workflow Engine. two-level master scheduling A technique that facilitates the forecast explosion of product groupings into related master production schedules. The top-level MPS is usually defined for a product line, family or end product while the second-level is defined for key options and components. two-way matching Purchasing performs two-way matching to verify that purchase order and invoice information match within tolerance.
  • 191. Glossary-39 UN number An identifier for a hazardous material. Each Identification number has a description. Identification numbers are not unique. For instance, the same UN Number may correspond to 2 closely related but different types of materials. unit of measure The unit that the quantity of an item is expressed. unit of measure class A group of units of measure and their corresponding base unit of measure. The standard unit classes are Length, Weight, Volume, Area, Time, and Pack. unit of measure conversions Numerical factors that enable you to perform transactions in units other than the primary unit of the item being transacted. unordered receipt A site option that lets you receive an unordered item. You can later batch an unordered item to an existing purchase order, or add it to a new purchase order. UOM See: unit of measure. value added See: outside processing. value basis An attribute you associate with a line type to indicate whether you order items for this line type by quantity or amount. variance An accounting term used to express the difference between an expected cost and an actual cost. A variance can be favorable or unfavorable. Variances are usually written directly to the income statement as a period expense. vendor See: supplier. waybill A document containing a list of goods and shipping instructions relative to a shipment.
  • 192. Glossary-40 Workflow Engine The Oracle Workflow component that implements a workflow process definition. The Workflow Engine manages the state of all activities, automatically executes functions, maintains a history of completed activities, and detects error conditions and starts error processes. The Workflow Engine is implemented in server PL/SQL and activated when a call to an engine API is made. See also: Account Generator, activity, function, item type. X12 ANSI standard for inter-industry electronic interchange of business transactions.
  • 193. Index-1 Index A Address book, 8-7 managing, 8-8 Advance shipment notices, 5-2 creating, 5-2 Agreements see Supplier agreements, 4-32 ASBN see Advance shipment notices, 5-2 ASN see Advance shipment notices, 5-2 B Business classifications, 8-12 C Canceling ASNs, 5-9 Capacity information, 6-5 maintaining, 6-5 maintain order modifiers, 6-7 Claiming products and services, 8-14 Complex-work purchase orders, 4-23 Consigned inventory, 6-9 Contact directory, 8-9 managing, 8-9 Creating Advanced Shipment Notices, 5-5 E electronic kanban integrating with iSupplier Portal, 10-1 F Forecast information, 6-2 G Global buttons, 3-4, 9-2 H How to use this guide, 1-2 I Invoices retrieving, 7-4 submitting, 7-1 viewing, 7-6 iSupplier Portal integrating with electronic kanban, 10-1 L Links quick, 3-2, 9-3 M Maintaining order modifiers, 6-7 Manage Supplier Broker, 8-19 Managing address book details, 8-8 Manufacturing orders, 4-32 N
  • 194. Index-2 Notifications, 3-2, 9-3 Oracle iSupplier Portal home page, 3-2, 9-3 O Oracle iSupplier Portal home page global buttons, 3-4, 9-2 navigating, 3-1 notifications, 3-2, 9-3 orders at a glance, 3-3, 9-3 quick links, 3-2, 9-3 shipments at a glance, 3-3 tabs, 9-3 Oracle iSupplier Portal Home page, 3-1, 9-2 Orders at a glance, 3-3, 9-3, 9-3 P Payment information viewing, 7-11 Performance viewing, 5-15 Planning information forecasts, 6-2 Preferences setting up, 3-4 Product information, 6-2 consigned inventory, 6-9 supplier item summary, 6-2 viewing item inventory, 6-4 VMI, 6-8 Products and services, 8-13 claiming, 8-14 Prospective suppliers Reopening rejected registration requests, 2-4 Tracking registration status, 2-4 Purchase orders, 4-2 acknowledging, 4-7 submitting change requests, 4-12 viewing, 4-3 Q Quality information, 5-16 Quick links, 3-2, 9-3 R Receipts viewing, 5-13 Receiving information, 5-13 on-time delivery performance, 5-15 receipts, 5-13 Registration supplier user, 2-6 Requests for quotes, 4-36 Returns viewing, 5-15 S Searching, 3-5 Shipment information overdue receipts, 5-12 Shipments at a glance, 3-3 Shipping information advance shipment billing notices, 5-2 advance shipment notices, 5-2 Submitting change requests, 4-12 invoices, 7-1 Supplier registration, 2-2 user registration, 2-6 Supplier item summary defects, 6-3 inventory, 6-3 orders, 6-3 overdue, 6-3 performance, 6-3 receipt history, 6-3 returns, 6-3 viewing, 6-2 Supplier Profile Management address book, 8-7 business classifications, 8-12 contact directory, 8-9 products and services, 8-13 Supplier Profile Management flow, 8-2 T Tabs, 9-3 tax details, 8-5 Tolerance Based Auto-Approval, 9-14
  • 195. Index-3 U User preferences, 3-4 V Vendor Managed Inventory, 6-8 Viewing item inventory, 6-4 Viewing AP AR Netting Report, 7-9 Viewing invoice information, 7-6 Viewing payment information, 7-11 Viewing Schedules from Supplier Scheduling, 6- 10 Viewing supplier item summary, 6-2 VMI see Vendor Managed Inventory, 6-8 W withholding tax, 8-5 Work confirmation for complex-work purchase orders, 4-23